GnuTLS 3.8.4

Table of Contents

Next:   [Contents][Index]

GnuTLS

This manual is last updated 20 March 2024 for version 3.8.4 of GnuTLS.

Copyright © 2001-2024 Free Software Foundation, Inc.\\ Copyright © 2001-2024 Nikos Mavrogiannopoulos

Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License”.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

1 Preface

This document demonstrates and explains the GnuTLS library API. A brief introduction to the protocols and the technology involved is also included so that an application programmer can better understand the GnuTLS purpose and actual offerings. Even if GnuTLS is a typical library software, it operates over several security and cryptographic protocols which require the programmer to make careful and correct usage of them. Otherwise it is likely to only obtain a false sense of security. The term of security is very broad even if restricted to computer software, and cannot be confined to a single cryptographic library. For that reason, do not consider any program secure just because it uses GnuTLS; there are several ways to compromise a program or a communication line and GnuTLS only helps with some of them.

Although this document tries to be self contained, basic network programming and public key infrastructure (PKI) knowledge is assumed in most of it. A good introduction to networking can be found in [STEVENS], to public key infrastructure in [GUTPKI] and to security engineering in [ANDERSON].

Updated versions of the GnuTLS software and this document will be available from https://www.gnutls.org/.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

2 Introduction to GnuTLS

In brief GnuTLS can be described as a library which offers an API to access secure communication protocols. These protocols provide privacy over insecure lines, and were designed to prevent eavesdropping, tampering, or message forgery.

Technically GnuTLS is a portable ANSI C based library which implements the protocols ranging from SSL 3.0 to TLS 1.3 (see Introduction to TLS, for a detailed description of the protocols), accompanied with the required framework for authentication and public key infrastructure. Important features of the GnuTLS library include:

The GnuTLS library consists of three independent parts, namely the “TLS protocol part”, the “Certificate part”, and the “Cryptographic back-end” part. The “TLS protocol part” is the actual protocol implementation, and is entirely implemented within the GnuTLS library. The “Certificate part” consists of the certificate parsing, and verification functions and it uses functionality from the libtasn1 library. The “Cryptographic back-end” is provided by the nettle and gmplib libraries.


Next: , Up: Introduction to GnuTLS   [Contents][Index]

2.1 Downloading and installing

GnuTLS is available for download at: https://www.gnutls.org/download.html

GnuTLS uses a development cycle where even minor version numbers indicate a stable release and a odd minor version number indicate a development release. For example, GnuTLS 1.6.3 denote a stable release since 6 is even, and GnuTLS 1.7.11 denote a development release since 7 is odd.

GnuTLS depends on nettle and gmplib, and you will need to install it before installing GnuTLS. The nettle library is available from https://www.lysator.liu.se/~nisse/nettle/, while gmplib is available from https://www.gmplib.org/. Don’t forget to verify the cryptographic signature after downloading source code packages.

The package is then extracted, configured and built like many other packages that use Autoconf. For detailed information on configuring and building it, refer to the INSTALL file that is part of the distribution archive. Typically you invoke ./configure and then make check install. There are a number of compile-time parameters, as discussed below.

Several parts of GnuTLS require ASN.1 functionality, which is provided by a library called libtasn1. A copy of libtasn1 is included in GnuTLS. If you want to install it separately (e.g., to make it possibly to use libtasn1 in other programs), you can get it from https://www.gnu.org/software/libtasn1/.

The compression library, libz, the PKCS #11 helper library p11-kit, the TPM library trousers, as well as the IDN library libidn1 are optional dependencies. Check the README file in the distribution on how to obtain these libraries.

A few configure options may be relevant, summarized below. They disable or enable particular features, to create a smaller library with only the required features. Note however, that although a smaller library is generated, the included programs are not guaranteed to compile if some of these options are given.

--disable-srp-authentication
--disable-psk-authentication
--disable-anon-authentication
--disable-dhe
--disable-ecdhe
--disable-openssl-compatibility
--disable-dtls-srtp-support
--disable-alpn-support
--disable-heartbeat-support
--disable-libdane
--without-p11-kit
--without-tpm
--without-zlib

For the complete list, refer to the output from configure --help.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to GnuTLS   [Contents][Index]

2.2 Installing for a software distribution

When installing for a software distribution, it is often desirable to preconfigure GnuTLS with the system-wide paths and files. There two important configuration options, one sets the trust store in system, which are the CA certificates to be used by programs by default (if they don’t override it), and the other sets to DNSSEC root key file used by unbound for DNSSEC verification.

For the latter the following configuration option is available, and if not specified GnuTLS will try to auto-detect the location of that file.

--with-unbound-root-key-file

To set the trust store the following options are available.

--with-default-trust-store-file
--with-default-trust-store-dir
--with-default-trust-store-pkcs11

The first option is used to set a PEM file which contains a list of trusted certificates, while the second will read all certificates in the given path. The recommended option is the last, which allows to use a PKCS #11 trust policy module. That module not only provides the trusted certificates, but allows the categorization of them using purpose, e.g., CAs can be restricted for e-mail usage only, or administrative restrictions of CAs, for examples by restricting a CA to only issue certificates for a given DNS domain using NameConstraints. A publicly available PKCS #11 trust module is p11-kit’s trust module2.


Previous: , Up: Introduction to GnuTLS   [Contents][Index]

2.3 Overview

In this document we present an overview of the supported security protocols in Introduction to TLS, and continue by providing more information on the certificate authentication in Certificate authentication, and shared-key as well anonymous authentication in Shared-key and anonymous authentication. We elaborate on certificate authentication by demonstrating advanced usage of the API in More on certificate authentication. The core of the TLS library is presented in How to use GnuTLS in applications and example applications are listed in GnuTLS application examples. In Other included programs the usage of few included programs that may assist debugging is presented. The last chapter is Internal architecture of GnuTLS that provides a short introduction to GnuTLS’ internal architecture.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

3 Introduction to TLS and DTLS

TLS stands for “Transport Layer Security” and is the successor of SSL, the Secure Sockets Layer protocol [SSL3] designed by Netscape. TLS is an Internet protocol, defined by IETF3, described in [RFC5246]. The protocol provides confidentiality, and authentication layers over any reliable transport layer. The description, above, refers to TLS 1.0 but applies to all other TLS versions as the differences between the protocols are not major.

The DTLS protocol, or “Datagram TLS” [RFC4347] is a protocol with identical goals as TLS, but can operate under unreliable transport layers such as UDP. The discussions below apply to this protocol as well, except when noted otherwise.


Next: , Up: Introduction to TLS   [Contents][Index]

3.1 TLS Layers

TLS is a layered protocol, and consists of the record protocol, the handshake protocol and the alert protocol. The record protocol is to serve all other protocols and is above the transport layer. The record protocol offers symmetric encryption, and data authenticity4. The alert protocol offers some signaling to the other protocols. It can help informing the peer for the cause of failures and other error conditions. See The Alert Protocol, for more information. The alert protocol is above the record protocol.

The handshake protocol is responsible for the security parameters’ negotiation, the initial key exchange and authentication. See The Handshake Protocol, for more information about the handshake protocol. The protocol layering in TLS is shown in Figure 3.1.

gnutls-layers

Figure 3.1: The TLS protocol layers.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to TLS   [Contents][Index]

3.2 The Transport Layer

TLS is not limited to any transport layer and can be used above any transport layer, as long as it is a reliable one. DTLS can be used over reliable and unreliable transport layers. GnuTLS supports TCP and UDP layers transparently using the Berkeley sockets API. However, any transport layer can be used by providing callbacks for GnuTLS to access the transport layer (for details see Setting up the transport layer).


Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to TLS   [Contents][Index]

3.3 The TLS record protocol

The record protocol is the secure communications provider. Its purpose is to encrypt, and authenticate packets. The record layer functions can be called at any time after the handshake process is finished, when there is need to receive or send data. In DTLS however, due to re-transmission timers used in the handshake out-of-order handshake data might be received for some time (maximum 60 seconds) after the handshake process is finished.

The functions to access the record protocol are limited to send and receive functions, which might, given the importance of this protocol in TLS, seem awkward. This is because the record protocol’s parameters are all set by the handshake protocol. The record protocol initially starts with NULL parameters, which means no encryption, and no MAC is used. Encryption and authentication begin just after the handshake protocol has finished.


Next: , Up: The TLS record protocol   [Contents][Index]

3.3.1 Encryption algorithms used in the record layer

Confidentiality in the record layer is achieved by using symmetric ciphers like AES or CHACHA20. Ciphers are encryption algorithms that use a single, secret, key to encrypt and decrypt data. Early versions of TLS separated between block and stream ciphers and had message authentication plugged in to them by the protocol, though later versions switched to using authenticated-encryption (AEAD) ciphers. The AEAD ciphers are defined to combine encryption and authentication, and as such they are not only more efficient, as the primitives used are designed to interoperate nicely, but they are also known to interoperate in a secure way.

The supported in GnuTLS ciphers and MAC algorithms are shown in Table 3.1 and Table 3.2.

AlgorithmTypeApplicable ProtocolsDescription
AES-128-GCM, AES-256-GCMAEADTLS 1.2, TLS 1.3This is the AES algorithm in the authenticated encryption GCM mode. This mode combines message authentication and encryption and can be extremely fast on CPUs that support hardware acceleration.
AES-128-CCM, AES-256-CCMAEADTLS 1.2, TLS 1.3This is the AES algorithm in the authenticated encryption CCM mode. This mode combines message authentication and encryption and is often used by systems without AES or GCM acceleration support.
CHACHA20-POLY1305AEADTLS 1.2, TLS 1.3CHACHA20-POLY1305 is an authenticated encryption algorithm based on CHACHA20 cipher and POLY1305 MAC. CHACHA20 is a refinement of SALSA20 algorithm, an approved cipher by the European ESTREAM project. POLY1305 is Wegman-Carter, one-time authenticator. The combination provides a fast stream cipher suitable for systems where a hardware AES accelerator is not available.
AES-128-CCM-8, AES-256-CCM-8AEADTLS 1.2, TLS 1.3This is the AES algorithm in the authenticated encryption CCM mode with a truncated to 64-bit authentication tag. This mode is for communication with restricted systems.
CAMELLIA-128-GCM, CAMELLIA-256-GCMAEADTLS 1.2This is the CAMELLIA algorithm in the authenticated encryption GCM mode.
AES-128-CBC, AES-256-CBCLegacy (block)TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, TLS 1.2AES or RIJNDAEL is the block cipher algorithm that replaces the old DES algorithm. It has 128 bits block size and is used in CBC mode.
CAMELLIA-128-CBC, CAMELLIA-256-CBCLegacy (block)TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, TLS 1.2This is an 128-bit block cipher developed by Mitsubishi and NTT. It is one of the approved ciphers of the European NESSIE and Japanese CRYPTREC projects.
3DES-CBCLegacy (block)TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, TLS 1.2This is the DES block cipher algorithm used with triple encryption (EDE). Has 64 bits block size and is used in CBC mode.
ARCFOUR-128Legacy (stream)TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, TLS 1.2ARCFOUR-128 is a compatible algorithm with RSA’s RC4 algorithm, which is considered to be a trade secret. It is a considered to be broken, and is only used for compatibility purposed. For this reason it is not enabled by default.
GOST28147-TC26Z-CNTLegacy (stream)TLS 1.2This is a 64-bit block cipher GOST 28147-89 with TC26Z S-Box working in CNT mode. It is one of the approved ciphers in Russia. It is not enabled by default.
NULLLegacy (stream)TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, TLS 1.2NULL is the empty/identity cipher which doesn’t encrypt any data. It can be combined with data authentication under TLS 1.2 or earlier, but is only used transiently under TLS 1.3 until encryption starts. This cipher cannot be negotiated by default (need to be explicitly enabled) under TLS 1.2, and cannot be negotiated at all under TLS 1.3. When enabled, TLS 1.3 (or later) support will be implicitly disabled.

Table 3.1: Supported ciphers in TLS.

AlgorithmDescription
MAC-MD5This is an HMAC based on MD5 a cryptographic hash algorithm designed by Ron Rivest. Outputs 128 bits of data.
MAC-SHA1An HMAC based on the SHA1 cryptographic hash algorithm designed by NSA. Outputs 160 bits of data.
MAC-SHA256An HMAC based on SHA2-256. Outputs 256 bits of data.
MAC-SHA384An HMAC based on SHA2-384. Outputs 384 bits of data.
GOST28147-TC26Z-IMITThis is a 64-bit block cipher GOST 28147-89 with TC26Z S-Box working in special MAC mode called Imitovstavks. It is one of the approved MAC algorithms in Russia. Outputs 32 bits of data. It is not enabled by default.
MAC-AEADThis indicates that an authenticated encryption algorithm, such as GCM, is in use.

Table 3.2: Supported MAC algorithms in TLS.


Next: , Previous: , Up: The TLS record protocol   [Contents][Index]

3.3.2 Compression algorithms and the record layer

In early versions of TLS the record layer supported compression. However, that proved to be problematic in many ways, and enabled several attacks based on traffic analysis on the transported data. For that newer versions of the protocol no longer offer compression, and GnuTLS since 3.6.0 no longer implements any support for compression.


Previous: , Up: The TLS record protocol   [Contents][Index]

3.3.3 On record padding

The TLS 1.3 protocol allows for extra padding of records to prevent statistical analysis based on the length of exchanged messages. GnuTLS takes advantage of this feature, by allowing the user to specify the amount of padding for a particular message. The simplest interface is provided by gnutls_record_send2, and is made available when under TLS1.3; alternatively gnutls_record_can_use_length_hiding can be queried.

Note that this interface is not sufficient to completely hide the length of the data. The application code may reveal the data transferred by leaking its data processing time, or by leaking the TLS1.3 record processing time by GnuTLS. That is because under TLS1.3 the padding removal time depends on the padding data for an efficient implementation. To make that processing constant time the gnutls_init function must be called with the flag GNUTLS_SAFE_PADDING_CHECK.

Function: ssize_t gnutls_record_send2 (gnutls_session_t session, const void * data, size_t data_size, size_t pad, unsigned flags)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

data: contains the data to send

data_size: is the length of the data

pad: padding to be added to the record

flags: must be zero

This function is identical to gnutls_record_send() except that it takes an extra argument to specify padding to be added the record. To determine the maximum size of padding, use gnutls_record_get_max_size() and gnutls_record_overhead_size() .

Note that in order for GnuTLS to provide constant time processing of padding and data in TLS1.3, the flag GNUTLS_SAFE_PADDING_CHECK must be used in gnutls_init() .

Returns: The number of bytes sent, or a negative error code. The number of bytes sent might be less than data_size . The maximum number of bytes this function can send in a single call depends on the negotiated maximum record size.

Since: 3.6.3

Older GnuTLS versions provided an API suitable for cases where the sender sends data that are always within a given range. That API is still available, and consists of the following functions.

unsigned gnutls_record_can_use_length_hiding (gnutls_session_t session)
ssize_t gnutls_record_send_range (gnutls_session_t session, const void * data, size_t data_size, const gnutls_range_st * range)

Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to TLS   [Contents][Index]

3.4 The TLS alert protocol

The alert protocol is there to allow signals to be sent between peers. These signals are mostly used to inform the peer about the cause of a protocol failure. Some of these signals are used internally by the protocol and the application protocol does not have to cope with them (e.g. GNUTLS_A_CLOSE_NOTIFY), and others refer to the application protocol solely (e.g. GNUTLS_A_USER_CANCELLED). An alert signal includes a level indication which may be either fatal or warning (under TLS1.3 all alerts are fatal). Fatal alerts always terminate the current connection, and prevent future re-negotiations using the current session ID. All supported alert messages are summarized in the table below.

The alert messages are protected by the record protocol, thus the information that is included does not leak. You must take extreme care for the alert information not to leak to a possible attacker, via public log files etc.

AlertIDDescription
GNUTLS_A_CLOSE_NOTIFY0Close notify
GNUTLS_A_UNEXPECTED_MESSAGE10Unexpected message
GNUTLS_A_BAD_RECORD_MAC20Bad record MAC
GNUTLS_A_DECRYPTION_FAILED21Decryption failed
GNUTLS_A_RECORD_OVERFLOW22Record overflow
GNUTLS_A_DECOMPRESSION_FAILURE30Decompression failed
GNUTLS_A_HANDSHAKE_FAILURE40Handshake failed
GNUTLS_A_SSL3_NO_CERTIFICATE41No certificate (SSL 3.0)
GNUTLS_A_BAD_CERTIFICATE42Certificate is bad
GNUTLS_A_UNSUPPORTED_CERTIFICATE43Certificate is not supported
GNUTLS_A_CERTIFICATE_REVOKED44Certificate was revoked
GNUTLS_A_CERTIFICATE_EXPIRED45Certificate is expired
GNUTLS_A_CERTIFICATE_UNKNOWN46Unknown certificate
GNUTLS_A_ILLEGAL_PARAMETER47Illegal parameter
GNUTLS_A_UNKNOWN_CA48CA is unknown
GNUTLS_A_ACCESS_DENIED49Access was denied
GNUTLS_A_DECODE_ERROR50Decode error
GNUTLS_A_DECRYPT_ERROR51Decrypt error
GNUTLS_A_EXPORT_RESTRICTION60Export restriction
GNUTLS_A_PROTOCOL_VERSION70Error in protocol version
GNUTLS_A_INSUFFICIENT_SECURITY71Insufficient security
GNUTLS_A_INTERNAL_ERROR80Internal error
GNUTLS_A_INAPPROPRIATE_FALLBACK86Inappropriate fallback
GNUTLS_A_USER_CANCELED90User canceled
GNUTLS_A_NO_RENEGOTIATION100No renegotiation is allowed
GNUTLS_A_MISSING_EXTENSION109An extension was expected but was not seen
GNUTLS_A_UNSUPPORTED_EXTENSION110An unsupported extension was sent
GNUTLS_A_CERTIFICATE_UNOBTAINABLE111Could not retrieve the specified certificate
GNUTLS_A_UNRECOGNIZED_NAME112The server name sent was not recognized
GNUTLS_A_UNKNOWN_PSK_IDENTITY115The SRP/PSK username is missing or not known
GNUTLS_A_CERTIFICATE_REQUIRED116Certificate is required
GNUTLS_A_NO_APPLICATION_PROTOCOL120No supported application protocol could be negotiated

Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to TLS   [Contents][Index]

3.5 The TLS handshake protocol

The handshake protocol is responsible for the ciphersuite negotiation, the initial key exchange, and the authentication of the two peers. This is fully controlled by the application layer, thus your program has to set up the required parameters. The main handshake function is gnutls_handshake. In the next paragraphs we elaborate on the handshake protocol, i.e., the ciphersuite negotiation.


Next: , Up: The TLS Handshake Protocol   [Contents][Index]

3.5.1 TLS ciphersuites

The TLS cipher suites have slightly different meaning under different protocols. Under TLS 1.3, a cipher suite indicates the symmetric encryption algorithm in use, as well as the pseudo-random function (PRF) used in the TLS session.

Under TLS 1.2 or early the handshake protocol negotiates cipher suites of a special form illustrated by the TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_CBC_SHA cipher suite name. A typical cipher suite contains these parameters:

The cipher suite negotiated in the handshake protocol will affect the record protocol, by enabling encryption and data authentication. Note that you should not over rely on TLS to negotiate the strongest available cipher suite. Do not enable ciphers and algorithms that you consider weak.

All the supported ciphersuites are listed in ciphersuites.


Next: , Previous: , Up: The TLS Handshake Protocol   [Contents][Index]

3.5.2 Authentication

The key exchange algorithms of the TLS protocol offer authentication, which is a prerequisite for a secure connection. The available authentication methods in GnuTLS, under TLS 1.3 or earlier versions, follow.

Under TLS 1.2 or earlier versions, the following authentication methods are also available.


Next: , Previous: , Up: The TLS Handshake Protocol   [Contents][Index]

3.5.3 Client authentication

In the case of ciphersuites that use certificate authentication, the authentication of the client is optional in TLS. A server may request a certificate from the client using the gnutls_certificate_server_set_request function. We elaborate in Certificate credentials.


Previous: , Up: The TLS Handshake Protocol   [Contents][Index]

3.5.4 Resuming sessions

The TLS handshake process performs expensive calculations and a busy server might easily be put under load. To reduce the load, session resumption may be used. This is a feature of the TLS protocol which allows a client to connect to a server after a successful handshake, without the expensive calculations. This is achieved by re-using the previously established keys, meaning the server needs to store the state of established connections (unless session tickets are used – Session tickets).

Session resumption is an integral part of GnuTLS, and Session resumption, ex-resume-client illustrate typical uses of it.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to TLS   [Contents][Index]

3.6 TLS extensions

A number of extensions to the TLS protocol have been proposed mainly in [TLSEXT]. The extensions supported in GnuTLS are discussed in the subsections that follow.


Next: , Up: TLS Extensions   [Contents][Index]

3.6.1 Maximum fragment length negotiation

This extension allows a TLS implementation to negotiate a smaller value for record packet maximum length. This extension may be useful to clients with constrained capabilities. The functions shown below can be used to control this extension.

size_t gnutls_record_get_max_size (gnutls_session_t session)
ssize_t gnutls_record_set_max_size (gnutls_session_t session, size_t size)

Next: , Previous: , Up: TLS Extensions   [Contents][Index]

3.6.2 Server name indication

A common problem in HTTPS servers is the fact that the TLS protocol is not aware of the hostname that a client connects to, when the handshake procedure begins. For that reason the TLS server has no way to know which certificate to send.

This extension solves that problem within the TLS protocol, and allows a client to send the HTTP hostname before the handshake begins within the first handshake packet. The functions gnutls_server_name_set and gnutls_server_name_get can be used to enable this extension, or to retrieve the name sent by a client.

int gnutls_server_name_set (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_server_name_type_t type, const void * name, size_t name_length)
int gnutls_server_name_get (gnutls_session_t session, void * data, size_t * data_length, unsigned int * type, unsigned int indx)

Next: , Previous: , Up: TLS Extensions   [Contents][Index]

3.6.3 Session tickets

To resume a TLS session, the server normally stores session parameters. This complicates deployment, and can be avoided by delegating the storage to the client. Because session parameters are sensitive they are encrypted and authenticated with a key only known to the server and then sent to the client. The Session Tickets extension is described in RFC 5077 [TLSTKT].

A disadvantage of session tickets is that they eliminate the effects of forward secrecy when a server uses the same key for long time. That is, the secrecy of all sessions on a server using tickets depends on the ticket key being kept secret. For that reason server keys should be rotated and discarded regularly.

Since version 3.1.3 GnuTLS clients transparently support session tickets, unless forward secrecy is explicitly requested (with the PFS priority string).

Under TLS 1.3 session tickets are mandatory for session resumption, and they do not share the forward secrecy concerns as with TLS 1.2 or earlier.


Next: , Previous: , Up: TLS Extensions   [Contents][Index]

3.6.4 HeartBeat

This is a TLS extension that allows to ping and receive confirmation from the peer, and is described in [RFC6520]. The extension is disabled by default and gnutls_heartbeat_enable can be used to enable it. A policy may be negotiated to only allow sending heartbeat messages or sending and receiving. The current session policy can be checked with gnutls_heartbeat_allowed. The requests coming from the peer result to GNUTLS_E_HEARTBEAT_PING_RECEIVED being returned from the receive function. Ping requests to peer can be send via gnutls_heartbeat_ping.

unsigned gnutls_heartbeat_allowed (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int type)
void gnutls_heartbeat_enable (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int type)
int gnutls_heartbeat_ping (gnutls_session_t session, size_t data_size, unsigned int max_tries, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_heartbeat_pong (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int flags)
void gnutls_heartbeat_set_timeouts (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int retrans_timeout, unsigned int total_timeout)
unsigned int gnutls_heartbeat_get_timeout (gnutls_session_t session)

Next: , Previous: , Up: TLS Extensions   [Contents][Index]

3.6.5 Safe renegotiation

TLS gives the option to two communicating parties to renegotiate and update their security parameters. One useful example of this feature was for a client to initially connect using anonymous negotiation to a server, and the renegotiate using some authenticated ciphersuite. This occurred to avoid having the client sending its credentials in the clear.

However this renegotiation, as initially designed would not ensure that the party one is renegotiating is the same as the one in the initial negotiation. For example one server could forward all renegotiation traffic to an other server who will see this traffic as an initial negotiation attempt.

This might be seen as a valid design decision, but it seems it was not widely known or understood, thus today some application protocols use the TLS renegotiation feature in a manner that enables a malicious server to insert content of his choice in the beginning of a TLS session.

The most prominent vulnerability was with HTTPS. There servers request a renegotiation to enforce an anonymous user to use a certificate in order to access certain parts of a web site. The attack works by having the attacker simulate a client and connect to a server, with server-only authentication, and send some data intended to cause harm. The server will then require renegotiation from him in order to perform the request. When the proper client attempts to contact the server, the attacker hijacks that connection and forwards traffic to the initial server that requested renegotiation. The attacker will not be able to read the data exchanged between the client and the server. However, the server will (incorrectly) assume that the initial request sent by the attacker was sent by the now authenticated client. The result is a prefix plain-text injection attack.

The above is just one example. Other vulnerabilities exists that do not rely on the TLS renegotiation to change the client’s authenticated status (either TLS or application layer).

While fixing these application protocols and implementations would be one natural reaction, an extension to TLS has been designed that cryptographically binds together any renegotiated handshakes with the initial negotiation. When the extension is used, the attack is detected and the session can be terminated. The extension is specified in [RFC5746].

GnuTLS supports the safe renegotiation extension. The default behavior is as follows. Clients will attempt to negotiate the safe renegotiation extension when talking to servers. Servers will accept the extension when presented by clients. Clients and servers will permit an initial handshake to complete even when the other side does not support the safe renegotiation extension. Clients and servers will refuse renegotiation attempts when the extension has not been negotiated.

Note that permitting clients to connect to servers when the safe renegotiation extension is not enabled, is open up for attacks. Changing this default behavior would prevent interoperability against the majority of deployed servers out there. We will reconsider this default behavior in the future when more servers have been upgraded. Note that it is easy to configure clients to always require the safe renegotiation extension from servers.

To modify the default behavior, we have introduced some new priority strings (see Priority Strings). The %UNSAFE_RENEGOTIATION priority string permits (re-)handshakes even when the safe renegotiation extension was not negotiated. The default behavior is %PARTIAL_RENEGOTIATION that will prevent renegotiation with clients and servers not supporting the extension. This is secure for servers but leaves clients vulnerable to some attacks, but this is a trade-off between security and compatibility with old servers. The %SAFE_RENEGOTIATION priority string makes clients and servers require the extension for every handshake. The latter is the most secure option for clients, at the cost of not being able to connect to legacy servers. Servers will also deny clients that do not support the extension from connecting.

It is possible to disable use of the extension completely, in both clients and servers, by using the %DISABLE_SAFE_RENEGOTIATION priority string however we strongly recommend you to only do this for debugging and test purposes.

The default values if the flags above are not specified are:

Server:

%PARTIAL_RENEGOTIATION

Client:

%PARTIAL_RENEGOTIATION

For applications we have introduced a new API related to safe renegotiation. The gnutls_safe_renegotiation_status function is used to check if the extension has been negotiated on a session, and can be used both by clients and servers.


Next: , Previous: , Up: TLS Extensions   [Contents][Index]

3.6.6 OCSP status request

The Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) is a protocol that allows the client to verify the server certificate for revocation without messing with certificate revocation lists. Its drawback is that it requires the client to connect to the server’s CA OCSP server and request the status of the certificate. This extension however, enables a TLS server to include its CA OCSP server response in the handshake. That is an HTTPS server may periodically run ocsptool (see ocsptool Invocation) to obtain its certificate revocation status and serve it to the clients. That way a client avoids an additional connection to the OCSP server.

See OCSP stapling for further information.

Since version 3.1.3 GnuTLS clients transparently support the certificate status request.


Next: , Previous: , Up: TLS Extensions   [Contents][Index]

3.6.7 SRTP

The TLS protocol was extended in [RFC5764] to provide keying material to the Secure RTP (SRTP) protocol. The SRTP protocol provides an encapsulation of encrypted data that is optimized for voice data. With the SRTP TLS extension two peers can negotiate keys using TLS or DTLS and obtain keying material for use with SRTP. The available SRTP profiles are listed below.

GNUTLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80

128 bit AES with a 80 bit HMAC-SHA1

GNUTLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32

128 bit AES with a 32 bit HMAC-SHA1

GNUTLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_80

NULL cipher with a 80 bit HMAC-SHA1

GNUTLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_32

NULL cipher with a 32 bit HMAC-SHA1

GNUTLS_SRTP_AEAD_AES_128_GCM

128 bit AES with GCM

GNUTLS_SRTP_AEAD_AES_256_GCM

256 bit AES with GCM

Figure 3.2: Supported SRTP profiles

To enable use the following functions.

int gnutls_srtp_set_profile (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_srtp_profile_t profile)
int gnutls_srtp_set_profile_direct (gnutls_session_t session, const char * profiles, const char ** err_pos)

To obtain the negotiated keys use the function below.

Function: int gnutls_srtp_get_keys (gnutls_session_t session, void * key_material, unsigned int key_material_size, gnutls_datum_t * client_key, gnutls_datum_t * client_salt, gnutls_datum_t * server_key, gnutls_datum_t * server_salt)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

key_material: Space to hold the generated key material

key_material_size: The maximum size of the key material

client_key: The master client write key, pointing inside the key material

client_salt: The master client write salt, pointing inside the key material

server_key: The master server write key, pointing inside the key material

server_salt: The master server write salt, pointing inside the key material

This is a helper function to generate the keying material for SRTP. It requires the space of the key material to be pre-allocated (should be at least 2x the maximum key size and salt size). The client_key , client_salt , server_key and server_salt are convenience datums that point inside the key material. They may be NULL .

Returns: On success the size of the key material is returned, otherwise, GNUTLS_E_SHORT_MEMORY_BUFFER if the buffer given is not sufficient, or a negative error code.

Since 3.1.4

Other helper functions are listed below.

int gnutls_srtp_get_selected_profile (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_srtp_profile_t * profile)
const char * gnutls_srtp_get_profile_name (gnutls_srtp_profile_t profile)
int gnutls_srtp_get_profile_id (const char * name, gnutls_srtp_profile_t * profile)

Next: , Previous: , Up: TLS Extensions   [Contents][Index]

3.6.8 False Start

The TLS protocol was extended in [RFC7918] to allow the client to send data to server in a single round trip. This change however operates on the borderline of the TLS protocol security guarantees and should be used for the cases where the reduced latency outperforms the risk of an adversary intercepting the transferred data. In GnuTLS applications can use the GNUTLS_ENABLE_FALSE_START as option to gnutls_init to request an early return of the gnutls_handshake function. After that early return the application is expected to transfer any data to be piggybacked on the last handshake message.

After handshake’s early termination, the application is expected to transmit data using gnutls_record_send, and call gnutls_record_recv on any received data as soon, to ensure that handshake completes timely. That is, especially relevant for applications which set an explicit time limit for the handshake process via gnutls_handshake_set_timeout.

Note however, that the API ensures that the early return will not happen if the false start requirements are not satisfied. That is, on ciphersuites which are not enabled for false start or on insufficient key sizes, the handshake process will complete properly (i.e., no early return). To verify that false start was used you may use gnutls_session_get_flags and check for the GNUTLS_SFLAGS_FALSE_START flag. For GnuTLS the false start is enabled for the following key exchange methods (see [RFC7918] for rationale)

but only when the negotiated parameters exceed GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_HIGH –see Table 6.7, and when under (D)TLS 1.2 or later.


Next: , Previous: , Up: TLS Extensions   [Contents][Index]

3.6.9 Application Layer Protocol Negotiation (ALPN)

The TLS protocol was extended in RFC7301 to provide the application layer a method of negotiating the application protocol version. This allows for negotiation of the application protocol during the TLS handshake, thus reducing round-trips. The application protocol is described by an opaque string. To enable, use the following functions.

int gnutls_alpn_set_protocols (gnutls_session_t session, const gnutls_datum_t * protocols, unsigned protocols_size, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_alpn_get_selected_protocol (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_datum_t * protocol)

Note that these functions are intended to be used with protocols that are registered in the Application Layer Protocol Negotiation IANA registry. While you can use them for other protocols (at the risk of collisions), it is preferable to register them.


Previous: , Up: TLS Extensions   [Contents][Index]

3.6.10 Extensions and Supplemental Data

It is possible to transfer supplemental data during the TLS handshake, following [RFC4680]. This is for "custom" protocol modifications for applications which may want to transfer additional data (e.g. additional authentication messages). Such an exchange requires a custom extension to be registered. The provided API for this functionality is low-level and described in TLS Hello Extension Handling.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to TLS   [Contents][Index]

3.7 How to use TLS in application protocols

This chapter is intended to provide some hints on how to use TLS over simple custom made application protocols. The discussion below mainly refers to the TCP/IP transport layer but may be extended to other ones too.


Next: , Up: How to use TLS in application protocols   [Contents][Index]

3.7.1 Separate ports

Traditionally SSL was used in application protocols by assigning a new port number for the secure services. By doing this two separate ports were assigned, one for the non-secure sessions, and one for the secure sessions. This method ensures that if a user requests a secure session then the client will attempt to connect to the secure port and fail otherwise. The only possible attack with this method is to perform a denial of service attack. The most famous example of this method is “HTTP over TLS” or HTTPS protocol [RFC2818].

Despite its wide use, this method has several issues. This approach starts the TLS Handshake procedure just after the client connects on the —so called— secure port. That way the TLS protocol does not know anything about the client, and popular methods like the host advertising in HTTP do not work6. There is no way for the client to say “I connected to YYY server” before the Handshake starts, so the server cannot possibly know which certificate to use.

Other than that it requires two separate ports to run a single service, which is unnecessary complication. Due to the fact that there is a limitation on the available privileged ports, this approach was soon deprecated in favor of upward negotiation.


Previous: , Up: How to use TLS in application protocols   [Contents][Index]

3.7.2 Upward negotiation

Other application protocols7 use a different approach to enable the secure layer. They use something often called as the “TLS upgrade” method. This method is quite tricky but it is more flexible. The idea is to extend the application protocol to have a “STARTTLS” request, whose purpose it to start the TLS protocols just after the client requests it. This approach does not require any extra port to be reserved. There is even an extension to HTTP protocol to support this method [RFC2817].

The tricky part, in this method, is that the “STARTTLS” request is sent in the clear, thus is vulnerable to modifications. A typical attack is to modify the messages in a way that the client is fooled and thinks that the server does not have the “STARTTLS” capability. See a typical conversation of a hypothetical protocol:

(client connects to the server)

CLIENT: HELLO I’M MR. XXX

SERVER: NICE TO MEET YOU XXX

CLIENT: PLEASE START TLS

SERVER: OK

*** TLS STARTS

CLIENT: HERE ARE SOME CONFIDENTIAL DATA

And an example of a conversation where someone is acting in between:

(client connects to the server)

CLIENT: HELLO I’M MR. XXX

SERVER: NICE TO MEET YOU XXX

CLIENT: PLEASE START TLS

(here someone inserts this message)

SERVER: SORRY I DON’T HAVE THIS CAPABILITY

CLIENT: HERE ARE SOME CONFIDENTIAL DATA

As you can see above the client was fooled, and was naïve enough to send the confidential data in the clear, despite the server telling the client that it does not support “STARTTLS”.

How do we avoid the above attack? As you may have already noticed this situation is easy to avoid. The client has to ask the user before it connects whether the user requests TLS or not. If the user answered that he certainly wants the secure layer the last conversation should be:

(client connects to the server)

CLIENT: HELLO I’M MR. XXX

SERVER: NICE TO MEET YOU XXX

CLIENT: PLEASE START TLS

(here someone inserts this message)

SERVER: SORRY I DON’T HAVE THIS CAPABILITY

CLIENT: BYE

(the client notifies the user that the secure connection was not possible)

This method, if implemented properly, is far better than the traditional method, and the security properties remain the same, since only denial of service is possible. The benefit is that the server may request additional data before the TLS Handshake protocol starts, in order to send the correct certificate, use the correct password file, or anything else!


Previous: , Up: Introduction to TLS   [Contents][Index]

3.8 On SSL 2 and older protocols

One of the initial decisions in the GnuTLS development was to implement the known security protocols for the transport layer. Initially TLS 1.0 was implemented since it was the latest at that time, and was considered to be the most advanced in security properties. Later the SSL 3.0 protocol was implemented since it is still the only protocol supported by several servers and there are no serious security vulnerabilities known.

One question that may arise is why we didn’t implement SSL 2.0 in the library. There are several reasons, most important being that it has serious security flaws, unacceptable for a modern security library. Other than that, this protocol is barely used by anyone these days since it has been deprecated since 1996. The security problems in SSL 2.0 include:

Other protocols such as Microsoft’s PCT 1 and PCT 2 were not implemented because they were also abandoned and deprecated by SSL 3.0 and later TLS 1.0.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

4 Authentication methods

The initial key exchange of the TLS protocol performs authentication of the peers. In typical scenarios the server is authenticated to the client, and optionally the client to the server.

While many associate TLS with X.509 certificates and public key authentication, the protocol supports various authentication methods, including pre-shared keys, and passwords. In this chapter a description of the existing authentication methods is provided, as well as some guidance on which use-cases each method can be used at.


Next: , Up: Authentication methods   [Contents][Index]

4.1 Certificate authentication

The most known authentication method of TLS are certificates. The PKIX [PKIX] public key infrastructure is daily used by anyone using a browser today. GnuTLS provides a simple API to verify the X.509 certificates as in [PKIX].

The key exchange algorithms supported by certificate authentication are shown in Table 4.1.

Key exchangeDescription
RSAThe RSA algorithm is used to encrypt a key and send it to the peer. The certificate must allow the key to be used for encryption.
DHE_RSAThe RSA algorithm is used to sign ephemeral Diffie-Hellman parameters which are sent to the peer. The key in the certificate must allow the key to be used for signing. Note that key exchange algorithms which use ephemeral Diffie-Hellman parameters, offer perfect forward secrecy. That means that even if the private key used for signing is compromised, it cannot be used to reveal past session data.
ECDHE_RSAThe RSA algorithm is used to sign ephemeral elliptic curve Diffie-Hellman parameters which are sent to the peer. The key in the certificate must allow the key to be used for signing. It also offers perfect forward secrecy. That means that even if the private key used for signing is compromised, it cannot be used to reveal past session data.
DHE_DSSThe DSA algorithm is used to sign ephemeral Diffie-Hellman parameters which are sent to the peer. The certificate must contain DSA parameters to use this key exchange algorithm. DSA is the algorithm of the Digital Signature Standard (DSS).
ECDHE_ECDSAThe Elliptic curve DSA algorithm is used to sign ephemeral elliptic curve Diffie-Hellman parameters which are sent to the peer. The certificate must contain ECDSA parameters (i.e., EC and marked for signing) to use this key exchange algorithm.

Table 4.1: Supported key exchange algorithms.


Next: , Up: Certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.1.1 X.509 certificates

The X.509 protocols rely on a hierarchical trust model. In this trust model Certification Authorities (CAs) are used to certify entities. Usually more than one certification authorities exist, and certification authorities may certify other authorities to issue certificates as well, following a hierarchical model.

gnutls-x509

Figure 4.1: An example of the X.509 hierarchical trust model.

One needs to trust one or more CAs for his secure communications. In that case only the certificates issued by the trusted authorities are acceptable. The framework is illustrated on Figure 4.1.


Next: , Up: X.509 certificates   [Contents][Index]

4.1.1.1 X.509 certificate structure

An X.509 certificate usually contains information about the certificate holder, the signer, a unique serial number, expiration dates and some other fields [PKIX] as shown in Table 4.2.

FieldDescription
versionThe field that indicates the version of the certificate.
serialNumberThis field holds a unique serial number per certificate.
signatureThe issuing authority’s signature.
issuerHolds the issuer’s distinguished name.
validityThe activation and expiration dates.
subjectThe subject’s distinguished name of the certificate.
extensionsThe extensions are fields only present in version 3 certificates.

Table 4.2: X.509 certificate fields.

The certificate’s subject or issuer name is not just a single string. It is a Distinguished name and in the ASN.1 notation is a sequence of several object identifiers with their corresponding values. Some of available OIDs to be used in an X.509 distinguished name are defined in gnutls/x509.h.

The Version field in a certificate has values either 1 or 3 for version 3 certificates. Version 1 certificates do not support the extensions field so it is not possible to distinguish a CA from a person, thus their usage should be avoided.

The validity dates are there to indicate the date that the specific certificate was activated and the date the certificate’s key would be considered invalid.

In GnuTLS the X.509 certificate structures are handled using the gnutls_x509_crt_t type and the corresponding private keys with the gnutls_x509_privkey_t type. All the available functions for X.509 certificate handling have their prototypes in gnutls/x509.h. An example program to demonstrate the X.509 parsing capabilities can be found in ex-x509-info.


Next: , Previous: , Up: X.509 certificates   [Contents][Index]

4.1.1.2 Importing an X.509 certificate

The certificate structure should be initialized using gnutls_x509_crt_init, and a certificate structure can be imported using gnutls_x509_crt_import.

int gnutls_x509_crt_init (gnutls_x509_crt_t * cert)
int gnutls_x509_crt_import (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format)
void gnutls_x509_crt_deinit (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert)

In several functions an array of certificates is required. To assist in initialization and import the following two functions are provided.

int gnutls_x509_crt_list_import (gnutls_x509_crt_t * certs, unsigned int * cert_max, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_x509_crt_list_import2 (gnutls_x509_crt_t ** certs, unsigned int * size, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, unsigned int flags)

In all cases after use a certificate must be deinitialized using gnutls_x509_crt_deinit. Note that although the functions above apply to gnutls_x509_crt_t structure, similar functions exist for the CRL structure gnutls_x509_crl_t.


Next: , Previous: , Up: X.509 certificates   [Contents][Index]

4.1.1.3 X.509 certificate names

X.509 certificates allow for multiple names and types of names to be specified. CA certificates often rely on X.509 distinguished names (see X.509 distinguished names) for unique identification, while end-user and server certificates rely on the ’subject alternative names’. The subject alternative names provide a typed name, e.g., a DNS name, or an email address, which identifies the owner of the certificate. The following functions provide access to that names.

int gnutls_x509_crt_get_subject_alt_name2 (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned int seq, void * san, size_t * san_size, unsigned int * san_type, unsigned int * critical)
int gnutls_x509_crt_set_subject_alt_name (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, gnutls_x509_subject_alt_name_t type, const void * data, unsigned int data_size, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_subject_alt_names_init (gnutls_subject_alt_names_t * sans)
int gnutls_subject_alt_names_get (gnutls_subject_alt_names_t sans, unsigned int seq, unsigned int * san_type, gnutls_datum_t * san, gnutls_datum_t * othername_oid)
int gnutls_subject_alt_names_set (gnutls_subject_alt_names_t sans, unsigned int san_type, const gnutls_datum_t * san, const char * othername_oid)

Note however, that server certificates often used the Common Name (CN), part of the certificate DistinguishedName to place a single DNS address. That practice is discouraged (see [RFC6125]), because only a single address can be specified, and the CN field is free-form making matching ambiguous.


Next: , Previous: , Up: X.509 certificates   [Contents][Index]

4.1.1.4 X.509 distinguished names

The “subject” of an X.509 certificate is not described by a single name, but rather with a distinguished name. This in X.509 terminology is a list of strings each associated an object identifier. To make things simple GnuTLS provides gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn2 which follows the rules in [RFC4514] and returns a single string. Access to each string by individual object identifiers can be accessed using gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn_by_oid.

Function: int gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn2 (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_datum_t * dn)

cert: should contain a gnutls_x509_crt_t type

dn: a pointer to a structure to hold the name; must be freed using gnutls_free()

This function will allocate buffer and copy the name of the Certificate. The name will be in the form "C=xxxx,O=yyyy,CN=zzzz" as described in RFC4514. The output string will be ASCII or UTF-8 encoded, depending on the certificate data.

This function does not output a fully RFC4514 compliant string, if that is required see gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn3() .

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.1.10

int gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, char * buf, size_t * buf_size)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn_by_oid (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, const char * oid, unsigned indx, unsigned int raw_flag, void * buf, size_t * buf_size)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn_oid (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned indx, void * oid, size_t * oid_size)

Similar functions exist to access the distinguished name of the issuer of the certificate.

int gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer_dn (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, char * buf, size_t * buf_size)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer_dn2 (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_datum_t * dn)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer_dn_by_oid (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, const char * oid, unsigned indx, unsigned int raw_flag, void * buf, size_t * buf_size)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer_dn_oid (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned indx, void * oid, size_t * oid_size)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_dn_t * dn)

The more powerful gnutls_x509_crt_get_subject and gnutls_x509_dn_get_rdn_ava provide efficient but low-level access to the contents of the distinguished name structure.

int gnutls_x509_crt_get_subject (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_dn_t * dn)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_dn_t * dn)
Function: int gnutls_x509_dn_get_rdn_ava (gnutls_x509_dn_t dn, int irdn, int iava, gnutls_x509_ava_st * ava)

dn: a pointer to DN

irdn: index of RDN

iava: index of AVA.

ava: Pointer to structure which will hold output information.

Get pointers to data within the DN. The format of the ava structure is shown below.

struct gnutls_x509_ava_st { gnutls_datum_t oid; gnutls_datum_t value; unsigned long value_tag; };

The X.509 distinguished name is a sequence of sequences of strings and this is what the irdn and iava indexes model.

Note that ava will contain pointers into the dn structure which in turns points to the original certificate. Thus you should not modify any data or deallocate any of those.

This is a low-level function that requires the caller to do the value conversions when necessary (e.g. from UCS-2).

Returns: Returns 0 on success, or an error code.


Next: , Previous: , Up: X.509 certificates   [Contents][Index]

4.1.1.5 X.509 extensions

X.509 version 3 certificates include a list of extensions that can be used to obtain additional information on the subject or the issuer of the certificate. Those may be e-mail addresses, flags that indicate whether the belongs to a CA etc. All the supported X.509 version 3 extensions are shown in Table 4.3.

The certificate extensions access is split into two parts. The first requires to retrieve the extension, and the second is the parsing part.

To enumerate and retrieve the DER-encoded extension data available in a certificate the following two functions are available.

int gnutls_x509_crt_get_extension_info (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned indx, void * oid, size_t * oid_size, unsigned int * critical)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_extension_data2 (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_extension_by_oid2 (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, const char * oid, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * output, unsigned int * critical)

After a supported DER-encoded extension is retrieved it can be parsed using the APIs in x509-ext.h. Complex extensions may require initializing an intermediate structure that holds the parsed extension data. Examples of simple parsing functions are shown below.

int gnutls_x509_ext_import_basic_constraints (const gnutls_datum_t * ext, unsigned int * ca, int * pathlen)
int gnutls_x509_ext_export_basic_constraints (unsigned int ca, int pathlen, gnutls_datum_t * ext)
int gnutls_x509_ext_import_key_usage (const gnutls_datum_t * ext, unsigned int * key_usage)
int gnutls_x509_ext_export_key_usage (unsigned int usage, gnutls_datum_t * ext)

More complex extensions, such as Name Constraints, require an intermediate structure, in that case gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t to be initialized in order to store the parsed extension data.

int gnutls_x509_ext_import_name_constraints (const gnutls_datum_t * ext, gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_x509_ext_export_name_constraints (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, gnutls_datum_t * ext)

After the name constraints are extracted in the structure, the following functions can be used to access them.

int gnutls_x509_name_constraints_get_permitted (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, unsigned idx, unsigned * type, gnutls_datum_t * name)
int gnutls_x509_name_constraints_get_excluded (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, unsigned idx, unsigned * type, gnutls_datum_t * name)
int gnutls_x509_name_constraints_add_permitted (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, gnutls_x509_subject_alt_name_t type, const gnutls_datum_t * name)
int gnutls_x509_name_constraints_add_excluded (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, gnutls_x509_subject_alt_name_t type, const gnutls_datum_t * name)
unsigned gnutls_x509_name_constraints_check (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, gnutls_x509_subject_alt_name_t type, const gnutls_datum_t * name)
unsigned gnutls_x509_name_constraints_check_crt (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, gnutls_x509_subject_alt_name_t type, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert)

Other utility functions are listed below.

int gnutls_x509_name_constraints_init (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t * nc)
void gnutls_x509_name_constraints_deinit (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc)

Similar functions exist for all of the other supported extensions, listed in Table 4.3.

ExtensionOIDDescription
Subject key id2.5.29.14An identifier of the key of the subject.
Key usage2.5.29.15Constraints the key’s usage of the certificate.
Private key usage period2.5.29.16Constraints the validity time of the private key.
Subject alternative name2.5.29.17Alternative names to subject’s distinguished name.
Issuer alternative name2.5.29.18Alternative names to the issuer’s distinguished name.
Basic constraints2.5.29.19Indicates whether this is a CA certificate or not, and specify the maximum path lengths of certificate chains.
Name constraints2.5.29.30A field in CA certificates that restricts the scope of the name of issued certificates.
CRL distribution points2.5.29.31This extension is set by the CA, in order to inform about the location of issued Certificate Revocation Lists.
Certificate policy2.5.29.32This extension is set to indicate the certificate policy as object identifier and may contain a descriptive string or URL.
Extended key usage2.5.29.54Inhibit any policy extension. Constraints the any policy OID (GNUTLS_X509_OID_POLICY_ANY) use in the policy extension.
Authority key identifier2.5.29.35An identifier of the key of the issuer of the certificate. That is used to distinguish between different keys of the same issuer.
Extended key usage2.5.29.37Constraints the purpose of the certificate.
Authority information access1.3.6.1.5.5.7.1.1Information on services by the issuer of the certificate.
Proxy Certification Information1.3.6.1.5.5.7.1.14Proxy Certificates includes this extension that contains the OID of the proxy policy language used, and can specify limits on the maximum lengths of proxy chains. Proxy Certificates are specified in [RFC3820].

Table 4.3: Supported X.509 certificate extensions.

Note, that there are also direct APIs to access extensions that may be simpler to use for non-complex extensions. They are available in x509.h and some examples are listed below.

int gnutls_x509_crt_get_basic_constraints (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned int * critical, unsigned int * ca, int * pathlen)
int gnutls_x509_crt_set_basic_constraints (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int ca, int pathLenConstraint)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_key_usage (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned int * key_usage, unsigned int * critical)
int gnutls_x509_crt_set_key_usage (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int usage)

Next: , Previous: , Up: X.509 certificates   [Contents][Index]

4.1.1.6 Accessing public and private keys

Each X.509 certificate contains a public key that corresponds to a private key. To get a unique identifier of the public key the gnutls_x509_crt_get_key_id function is provided. To export the public key or its parameters you may need to convert the X.509 structure to a gnutls_pubkey_t. See Abstract public keys for more information.

Function: int gnutls_x509_crt_get_key_id (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int flags, unsigned char * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)

crt: Holds the certificate

flags: should be one of the flags from gnutls_keyid_flags_t

output_data: will contain the key ID

output_data_size: holds the size of output_data (and will be replaced by the actual size of parameters)

This function will return a unique ID that depends on the public key parameters. This ID can be used in checking whether a certificate corresponds to the given private key.

If the buffer provided is not long enough to hold the output, then *output_data_size is updated and GNUTLS_E_SHORT_MEMORY_BUFFER will be returned. The output will normally be a SHA-1 hash output, which is 20 bytes.

Returns: In case of failure a negative error code will be returned, and 0 on success.

The private key parameters may be directly accessed by using one of the following functions.

int gnutls_x509_privkey_get_pk_algorithm2 (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, unsigned int * bits)
int gnutls_x509_privkey_export_rsa_raw2 (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * m, gnutls_datum_t * e, gnutls_datum_t * d, gnutls_datum_t * p, gnutls_datum_t * q, gnutls_datum_t * u, gnutls_datum_t * e1, gnutls_datum_t * e2)
int gnutls_x509_privkey_export_ecc_raw (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, gnutls_ecc_curve_t * curve, gnutls_datum_t * x, gnutls_datum_t * y, gnutls_datum_t * k)
int gnutls_x509_privkey_export_dsa_raw (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * p, gnutls_datum_t * q, gnutls_datum_t * g, gnutls_datum_t * y, gnutls_datum_t * x)
int gnutls_x509_privkey_get_key_id (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, unsigned int flags, unsigned char * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)

Next: , Previous: , Up: X.509 certificates   [Contents][Index]

4.1.1.7 Verifying X.509 certificate paths

Verifying certificate paths is important in X.509 authentication. For this purpose the following functions are provided.

Function: int gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_cas (gnutls_x509_trust_list_t list, const gnutls_x509_crt_t * clist, unsigned clist_size, unsigned int flags)

list: The list

clist: A list of CAs

clist_size: The length of the CA list

flags: flags from gnutls_trust_list_flags_t

This function will add the given certificate authorities to the trusted list. The CAs in clist must not be deinitialized during the lifetime of list .

If the flag GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATES is specified, then this function will ensure that no duplicates will be present in the final trust list.

If the flag GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATE_KEY is specified, then this function will ensure that no certificates with the same key are present in the final trust list.

If either GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATE_KEY or GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATES are given, gnutls_x509_trust_list_deinit() must be called with parameter all being 1.

Returns: The number of added elements is returned; that includes duplicate entries.

Since: 3.0.0

Function: int gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_named_crt (gnutls_x509_trust_list_t list, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, const void * name, size_t name_size, unsigned int flags)

list: The list

cert: A certificate

name: An identifier for the certificate

name_size: The size of the identifier

flags: should be 0.

This function will add the given certificate to the trusted list and associate it with a name. The certificate will not be be used for verification with gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt() but with gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_named_crt() or gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt2() - the latter only since GnuTLS 3.4.0 and if a hostname is provided.

In principle this function can be used to set individual "server" certificates that are trusted by the user for that specific server but for no other purposes.

The certificate cert must not be deinitialized during the lifetime of the list .

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.0.0

Function: int gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_crls (gnutls_x509_trust_list_t list, const gnutls_x509_crl_t * crl_list, unsigned crl_size, unsigned int flags, unsigned int verification_flags)

list: The list

crl_list: A list of CRLs

crl_size: The length of the CRL list

flags: flags from gnutls_trust_list_flags_t

verification_flags: gnutls_certificate_verify_flags if flags specifies GNUTLS_TL_VERIFY_CRL

This function will add the given certificate revocation lists to the trusted list. The CRLs in crl_list must not be deinitialized during the lifetime of list .

This function must be called after gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_cas() to allow verifying the CRLs for validity. If the flag GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATES is given, then the final CRL list will not contain duplicate entries.

If the flag GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATES is given, gnutls_x509_trust_list_deinit() must be called with parameter all being 1.

If flag GNUTLS_TL_VERIFY_CRL is given the CRLs will be verified before being added, and if verification fails, they will be skipped.

Returns: The number of added elements is returned; that includes duplicate entries.

Since: 3.0

Function: int gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt (gnutls_x509_trust_list_t list, gnutls_x509_crt_t * cert_list, unsigned int cert_list_size, unsigned int flags, unsigned int * voutput, gnutls_verify_output_function func)

list: The list

cert_list: is the certificate list to be verified

cert_list_size: is the certificate list size

flags: Flags that may be used to change the verification algorithm. Use OR of the gnutls_certificate_verify_flags enumerations.

voutput: will hold the certificate verification output.

func: If non-null will be called on each chain element verification with the output.

This function will try to verify the given certificate and return its status. The voutput parameter will hold an OR’ed sequence of gnutls_certificate_status_t flags.

The details of the verification are the same as in gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt2() .

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.0

Function: int gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt2 (gnutls_x509_trust_list_t list, gnutls_x509_crt_t * cert_list, unsigned int cert_list_size, gnutls_typed_vdata_st * data, unsigned int elements, unsigned int flags, unsigned int * voutput, gnutls_verify_output_function func)

list: The list

cert_list: is the certificate list to be verified

cert_list_size: is the certificate list size

data: an array of typed data

elements: the number of data elements

flags: Flags that may be used to change the verification algorithm. Use OR of the gnutls_certificate_verify_flags enumerations.

voutput: will hold the certificate verification output.

func: If non-null will be called on each chain element verification with the output.

This function will attempt to verify the given certificate chain and return its status. The voutput parameter will hold an OR’ed sequence of gnutls_certificate_status_t flags.

When a certificate chain of cert_list_size with more than one certificates is provided, the verification status will apply to the first certificate in the chain that failed verification. The verification process starts from the end of the chain (from CA to end certificate). The first certificate in the chain must be the end-certificate while the rest of the members may be sorted or not.

Additionally a certificate verification profile can be specified from the ones in gnutls_certificate_verification_profiles_t by ORing the result of GNUTLS_PROFILE_TO_VFLAGS() to the verification flags.

Additional verification parameters are possible via the data types; the acceptable types are GNUTLS_DT_DNS_HOSTNAME , GNUTLS_DT_IP_ADDRESS and GNUTLS_DT_KEY_PURPOSE_OID . The former accepts as data a null-terminated hostname, and the latter a null-terminated object identifier (e.g., GNUTLS_KP_TLS_WWW_SERVER ). If a DNS hostname is provided then this function will compare the hostname in the end certificate against the given. If names do not match the GNUTLS_CERT_UNEXPECTED_OWNER status flag will be set. In addition it will consider certificates provided with gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_named_crt() .

If a key purpose OID is provided and the end-certificate contains the extended key usage PKIX extension, it will be required to match the provided OID or be marked for any purpose, otherwise verification will fail with GNUTLS_CERT_PURPOSE_MISMATCH status.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value. Note that verification failure will not result to an error code, only voutput will be updated.

Since: 3.3.8

Function: int gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_named_crt (gnutls_x509_trust_list_t list, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, const void * name, size_t name_size, unsigned int flags, unsigned int * voutput, gnutls_verify_output_function func)

list: The list

cert: is the certificate to be verified

name: is the certificate’s name

name_size: is the certificate’s name size

flags: Flags that may be used to change the verification algorithm. Use OR of the gnutls_certificate_verify_flags enumerations.

voutput: will hold the certificate verification output.

func: If non-null will be called on each chain element verification with the output.

This function will try to find a certificate that is associated with the provided name –see gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_named_crt() . If a match is found the certificate is considered valid. In addition to that this function will also check CRLs. The voutput parameter will hold an OR’ed sequence of gnutls_certificate_status_t flags.

Additionally a certificate verification profile can be specified from the ones in gnutls_certificate_verification_profiles_t by ORing the result of GNUTLS_PROFILE_TO_VFLAGS() to the verification flags.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.0.0

Function: int gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_trust_file (gnutls_x509_trust_list_t list, const char * ca_file, const char * crl_file, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type, unsigned int tl_flags, unsigned int tl_vflags)

list: The list

ca_file: A file containing a list of CAs (optional)

crl_file: A file containing a list of CRLs (optional)

type: The format of the certificates

tl_flags: flags from gnutls_trust_list_flags_t

tl_vflags: gnutls_certificate_verify_flags if flags specifies GNUTLS_TL_VERIFY_CRL

This function will add the given certificate authorities to the trusted list. PKCS 11 URLs are also accepted, instead of files, by this function. A PKCS 11 URL implies a trust database (a specially marked module in p11-kit); the URL "pkcs11:" implies all trust databases in the system. Only a single URL specifying trust databases can be set; they cannot be stacked with multiple calls.

Returns: The number of added elements is returned.

Since: 3.1

Function: int gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_trust_mem (gnutls_x509_trust_list_t list, const gnutls_datum_t * cas, const gnutls_datum_t * crls, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type, unsigned int tl_flags, unsigned int tl_vflags)

list: The list

cas: A buffer containing a list of CAs (optional)

crls: A buffer containing a list of CRLs (optional)

type: The format of the certificates

tl_flags: flags from gnutls_trust_list_flags_t

tl_vflags: gnutls_certificate_verify_flags if flags specifies GNUTLS_TL_VERIFY_CRL

This function will add the given certificate authorities to the trusted list.

If this function is used gnutls_x509_trust_list_deinit() must be called with parameter all being 1.

Returns: The number of added elements is returned.

Since: 3.1

Function: int gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_system_trust (gnutls_x509_trust_list_t list, unsigned int tl_flags, unsigned int tl_vflags)

list: The structure of the list

tl_flags: GNUTLS_TL_*

tl_vflags: gnutls_certificate_verify_flags if flags specifies GNUTLS_TL_VERIFY_CRL

This function adds the system’s default trusted certificate authorities to the trusted list. Note that on unsupported systems this function returns GNUTLS_E_UNIMPLEMENTED_FEATURE .

This function implies the flag GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATES .

Returns: The number of added elements or a negative error code on error.

Since: 3.1

The verification function will verify a given certificate chain against a list of certificate authorities and certificate revocation lists, and output a bit-wise OR of elements of the gnutls_certificate_status_t enumeration shown in Figure 4.2. The GNUTLS_CERT_INVALID flag is always set on a verification error and more detailed flags will also be set when appropriate.

GNUTLS_CERT_INVALID

The certificate is not signed by one of the known authorities or the signature is invalid (deprecated by the flags GNUTLS_CERT_SIGNATURE_FAILURE and GNUTLS_CERT_SIGNER_NOT_FOUND ).

GNUTLS_CERT_REVOKED

Certificate is revoked by its authority. In X.509 this will be set only if CRLs are checked.

GNUTLS_CERT_SIGNER_NOT_FOUND

The certificate’s issuer is not known. This is the case if the issuer is not included in the trusted certificate list.

GNUTLS_CERT_SIGNER_NOT_CA

The certificate’s signer was not a CA. This may happen if this was a version 1 certificate, which is common with some CAs, or a version 3 certificate without the basic constrains extension.

GNUTLS_CERT_INSECURE_ALGORITHM

The certificate was signed using an insecure algorithm such as MD2 or MD5. These algorithms have been broken and should not be trusted.

GNUTLS_CERT_NOT_ACTIVATED

The certificate is not yet activated.

GNUTLS_CERT_EXPIRED

The certificate has expired.

GNUTLS_CERT_SIGNATURE_FAILURE

The signature verification failed.

GNUTLS_CERT_REVOCATION_DATA_SUPERSEDED

The revocation data are old and have been superseded.

GNUTLS_CERT_UNEXPECTED_OWNER

The owner is not the expected one.

GNUTLS_CERT_REVOCATION_DATA_ISSUED_IN_FUTURE

The revocation data have a future issue date.

GNUTLS_CERT_SIGNER_CONSTRAINTS_FAILURE

The certificate’s signer constraints were violated.

GNUTLS_CERT_MISMATCH

The certificate presented isn’t the expected one (TOFU)

GNUTLS_CERT_PURPOSE_MISMATCH

The certificate or an intermediate does not match the intended purpose (extended key usage).

GNUTLS_CERT_MISSING_OCSP_STATUS

The certificate requires the server to send the certificate status, but no status was received.

GNUTLS_CERT_INVALID_OCSP_STATUS

The received OCSP status response is invalid.

GNUTLS_CERT_UNKNOWN_CRIT_EXTENSIONS

The certificate has extensions marked as critical which are not supported.

Figure 4.2: The gnutls_certificate_status_t enumeration.

An example of certificate verification is shown in ex-verify2. It is also possible to have a set of certificates that are trusted for a particular server but not to authorize other certificates. This purpose is served by the functions gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_named_crt and gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_named_crt.


Next: , Previous: , Up: X.509 certificates   [Contents][Index]

4.1.1.8 Verifying a certificate in the context of TLS session

When operating in the context of a TLS session, the trusted certificate authority list may also be set using:

int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const char * cafile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_dir (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const char * ca_dir, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_crl_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char * crlfile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred)

These functions allow the specification of the trusted certificate authorities, either via a file, a directory or use the system-specified certificate authorities. Unless the authorities are application specific, it is generally recommended to use the system trust storage (see gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust).

Unlike the previous section it is not required to setup a trusted list, and there are two approaches to verify the peer’s certificate and identity. The recommended in GnuTLS 3.5.0 and later is via the gnutls_session_set_verify_cert, but for older GnuTLS versions you may use an explicit callback set via gnutls_certificate_set_verify_function and then utilize gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3 for verification. The reported verification status is identical to the verification functions described in the previous section.

Note that in certain cases it is required to check the marked purpose of the end certificate (e.g. GNUTLS_KP_TLS_WWW_SERVER); in these cases the more advanced gnutls_session_set_verify_cert2 and gnutls_certificate_verify_peers should be used instead.

There is also the possibility to pass some input to the verification functions in the form of flags. For gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt2 the flags are passed directly, but for gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3, the flags are set using gnutls_certificate_set_verify_flags. All the available flags are part of the enumeration gnutls_certificate_verify_flags shown in Figure 4.3.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_DISABLE_CA_SIGN

If set a signer does not have to be a certificate authority. This flag should normally be disabled, unless you know what this means.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_DO_NOT_ALLOW_IP_MATCHES

When verifying a hostname prevent textual IP addresses from matching IP addresses in the certificate. Treat the input only as a DNS name.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_DO_NOT_ALLOW_SAME

If a certificate is not signed by anyone trusted but exists in the trusted CA list do not treat it as trusted.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_ANY_X509_V1_CA_CRT

Allow CA certificates that have version 1 (both root and intermediate). This might be dangerous since those haven’t the basicConstraints extension.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_RSA_MD2

Allow certificates to be signed using the broken MD2 algorithm.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_RSA_MD5

Allow certificates to be signed using the broken MD5 algorithm.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_DISABLE_TIME_CHECKS

Disable checking of activation and expiration validity periods of certificate chains. Don’t set this unless you understand the security implications.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_DISABLE_TRUSTED_TIME_CHECKS

If set a signer in the trusted list is never checked for expiration or activation.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_DO_NOT_ALLOW_X509_V1_CA_CRT

Do not allow trusted CA certificates that have version 1. This option is to be used to deprecate all certificates of version 1.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_DISABLE_CRL_CHECKS

Disable checking for validity using certificate revocation lists or the available OCSP data.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_UNSORTED_CHAIN

A certificate chain is tolerated if unsorted (the case with many TLS servers out there). This is the default since GnuTLS 3.1.4.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_DO_NOT_ALLOW_UNSORTED_CHAIN

Do not tolerate an unsorted certificate chain.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_DO_NOT_ALLOW_WILDCARDS

When including a hostname check in the verification, do not consider any wildcards.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_USE_TLS1_RSA

This indicates that a (raw) RSA signature is provided as in the TLS 1.0 protocol. Not all functions accept this flag.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_IGNORE_UNKNOWN_CRIT_EXTENSIONS

This signals the verification process, not to fail on unknown critical extensions.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_WITH_SHA1

Allow certificates to be signed using the broken SHA1 hash algorithm.

GNUTLS_VERIFY_RSA_PSS_FIXED_SALT_LENGTH

Disallow RSA-PSS signatures made with mismatching salt length with digest length, as mandated in RFC 8446 4.2.3.

Figure 4.3: The gnutls_certificate_verify_flags enumeration.


Previous: , Up: X.509 certificates   [Contents][Index]

4.1.1.9 Verifying a certificate using PKCS #11

Some systems provide a system wide trusted certificate storage accessible using the PKCS #11 API. That is, the trusted certificates are queried and accessed using the PKCS #11 API, and trusted certificate properties, such as purpose, are marked using attached extensions. One example is the p11-kit trust module8.

These special PKCS #11 modules can be used for GnuTLS certificate verification if marked as trust policy modules, i.e., with trust-policy: yes in the p11-kit module file. The way to use them is by specifying to the file verification function (e.g., gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file), a pkcs11 URL, or simply pkcs11: to use all the marked with trust policy modules.

The trust modules of p11-kit assign a purpose to trusted authorities using the extended key usage object identifiers. The common purposes are shown in Table 4.4. Note that typically according to [RFC5280] the extended key usage object identifiers apply to end certificates. Their application to CA certificates is an extension used by the trust modules.

PurposeOIDDescription
GNUTLS_KP_TLS_WWW_SERVER1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.1The certificate is to be used for TLS WWW authentication. When in a CA certificate, it indicates that the CA is allowed to sign certificates for TLS WWW authentication.
GNUTLS_KP_TLS_WWW_CLIENT1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.2The certificate is to be used for TLS WWW client authentication. When in a CA certificate, it indicates that the CA is allowed to sign certificates for TLS WWW client authentication.
GNUTLS_KP_CODE_SIGNING1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.3The certificate is to be used for code signing. When in a CA certificate, it indicates that the CA is allowed to sign certificates for code signing.
GNUTLS_KP_EMAIL_PROTECTION1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.4The certificate is to be used for email protection. When in a CA certificate, it indicates that the CA is allowed to sign certificates for email users.
GNUTLS_KP_OCSP_SIGNING1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.9The certificate is to be used for signing OCSP responses. When in a CA certificate, it indicates that the CA is allowed to sign certificates which sign OCSP responses.
GNUTLS_KP_ANY2.5.29.37.0The certificate is to be used for any purpose. When in a CA certificate, it indicates that the CA is allowed to sign any kind of certificates.

Table 4.4: Key purpose object identifiers.

With such modules, it is recommended to use the verification functions gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt2, or gnutls_certificate_verify_peers, which allow to explicitly specify the key purpose. The other verification functions which do not allow setting a purpose, would operate as if GNUTLS_KP_TLS_WWW_SERVER was requested from the trusted authorities.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.1.2 OpenPGP certificates

Previous versions of GnuTLS supported limited OpenPGP key authentication. That functionality has been deprecated and is no longer made available. The reason is that, supporting alternative authentication methods, when X.509 and PKIX were new on the Internet and not well established, seemed like a good idea, in today’s Internet X.509 is unquestionably the main container for certificates. As such supporting more options with no clear use-cases, is a distraction that consumes considerable resources for improving and testing the library. For that we have decided to drop this functionality completely in 3.6.0.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.1.3 Raw public-keys

There are situations in which a rather large certificate / certificate chain is undesirable or impractical. An example could be a resource constrained sensor network in which you do want to use authentication of and encryption between your devices but where your devices lack loads of memory or processing power. Furthermore, there are situations in which you don’t want to or can’t rely on a PKIX. TLS is, next to a PKIX environment, also commonly used with self-signed certificates in smaller deployments where the self-signed certificates are distributed to all involved protocol endpoints out-of-band. This practice does, however, still require the overhead of the certificate generation even though none of the information found in the certificate is actually used.

With raw public-keys, only a subset of the information found in typical certificates is utilized: namely, the SubjectPublicKeyInfo structure (in ASN.1 format) of a PKIX certificate that carries the parameters necessary to describe the public-key. Other parameters found in PKIX certificates are omitted. By omitting various certificate-related structures, the resulting raw public-key is kept fairly small in comparison to the original certificate, and the code to process the keys can be simpler.

It should be noted however, that the authenticity of these raw keys must be verified by an out-of-band mechanism or something like TOFU.


Up: Raw public-keys   [Contents][Index]

4.1.3.1 Importing raw public-keys

Raw public-keys and their private counterparts can best be handled by using the abstract types gnutls_pubkey_t and gnutls_privkey_t respectively. To learn how to use these see Abstract key types.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.1.4 Advanced certificate verification

The verification of X.509 certificates in the HTTPS and other Internet protocols is typically done by loading a trusted list of commercial Certificate Authorities (see gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust), and using them as trusted anchors. However, there are several examples (eg. the Diginotar incident) where one of these authorities was compromised. This risk can be mitigated by using in addition to CA certificate verification, other verification methods. In this section we list the available in GnuTLS methods.


Next: , Up: Advanced certificate verification   [Contents][Index]

4.1.4.1 Verifying a certificate using trust on first use authentication

It is possible to use a trust on first use (TOFU) authentication method in GnuTLS. That is the concept used by the SSH programs, where the public key of the peer is not verified, or verified in an out-of-bound way, but subsequent connections to the same peer require the public key to remain the same. Such a system in combination with the typical CA verification of a certificate, and OCSP revocation checks, can help to provide multiple factor verification, where a single point of failure is not enough to compromise the system. For example a server compromise may be detected using OCSP, and a CA compromise can be detected using the trust on first use method. Such a hybrid system with X.509 and trust on first use authentication is shown in Client example with SSH-style certificate verification.

See Certificate verification on how to use the available functionality.


Previous: , Up: Advanced certificate verification   [Contents][Index]

4.1.4.2 Verifying a certificate using DANE (DNSSEC)

The DANE protocol is a protocol that can be used to verify TLS certificates using the DNS (or better DNSSEC) protocols. The DNS security extensions (DNSSEC) provide an alternative public key infrastructure to the commercial CAs that are typically used to sign TLS certificates. The DANE protocol takes advantage of the DNSSEC infrastructure to verify TLS certificates. This can be in addition to the verification by CA infrastructure or may even replace it where DNSSEC is fully deployed. Note however, that DNSSEC deployment is fairly new and it would be better to use it as an additional verification method rather than the only one.

The DANE functionality is provided by the libgnutls-dane library that is shipped with GnuTLS and the function prototypes are in gnutls/dane.h. See Certificate verification for information on how to use the library.

Note however, that the DANE RFC mandates the verification methods one should use in addition to the validation via DNSSEC TLSA entries. GnuTLS doesn’t follow that RFC requirement, and the term DANE verification in this manual refers to the TLSA entry verification. In GnuTLS any other verification methods can be used (e.g., PKIX or TOFU) on top of DANE.


Previous: , Up: Certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.1.5 Digital signatures

In this section we will provide some information about digital signatures, how they work, and give the rationale for disabling some of the algorithms used.

Digital signatures work by using somebody’s secret key to sign some arbitrary data. Then anybody else could use the public key of that person to verify the signature. Since the data may be arbitrary it is not suitable input to a cryptographic digital signature algorithm. For this reason and also for performance cryptographic hash algorithms are used to preprocess the input to the signature algorithm. This works as long as it is difficult enough to generate two different messages with the same hash algorithm output. In that case the same signature could be used as a proof for both messages. Nobody wants to sign an innocent message of donating 1 euro to Greenpeace and find out that they donated 1.000.000 euros to Bad Inc.

For a hash algorithm to be called cryptographic the following three requirements must hold:

  1. Preimage resistance. That means the algorithm must be one way and given the output of the hash function H(x), it is impossible to calculate x.
  2. 2nd preimage resistance. That means that given a pair x,y with y=H(x) it is impossible to calculate an x' such that y=H(x').
  3. Collision resistance. That means that it is impossible to calculate random x and x' such H(x')=H(x).

The last two requirements in the list are the most important in digital signatures. These protect against somebody who would like to generate two messages with the same hash output. When an algorithm is considered broken usually it means that the Collision resistance of the algorithm is less than brute force. Using the birthday paradox the brute force attack takes 2^{((hash size) / 2)} operations. Today colliding certificates using the MD5 hash algorithm have been generated as shown in [WEGER].

There has been cryptographic results for the SHA-1 hash algorithms as well, although they are not yet critical. Before 2004, MD5 had a presumed collision strength of 2^{64}, but it has been showed to have a collision strength well under 2^{50}. As of November 2005, it is believed that SHA-1’s collision strength is around 2^{63}. We consider this sufficiently hard so that we still support SHA-1. We anticipate that SHA-256/386/512 will be used in publicly-distributed certificates in the future. When 2^{63} can be considered too weak compared to the computer power available sometime in the future, SHA-1 will be disabled as well. The collision attacks on SHA-1 may also get better, given the new interest in tools for creating them.

4.1.5.1 Trading security for interoperability

If you connect to a server and use GnuTLS’ functions to verify the certificate chain, and get a GNUTLS_CERT_INSECURE_ALGORITHM validation error (see Verifying X.509 certificate paths), it means that somewhere in the certificate chain there is a certificate signed using RSA-MD2 or RSA-MD5. These two digital signature algorithms are considered broken, so GnuTLS fails verifying the certificate. In some situations, it may be useful to be able to verify the certificate chain anyway, assuming an attacker did not utilize the fact that these signatures algorithms are broken. This section will give help on how to achieve that.

It is important to know that you do not have to enable any of the flags discussed here to be able to use trusted root CA certificates self-signed using RSA-MD2 or RSA-MD5. The certificates in the trusted list are considered trusted irrespective of the signature.

If you are using gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3 to verify the certificate chain, you can call gnutls_certificate_set_verify_flags with the flags:

as in the following example:

  gnutls_certificate_set_verify_flags (x509cred,
                                       GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_RSA_MD5);

This will signal the verifier algorithm to enable RSA-MD5 when verifying the certificates.

If you are using gnutls_x509_crt_verify or gnutls_x509_crt_list_verify, you can pass the GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_RSA_MD5 parameter directly in the flags parameter.

If you are using these flags, it may also be a good idea to warn the user when verification failure occur for this reason. The simplest is to not use the flags by default, and only fall back to using them after warning the user. If you wish to inspect the certificate chain yourself, you can use gnutls_certificate_get_peers to extract the raw server’s certificate chain, gnutls_x509_crt_list_import to parse each of the certificates, and then gnutls_x509_crt_get_signature_algorithm to find out the signing algorithm used for each certificate. If any of the intermediary certificates are using GNUTLS_SIGN_RSA_MD2 or GNUTLS_SIGN_RSA_MD5, you could present a warning.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Authentication methods   [Contents][Index]

4.2 More on certificate authentication

Certificates are not the only structures involved in a public key infrastructure. Several other structures that are used for certificate requests, encrypted private keys, revocation lists, GnuTLS abstract key structures, etc., are discussed in this chapter.


Next: , Up: More on certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.2.1 PKCS #10 certificate requests

A certificate request is a structure, which contain information about an applicant of a certificate service. It typically contains a public key, a distinguished name and secondary data such as a challenge password. GnuTLS supports the requests defined in PKCS #10 [RFC2986]. Other formats of certificate requests are not currently supported by GnuTLS.

A certificate request can be generated by associating it with a private key, setting the subject’s information and finally self signing it. The last step ensures that the requester is in possession of the private key.

int gnutls_x509_crq_set_version (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, unsigned int version)
int gnutls_x509_crq_set_dn (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, const char * dn, const char ** err)
int gnutls_x509_crq_set_dn_by_oid (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, const char * oid, unsigned int raw_flag, const void * data, unsigned int sizeof_data)
int gnutls_x509_crq_set_key_usage (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, unsigned int usage)
int gnutls_x509_crq_set_key_purpose_oid (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, const void * oid, unsigned int critical)
int gnutls_x509_crq_set_basic_constraints (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, unsigned int ca, int pathLenConstraint)

The gnutls_x509_crq_set_key and gnutls_x509_crq_sign2 functions associate the request with a private key and sign it. If a request is to be signed with a key residing in a PKCS #11 token it is recommended to use the signing functions shown in Abstract key types.

Function: int gnutls_x509_crq_set_key (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, gnutls_x509_privkey_t key)

crq: should contain a gnutls_x509_crq_t type

key: holds a private key

This function will set the public parameters from the given private key to the request.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Function: int gnutls_x509_crq_sign2 (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t dig, unsigned int flags)

crq: should contain a gnutls_x509_crq_t type

key: holds a private key

dig: The message digest to use, i.e., GNUTLS_DIG_SHA256

flags: must be 0

This function will sign the certificate request with a private key. This must be the same key as the one used in gnutls_x509_crt_set_key() since a certificate request is self signed.

This must be the last step in a certificate request generation since all the previously set parameters are now signed.

A known limitation of this function is, that a newly-signed request will not be fully functional (e.g., for signature verification), until it is exported an re-imported.

After GnuTLS 3.6.1 the value of dig may be GNUTLS_DIG_UNKNOWN , and in that case, a suitable but reasonable for the key algorithm will be selected.

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS on success, otherwise a negative error code. GNUTLS_E_ASN1_VALUE_NOT_FOUND is returned if you didn’t set all information in the certificate request (e.g., the version using gnutls_x509_crq_set_version() ).

The following example is about generating a certificate request, and a private key. A certificate request can be later be processed by a CA which should return a signed certificate.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/x509.h>
#include <gnutls/abstract.h>
#include <time.h>

/* This example will generate a private key and a certificate
 * request.
 */

int main(void)
{
	gnutls_x509_crq_t crq;
	gnutls_x509_privkey_t key;
	unsigned char buffer[10 * 1024];
	size_t buffer_size = sizeof(buffer);
	unsigned int bits;

	gnutls_global_init();

	/* Initialize an empty certificate request, and
	 * an empty private key.
	 */
	gnutls_x509_crq_init(&crq);

	gnutls_x509_privkey_init(&key);

	/* Generate an RSA key of moderate security.
	 */
	bits = gnutls_sec_param_to_pk_bits(GNUTLS_PK_RSA,
					   GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_MEDIUM);
	gnutls_x509_privkey_generate(key, GNUTLS_PK_RSA, bits, 0);

	/* Add stuff to the distinguished name
	 */
	gnutls_x509_crq_set_dn_by_oid(crq, GNUTLS_OID_X520_COUNTRY_NAME, 0,
				      "GR", 2);

	gnutls_x509_crq_set_dn_by_oid(crq, GNUTLS_OID_X520_COMMON_NAME, 0,
				      "Nikos", strlen("Nikos"));

	/* Set the request version.
	 */
	gnutls_x509_crq_set_version(crq, 1);

	/* Set a challenge password.
	 */
	gnutls_x509_crq_set_challenge_password(crq,
					       "something to remember here");

	/* Associate the request with the private key
	 */
	gnutls_x509_crq_set_key(crq, key);

	/* Self sign the certificate request.
	 */
	gnutls_x509_crq_sign2(crq, key, GNUTLS_DIG_SHA1, 0);

	/* Export the PEM encoded certificate request, and
	 * display it.
	 */
	gnutls_x509_crq_export(crq, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM, buffer, &buffer_size);

	printf("Certificate Request: \n%s", buffer);

	/* Export the PEM encoded private key, and
	 * display it.
	 */
	buffer_size = sizeof(buffer);
	gnutls_x509_privkey_export(key, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM, buffer,
				   &buffer_size);

	printf("\n\nPrivate key: \n%s", buffer);

	gnutls_x509_crq_deinit(crq);
	gnutls_x509_privkey_deinit(key);

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: More on certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.2.2 PKIX certificate revocation lists

A certificate revocation list (CRL) is a structure issued by an authority periodically containing a list of revoked certificates serial numbers. The CRL structure is signed with the issuing authorities’ keys. A typical CRL contains the fields as shown in Table 4.5. Certificate revocation lists are used to complement the expiration date of a certificate, in order to account for other reasons of revocation, such as compromised keys, etc.

Each CRL is valid for limited amount of time and is required to provide, except for the current issuing time, also the issuing time of the next update.

FieldDescription
versionThe field that indicates the version of the CRL structure.
signatureA signature by the issuing authority.
issuerHolds the issuer’s distinguished name.
thisUpdateThe issuing time of the revocation list.
nextUpdateThe issuing time of the revocation list that will update that one.
revokedCertificatesList of revoked certificates serial numbers.
extensionsOptional CRL structure extensions.

Table 4.5: Certificate revocation list fields.

The basic CRL structure functions follow.

int gnutls_x509_crl_init (gnutls_x509_crl_t * crl)
int gnutls_x509_crl_import (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format)
int gnutls_x509_crl_export (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, void * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)
int gnutls_x509_crl_export (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, void * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)

Reading a CRL

The most important function that extracts the certificate revocation information from a CRL is gnutls_x509_crl_get_crt_serial. Other functions that return other fields of the CRL structure are also provided.

Function: int gnutls_x509_crl_get_crt_serial (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, unsigned indx, unsigned char * serial, size_t * serial_size, time_t * t)

crl: should contain a gnutls_x509_crl_t type

indx: the index of the certificate to extract (starting from 0)

serial: where the serial number will be copied

serial_size: initially holds the size of serial

t: if non null, will hold the time this certificate was revoked

This function will retrieve the serial number of the specified, by the index, revoked certificate.

Note that this function will have performance issues in large sequences of revoked certificates. In that case use gnutls_x509_crl_iter_crt_serial() .

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

int gnutls_x509_crl_get_version (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl)
int gnutls_x509_crl_get_issuer_dn (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, char * buf, size_t * sizeof_buf)
int gnutls_x509_crl_get_issuer_dn2 (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, gnutls_datum_t * dn)
time_t gnutls_x509_crl_get_this_update (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl)
time_t gnutls_x509_crl_get_next_update (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl)
int gnutls_x509_crl_get_crt_count (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl)

Generation of a CRL

The following functions can be used to generate a CRL.

int gnutls_x509_crl_set_version (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, unsigned int version)
int gnutls_x509_crl_set_crt_serial (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, const void * serial, size_t serial_size, time_t revocation_time)
int gnutls_x509_crl_set_crt (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, time_t revocation_time)
int gnutls_x509_crl_set_next_update (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, time_t exp_time)
int gnutls_x509_crl_set_this_update (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, time_t act_time)

The gnutls_x509_crl_sign2 and gnutls_x509_crl_privkey_sign functions sign the revocation list with a private key. The latter function can be used to sign with a key residing in a PKCS #11 token.

Function: int gnutls_x509_crl_sign2 (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_x509_privkey_t issuer_key, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t dig, unsigned int flags)

crl: should contain a gnutls_x509_crl_t type

issuer: is the certificate of the certificate issuer

issuer_key: holds the issuer’s private key

dig: The message digest to use. GNUTLS_DIG_SHA256 is the safe choice unless you know what you’re doing.

flags: must be 0

This function will sign the CRL with the issuer’s private key, and will copy the issuer’s information into the CRL.

This must be the last step in a certificate CRL since all the previously set parameters are now signed.

A known limitation of this function is, that a newly-signed CRL will not be fully functional (e.g., for signature verification), until it is exported an re-imported.

After GnuTLS 3.6.1 the value of dig may be GNUTLS_DIG_UNKNOWN , and in that case, a suitable but reasonable for the key algorithm will be selected.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Function: int gnutls_x509_crl_privkey_sign (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_privkey_t issuer_key, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t dig, unsigned int flags)

crl: should contain a gnutls_x509_crl_t type

issuer: is the certificate of the certificate issuer

issuer_key: holds the issuer’s private key

dig: The message digest to use. GNUTLS_DIG_SHA256 is the safe choice unless you know what you’re doing.

flags: must be 0

This function will sign the CRL with the issuer’s private key, and will copy the issuer’s information into the CRL.

This must be the last step in a certificate CRL since all the previously set parameters are now signed.

A known limitation of this function is, that a newly-signed CRL will not be fully functional (e.g., for signature verification), until it is exported an re-imported.

After GnuTLS 3.6.1 the value of dig may be GNUTLS_DIG_UNKNOWN , and in that case, a suitable but reasonable for the key algorithm will be selected.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since 2.12.0

Few extensions on the CRL structure are supported, including the CRL number extension and the authority key identifier.

int gnutls_x509_crl_set_number (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, const void * nr, size_t nr_size)
int gnutls_x509_crl_set_authority_key_id (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, const void * id, size_t id_size)

Next: , Previous: , Up: More on certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.2.3 OCSP certificate status checking

Certificates may be revoked before their expiration time has been reached. There are several reasons for revoking certificates, but a typical situation is when the private key associated with a certificate has been compromised. Traditionally, Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs) have been used by application to implement revocation checking, however, several problems with CRLs have been identified [RIVESTCRL].

The Online Certificate Status Protocol, or OCSP [RFC2560], is a widely implemented protocol which performs certificate revocation status checking. An application that wish to verify the identity of a peer will verify the certificate against a set of trusted certificates and then check whether the certificate is listed in a CRL and/or perform an OCSP check for the certificate.

Applications are typically expected to contact the OCSP server in order to request the certificate validity status. The OCSP server replies with an OCSP response. This section describes this online communication (which can be avoided when using OCSP stapled responses, for that, see OCSP stapling).

Before performing the OCSP query, the application will need to figure out the address of the OCSP server. The OCSP server address can be provided by the local user in manual configuration or may be stored in the certificate that is being checked. When stored in a certificate the OCSP server is in the extension field called the Authority Information Access (AIA). The following function extracts this information from a certificate.

int gnutls_x509_crt_get_authority_info_access (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int seq, int what, gnutls_datum_t * data, unsigned int * critical)

There are several functions in GnuTLS for creating and manipulating OCSP requests and responses. The general idea is that a client application creates an OCSP request object, stores some information about the certificate to check in the request, and then exports the request in DER format. The request will then need to be sent to the OCSP responder, which needs to be done by the application (GnuTLS does not send and receive OCSP packets). Normally an OCSP response is received that the application will need to import into an OCSP response object. The digital signature in the OCSP response needs to be verified against a set of trust anchors before the information in the response can be trusted.

The ASN.1 structure of OCSP requests are briefly as follows. It is useful to review the structures to get an understanding of which fields are modified by GnuTLS functions.

OCSPRequest     ::=     SEQUENCE {
    tbsRequest                  TBSRequest,
    optionalSignature   [0]     EXPLICIT Signature OPTIONAL }

TBSRequest      ::=     SEQUENCE {
    version             [0]     EXPLICIT Version DEFAULT v1,
    requestorName       [1]     EXPLICIT GeneralName OPTIONAL,
    requestList                 SEQUENCE OF Request,
    requestExtensions   [2]     EXPLICIT Extensions OPTIONAL }

Request         ::=     SEQUENCE {
    reqCert                     CertID,
    singleRequestExtensions     [0] EXPLICIT Extensions OPTIONAL }

CertID          ::=     SEQUENCE {
    hashAlgorithm       AlgorithmIdentifier,
    issuerNameHash      OCTET STRING, -- Hash of Issuer's DN
    issuerKeyHash       OCTET STRING, -- Hash of Issuers public key
    serialNumber        CertificateSerialNumber }

The basic functions to initialize, import, export and deallocate OCSP requests are the following.

int gnutls_ocsp_req_init (gnutls_ocsp_req_t * req)
void gnutls_ocsp_req_deinit (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_import (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req, const gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_export (gnutls_ocsp_req_const_t req, gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_print (gnutls_ocsp_req_const_t req, gnutls_ocsp_print_formats_t format, gnutls_datum_t * out)

To generate an OCSP request the issuer name hash, issuer key hash, and the checked certificate’s serial number are required. There are two interfaces available for setting those in an OCSP request. The is a low-level function when you have the issuer name hash, issuer key hash, and certificate serial number in binary form. The second is more useful if you have the certificate (and its issuer) in a gnutls_x509_crt_t type. There is also a function to extract this information from existing an OCSP request.

int gnutls_ocsp_req_add_cert_id (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t digest, const gnutls_datum_t * issuer_name_hash, const gnutls_datum_t * issuer_key_hash, const gnutls_datum_t * serial_number)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_add_cert (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t digest, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_get_cert_id (gnutls_ocsp_req_const_t req, unsigned indx, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t * digest, gnutls_datum_t * issuer_name_hash, gnutls_datum_t * issuer_key_hash, gnutls_datum_t * serial_number)

Each OCSP request may contain a number of extensions. Extensions are identified by an Object Identifier (OID) and an opaque data buffer whose syntax and semantics is implied by the OID. You can extract or set those extensions using the following functions.

int gnutls_ocsp_req_get_extension (gnutls_ocsp_req_const_t req, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * oid, unsigned int * critical, gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_set_extension (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req, const char * oid, unsigned int critical, const gnutls_datum_t * data)

A common OCSP Request extension is the nonce extension (OID 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.48.1.2), which is used to avoid replay attacks of earlier recorded OCSP responses. The nonce extension carries a value that is intended to be sufficiently random and unique so that an attacker will not be able to give a stale response for the same nonce.

int gnutls_ocsp_req_get_nonce (gnutls_ocsp_req_const_t req, unsigned int * critical, gnutls_datum_t * nonce)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_set_nonce (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req, unsigned int critical, const gnutls_datum_t * nonce)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_randomize_nonce (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req)

The OCSP response structures is a complex structure. A simplified overview of it is in Table 4.6. Note that a response may contain information on multiple certificates.

FieldDescription
versionThe OCSP response version number (typically 1).
responder IDAn identifier of the responder (DN name or a hash of its key).
issue timeThe time the response was generated.
thisUpdateThe issuing time of the revocation information.
nextUpdateThe issuing time of the revocation information that will update that one.
Revoked certificates
certificate statusThe status of the certificate.
certificate serialThe certificate’s serial number.
revocationTimeThe time the certificate was revoked.
revocationReasonThe reason the certificate was revoked.

Table 4.6: The most important OCSP response fields.

We provide basic functions for initialization, importing, exporting and deallocating OCSP responses.

int gnutls_ocsp_resp_init (gnutls_ocsp_resp_t * resp)
void gnutls_ocsp_resp_deinit (gnutls_ocsp_resp_t resp)
int gnutls_ocsp_resp_import (gnutls_ocsp_resp_t resp, const gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_ocsp_resp_export (gnutls_ocsp_resp_const_t resp, gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_ocsp_resp_print (gnutls_ocsp_resp_const_t resp, gnutls_ocsp_print_formats_t format, gnutls_datum_t * out)

The utility function that extracts the revocation as well as other information from a response is shown below.

Function: int gnutls_ocsp_resp_get_single (gnutls_ocsp_resp_const_t resp, unsigned indx, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t * digest, gnutls_datum_t * issuer_name_hash, gnutls_datum_t * issuer_key_hash, gnutls_datum_t * serial_number, unsigned int * cert_status, time_t * this_update, time_t * next_update, time_t * revocation_time, unsigned int * revocation_reason)

resp: should contain a gnutls_ocsp_resp_t type

indx: Specifies response number to get. Use (0) to get the first one.

digest: output variable with gnutls_digest_algorithm_t hash algorithm

issuer_name_hash: output buffer with hash of issuer’s DN

issuer_key_hash: output buffer with hash of issuer’s public key

serial_number: output buffer with serial number of certificate to check

cert_status: a certificate status, a gnutls_ocsp_cert_status_t enum.

this_update: time at which the status is known to be correct.

next_update: when newer information will be available, or (time_t)-1 if unspecified

revocation_time: when cert_status is GNUTLS_OCSP_CERT_REVOKED , holds time of revocation.

revocation_reason: revocation reason, a gnutls_x509_crl_reason_t enum.

This function will return the certificate information of the indx ’ed response in the Basic OCSP Response resp . The information returned corresponds to the OCSP SingleResponse structure except the final singleExtensions.

Each of the pointers to output variables may be NULL to indicate that the caller is not interested in that value.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error code is returned. If you have reached the last CertID available GNUTLS_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE will be returned.

The possible revocation reasons available in an OCSP response are shown below.

GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_UNSPECIFIED

Unspecified reason.

GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_KEYCOMPROMISE

Private key compromised.

GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_CACOMPROMISE

CA compromised.

GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_AFFILIATIONCHANGED

Affiliation has changed.

GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_SUPERSEDED

Certificate superseded.

GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_CESSATIONOFOPERATION

Operation has ceased.

GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_CERTIFICATEHOLD

Certificate is on hold.

GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_REMOVEFROMCRL

Will be removed from delta CRL.

GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_PRIVILEGEWITHDRAWN

Privilege withdrawn.

GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_AACOMPROMISE

AA compromised.

Figure 4.4: The revocation reasons

Note, that the OCSP response needs to be verified against some set of trust anchors before it can be relied upon. It is also important to check whether the received OCSP response corresponds to the certificate being checked.

int gnutls_ocsp_resp_verify (gnutls_ocsp_resp_const_t resp, gnutls_x509_trust_list_t trustlist, unsigned int * verify, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_ocsp_resp_verify_direct (gnutls_ocsp_resp_const_t resp, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, unsigned int * verify, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_ocsp_resp_check_crt (gnutls_ocsp_resp_const_t resp, unsigned int indx, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt)

Next: , Previous: , Up: More on certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.2.4 OCSP stapling

To avoid applications contacting the OCSP server directly, TLS servers can provide a "stapled" OCSP response in the TLS handshake. That way the client application needs to do nothing more. GnuTLS will automatically consider the stapled OCSP response during the TLS certificate verification (see gnutls_certificate_verify_peers2). To disable the automatic OCSP verification the flag GNUTLS_VERIFY_DISABLE_CRL_CHECKS should be specified to gnutls_certificate_set_verify_flags.

Since GnuTLS 3.5.1 the client certificate verification will consider the [RFC7633] OCSP-Must-staple certificate extension, and will consider it while checking for stapled OCSP responses. If the extension is present and no OCSP staple is found, the certificate verification will fail and the status code GNUTLS_CERT_MISSING_OCSP_STATUS will returned from the verification function.

Under TLS 1.2 only one stapled response can be sent by a server, the OCSP response associated with the end-certificate. Under TLS 1.3 a server can send multiple OCSP responses, typically one for each certificate in the certificate chain. The following functions can be used by a client application to retrieve the OCSP responses as sent by the server.

int gnutls_ocsp_status_request_get (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_datum_t * response)
int gnutls_ocsp_status_request_get2 (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned idx, gnutls_datum_t * response)

GnuTLS servers can provide OCSP responses to their clients using the following functions.

void gnutls_certificate_set_retrieve_function3 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_certificate_retrieve_function3 * func)
int gnutls_certificate_set_ocsp_status_request_file2 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t sc, const char * response_file, unsigned idx, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t fmt)
unsigned gnutls_ocsp_status_request_is_checked (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int flags)

A server is expected to provide the relevant certificate’s OCSP responses using gnutls_certificate_set_ocsp_status_request_file2, and ensure a periodic reload/renew of the credentials. An estimation of the OCSP responses expiration can be obtained using the gnutls_certificate_get_ocsp_expiration function.

Function: time_t gnutls_certificate_get_ocsp_expiration (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t sc, unsigned idx, int oidx, unsigned flags)

sc: is a credentials structure.

idx: is a certificate chain index as returned by gnutls_certificate_set_key() and friends

oidx: is an OCSP response index

flags: should be zero

This function returns the validity of the loaded OCSP responses, to provide information on when to reload/refresh them.

Note that the credentials structure should be read-only when in use, thus when reloading, either the credentials structure must not be in use by any sessions, or a new credentials structure should be allocated for new sessions.

When oidx is (-1) then the minimum refresh time for all responses is returned. Otherwise the index specifies the response corresponding to the odix certificate in the certificate chain.

Returns: On success, the expiration time of the OCSP response. Otherwise (time_t)(-1) on error, or (time_t)-2 on out of bounds.

Since: 3.6.3

Prior to GnuTLS 3.6.4, the functions gnutls_certificate_set_ocsp_status_request_function2 gnutls_certificate_set_ocsp_status_request_file were provided to set OCSP responses. These functions are still functional, but cannot be used to set multiple OCSP responses as allowed by TLS1.3.

The responses can be updated periodically using the ’ocsptool’ command (see also ocsptool Invocation).

ocsptool --ask --load-cert server_cert.pem --load-issuer the_issuer.pem
         --load-signer the_issuer.pem --outfile ocsp.resp

In order to allow multiple OCSP responses to be concatenated, GnuTLS supports PEM-encoded OCSP responses. These can be generated using ’ocsptool’ with the ’–no-outder’ parameter.


Next: , Previous: , Up: More on certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.2.5 Managing encrypted keys

Transferring or storing private keys in plain may not be a good idea, since any compromise is irreparable. Storing the keys in hardware security modules (see Smart cards and HSMs) could solve the storage problem but it is not always practical or efficient enough. This section describes ways to store and transfer encrypted private keys.

There are methods for key encryption, namely the PKCS #8, PKCS #12 and OpenSSL’s custom encrypted private key formats. The PKCS #8 and the OpenSSL’s method allow encryption of the private key, while the PKCS #12 method allows, in addition, the bundling of accompanying data into the structure. That is typically the corresponding certificate, as well as a trusted CA certificate.

High level functionality

Generic and higher level private key import functions are available, that import plain or encrypted keys and will auto-detect the encrypted key format.

Function: int gnutls_privkey_import_x509_raw (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * password, unsigned int flags)

pkey: The private key

data: The private key data to be imported

format: The format of the private key

password: A password (optional)

flags: an ORed sequence of gnutls_pkcs_encrypt_flags_t

This function will import the given private key to the abstract gnutls_privkey_t type.

The supported formats are basic unencrypted key, PKCS8, PKCS12, TSS2, and the openssl format.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.1.0

Function: int gnutls_x509_privkey_import2 (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * password, unsigned int flags)

key: The data to store the parsed key

data: The DER or PEM encoded key.

format: One of DER or PEM

password: A password (optional)

flags: an ORed sequence of gnutls_pkcs_encrypt_flags_t

This function will import the given DER or PEM encoded key, to the native gnutls_x509_privkey_t format, irrespective of the input format. The input format is auto-detected.

The supported formats are basic unencrypted key, PKCS8, PKCS12, and the openssl format.

If the provided key is encrypted but no password was given, then GNUTLS_E_DECRYPTION_FAILED is returned. Since GnuTLS 3.4.0 this function will utilize the PIN callbacks if any.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Any keys imported using those functions can be imported to a certificate credentials structure using gnutls_certificate_set_key, or alternatively they can be directly imported using gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2.

PKCS #8 structures

PKCS #8 keys can be imported and exported as normal private keys using the functions below. An addition to the normal import functions, are a password and a flags argument. The flags can be any element of the gnutls_pkcs_encrypt_flags_t enumeration. Note however, that GnuTLS only supports the PKCS #5 PBES2 encryption scheme. Keys encrypted with the obsolete PBES1 scheme cannot be decrypted.

int gnutls_x509_privkey_import_pkcs8 (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * password, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_x509_privkey_export_pkcs8 (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * password, unsigned int flags, void * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)
int gnutls_x509_privkey_export2_pkcs8 (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * password, unsigned int flags, gnutls_datum_t * out)
GNUTLS_PKCS_PLAIN

Unencrypted private key.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PKCS12_3DES

PKCS-12 3DES.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PKCS12_ARCFOUR

PKCS-12 ARCFOUR.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PKCS12_RC2_40

PKCS-12 RC2-40.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_3DES

PBES2 3DES.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_AES_128

PBES2 AES-128.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_AES_192

PBES2 AES-192.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_AES_256

PBES2 AES-256.

GNUTLS_PKCS_NULL_PASSWORD

Some schemas distinguish between an empty and a NULL password.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_DES

PBES2 single DES.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES1_DES_MD5

PBES1 with single DES; for compatibility with openssl only.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_GOST_TC26Z

PBES2 GOST 28147-89 CFB with TC26-Z S-box.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_GOST_CPA

PBES2 GOST 28147-89 CFB with CryptoPro-A S-box.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_GOST_CPB

PBES2 GOST 28147-89 CFB with CryptoPro-B S-box.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_GOST_CPC

PBES2 GOST 28147-89 CFB with CryptoPro-C S-box.

GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_GOST_CPD

PBES2 GOST 28147-89 CFB with CryptoPro-D S-box.

Figure 4.5: Encryption flags

PKCS #12 structures

A PKCS #12 structure [PKCS12] usually contains a user’s private keys and certificates. It is commonly used in browsers to export and import the user’s identities. A file containing such a key can be directly imported to a certificate credentials structure by using gnutls_certificate_set_x509_simple_pkcs12_file.

In GnuTLS the PKCS #12 structures are handled using the gnutls_pkcs12_t type. This is an abstract type that may hold several gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t types. The bag types are the holders of the actual data, which may be certificates, private keys or encrypted data. A bag of type encrypted should be decrypted in order for its data to be accessed.

To reduce the complexity in parsing the structures the simple helper function gnutls_pkcs12_simple_parse is provided. For more advanced uses, manual parsing of the structure is required using the functions below.

int gnutls_pkcs12_get_bag (gnutls_pkcs12_t pkcs12, int indx, gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag)
int gnutls_pkcs12_verify_mac (gnutls_pkcs12_t pkcs12, const char * pass)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_decrypt (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, const char * pass)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_get_count (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag)
Function: int gnutls_pkcs12_simple_parse (gnutls_pkcs12_t p12, const char * password, gnutls_x509_privkey_t * key, gnutls_x509_crt_t ** chain, unsigned int * chain_len, gnutls_x509_crt_t ** extra_certs, unsigned int * extra_certs_len, gnutls_x509_crl_t * crl, unsigned int flags)

p12: A pkcs12 type

password: optional password used to decrypt the structure, bags and keys.

key: a structure to store the parsed private key.

chain: the corresponding to key certificate chain (may be NULL )

chain_len: will be updated with the number of additional (may be NULL )

extra_certs: optional pointer to receive an array of additional certificates found in the PKCS12 structure (may be NULL ).

extra_certs_len: will be updated with the number of additional certs (may be NULL ).

crl: an optional structure to store the parsed CRL (may be NULL ).

flags: should be zero or one of GNUTLS_PKCS12_SP_*

This function parses a PKCS12 structure in pkcs12 and extracts the private key, the corresponding certificate chain, any additional certificates and a CRL. The structures in key , chain crl , and extra_certs must not be initialized.

The extra_certs and extra_certs_len parameters are optional and both may be set to NULL . If either is non-NULL , then both must be set. The value for extra_certs is allocated using gnutls_malloc() .

Encrypted PKCS12 bags and PKCS8 private keys are supported, but only with password based security and the same password for all operations.

Note that a PKCS12 structure may contain many keys and/or certificates, and there is no way to identify which key/certificate pair you want. For this reason this function is useful for PKCS12 files that contain only one key/certificate pair and/or one CRL.

If the provided structure has encrypted fields but no password is provided then this function returns GNUTLS_E_DECRYPTION_FAILED .

Note that normally the chain constructed does not include self signed certificates, to comply with TLS’ requirements. If, however, the flag GNUTLS_PKCS12_SP_INCLUDE_SELF_SIGNED is specified then self signed certificates will be included in the chain.

Prior to using this function the PKCS 12 structure integrity must be verified using gnutls_pkcs12_verify_mac() .

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.1.0

int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_get_data (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_get_key_id (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * id)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_get_friendly_name (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, unsigned indx, char ** name)

The functions below are used to generate a PKCS #12 structure. An example of their usage is shown at PKCS12 structure generation example.

int gnutls_pkcs12_set_bag (gnutls_pkcs12_t pkcs12, gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_encrypt (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, const char * pass, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pkcs12_generate_mac (gnutls_pkcs12_t pkcs12, const char * pass)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_data (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, gnutls_pkcs12_bag_type_t type, const gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_crl (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, gnutls_x509_crl_t crl)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_crt (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_key_id (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, unsigned indx, const gnutls_datum_t * id)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_friendly_name (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, unsigned indx, const char * name)

OpenSSL encrypted keys

Unfortunately the structures discussed in the previous sections are not the only structures that may hold an encrypted private key. For example the OpenSSL library offers a custom key encryption method. Those structures are also supported in GnuTLS with gnutls_x509_privkey_import_openssl.

Function: int gnutls_x509_privkey_import_openssl (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, const gnutls_datum_t * data, const char * password)

key: The data to store the parsed key

data: The DER or PEM encoded key.

password: the password to decrypt the key (if it is encrypted).

This function will convert the given PEM encrypted to the native gnutls_x509_privkey_t format. The output will be stored in key .

The password should be in ASCII. If the password is not provided or wrong then GNUTLS_E_DECRYPTION_FAILED will be returned.

If the Certificate is PEM encoded it should have a header of "PRIVATE KEY" and the "DEK-Info" header.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.


Next: , Previous: , Up: More on certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.2.6 Invoking certtool

Tool to parse and generate X.509 certificates, requests and private keys. It can be used interactively or non interactively by specifying the template command line option.

The tool accepts files or supported URIs via the –infile option. In case PIN is required for URI access you can provide it using the environment variables GNUTLS_PIN and GNUTLS_SO_PIN.

certtool help/usage (-?)

The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option (--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. more-help is disabled on platforms without a working fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

certtool - GnuTLS certificate tool
Usage:  certtool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... 

None:

   -d, --debug=num            Enable debugging
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 9999
   -V, --verbose              More verbose output
       --infile=file          Input file
				- file must pre-exist
       --outfile=str          Output file
       --attime=str           Perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time

Certificate related options:

   -i, --certificate-info     Print information on the given certificate
       --pubkey-info          Print information on a public key
   -s, --generate-self-signed Generate a self-signed certificate
   -c, --generate-certificate Generate a signed certificate
       --generate-proxy       Generates a proxy certificate
   -u, --update-certificate   Update a signed certificate
       --fingerprint          Print the fingerprint of the given certificate
       --key-id               Print the key ID of the given certificate
       --v1                   Generate an X.509 version 1 certificate (with no extensions)
       --sign-params=str      Sign a certificate with a specific signature algorithm

Certificate request related options:

       --crq-info             Print information on the given certificate request
   -q, --generate-request     Generate a PKCS #10 certificate request
				- prohibits the option 'infile'
       --no-crq-extensions    Do not use extensions in certificate requests

PKCS#12 file related options:

       --p12-info             Print information on a PKCS #12 structure
       --p12-name=str         The PKCS #12 friendly name to use
       --to-p12               Generate a PKCS #12 structure

Private key related options:

   -k, --key-info             Print information on a private key
       --p8-info              Print information on a PKCS #8 structure
       --to-rsa               Convert an RSA-PSS key to raw RSA format
   -p, --generate-privkey     Generate a private key
       --key-type=str         Specify the key type to use on key generation
       --bits=num             Specify the number of bits for key generation
       --curve=str            Specify the curve used for EC key generation
       --sec-param=str        Specify the security level [low, legacy, medium, high, ultra]
       --to-p8                Convert a given key to a PKCS #8 structure
   -8, --pkcs8                Use PKCS #8 format for private keys
       --provable             Generate a private key or parameters from a seed using a provable method
       --verify-provable-privkey  Verify a private key generated from a seed using a provable method
       --seed=str             When generating a private key use the given hex-encoded seed

CRL related options:

   -l, --crl-info             Print information on the given CRL structure
       --generate-crl         Generate a CRL
       --verify-crl           Verify a Certificate Revocation List using a trusted list
				- requires the option 'load-ca-certificate'

Certificate verification related options:

   -e, --verify-chain         Verify a PEM encoded certificate chain
       --verify               Verify a PEM encoded certificate (chain) against a trusted set
       --verify-hostname=str  Specify a hostname to be used for certificate chain verification
       --verify-email=str     Specify a email to be used for certificate chain verification
				- prohibits the option 'verify-hostname'
       --verify-purpose=str   Specify a purpose OID to be used for certificate chain verification
       --verify-allow-broken  Allow broken algorithms, such as MD5 for verification
       --verify-profile=str   Specify a security level profile to be used for verification

PKCS#7 structure options:

       --p7-generate          Generate a PKCS #7 structure
       --p7-sign              Signs using a PKCS #7 structure
       --p7-detached-sign     Signs using a detached PKCS #7 structure
       --p7-include-cert      The signer's certificate will be included in the cert list
				- enabled by default
				- disabled as '--no-p7-include-cert'
       --p7-time              Will include a timestamp in the PKCS #7 structure
       --p7-show-data         Will show the embedded data in the PKCS #7 structure
       --p7-info              Print information on a PKCS #7 structure
       --p7-verify            Verify the provided PKCS #7 structure
       --smime-to-p7          Convert S/MIME to PKCS #7 structure

Other options:

       --get-dh-params        List the included PKCS #3 encoded Diffie-Hellman parameters
       --dh-info              Print information PKCS #3 encoded Diffie-Hellman parameters
       --load-privkey=str     Loads a private key file
       --load-pubkey=str      Loads a public key file
       --load-request=str     Loads a certificate request file
       --load-certificate=str Loads a certificate file
       --load-ca-privkey=str  Loads the certificate authority's private key file
       --load-ca-certificate=str Loads the certificate authority's certificate file
       --load-crl=str         Loads the provided CRL
       --load-data=str        Loads auxiliary data
       --password=str         Password to use
       --null-password        Enforce a NULL password
       --empty-password       Enforce an empty password
       --hex-numbers          Print big number in an easier format to parse
       --cprint               In certain operations it prints the information in C-friendly format
       --hash=str             Hash algorithm to use for signing
       --salt-size=num        Specify the RSA-PSS key default salt size
       --label=str            Specify the RSA-OAEP label, encoded in hexadecimal
       --inder                Use DER format for input certificates, private keys, and DH parameters 
       --inraw                an alias for the 'inder' option
       --outder               Use DER format for output certificates, private keys, and DH parameters
       --outraw               an alias for the 'outder' option
       --template=str         Template file to use for non-interactive operation
       --stdout-info          Print information to stdout instead of stderr
       --ask-pass             Enable interaction for entering password when in batch mode
       --pkcs-cipher=str      Cipher to use for PKCS #8 and #12 operations
       --provider=str         Specify the PKCS #11 provider library
       --text                 Output textual information before PEM-encoded certificates, private keys, etc
				- enabled by default
				- disabled as '--no-text'

Version, usage and configuration options:

   -v, --version[=arg]        output version information and exit
   -h, --help                 display extended usage information and exit
   -!, --more-help            extended usage information passed thru pager

Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
hyphen and the flag character.

Tool to parse and generate X.509 certificates, requests and private keys.
It can be used interactively or non interactively by
specifying the template command line option.

The tool accepts files or supported URIs via the --infile option. In case PIN
is required for URI access you can provide it using the environment variables GNUTLS_PIN 
and GNUTLS_SO_PIN.


Please send bug reports to:  <bugs@gnutls.org>

debug option (-d).

This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.

attime option.

This is the “perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument timestamp. timestamp is an instance in time encoded as Unix time or in a human readable timestring such as "29 Feb 2004", "2004-02-29". Full documentation available at <https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/Date-input-formats.html> or locally via info ’(coreutils) date invocation’.

cert-options options

Certificate related options.

pubkey-info option.

This is the “print information on a public key” option. The option combined with –load-request, –load-pubkey, –load-privkey and –load-certificate will extract the public key of the object in question.

fingerprint option.

This is the “print the fingerprint of the given certificate” option. This is a simple hash of the DER encoding of the certificate. It can be combined with the –hash parameter. However, it is recommended for identification to use the key-id which depends only on the certificate’s key.

key-id option.

This is the “print the key id of the given certificate” option. This is a hash of the public key of the given certificate. It identifies the key uniquely, remains the same on a certificate renewal and depends only on signed fields of the certificate.

certificate-pubkey option.

This is the “print certificate’s public key” option. This option is deprecated as a duplicate of –pubkey-info

NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED

sign-params option.

This is the “sign a certificate with a specific signature algorithm” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be combined with –generate-certificate, to sign the certificate with a specific signature algorithm variant. The only option supported is ’RSA-PSS’, and should be specified when the signer does not have a certificate which is marked for RSA-PSS use only.

crq-options options

Certificate request related options.

generate-request option (-q).

This is the “generate a pkcs #10 certificate request” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Will generate a PKCS #10 certificate request. To specify a private key use –load-privkey.

pkcs12-options options

PKCS#12 file related options.

p12-info option.

This is the “print information on a pkcs #12 structure” option. This option will dump the contents and print the metadata of the provided PKCS #12 structure.

p12-name option.

This is the “the pkcs #12 friendly name to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. The name to be used for the primary certificate and private key in a PKCS #12 file.

to-p12 option.

This is the “generate a pkcs #12 structure” option. It requires a certificate, a private key and possibly a CA certificate to be specified.

key-options options

Private key related options.

p8-info option.

This is the “print information on a pkcs #8 structure” option. This option will print information about encrypted PKCS #8 structures. That option does not require the decryption of the structure.

to-rsa option.

This is the “convert an rsa-pss key to raw rsa format” option. It requires an RSA-PSS key as input and will output a raw RSA key. This command is necessary for compatibility with applications that cannot read RSA-PSS keys.

generate-privkey option (-p).

This is the “generate a private key” option. When generating RSA-PSS or RSA-OAEP private keys, the –hash option will restrict the allowed hash for the key; For RSA-PSS keys the –salt-size option is also acceptable.

key-type option.

This is the “specify the key type to use on key generation” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be combined with –generate-privkey, to specify the key type to be generated. Valid options are, ’rsa’, ’rsa-pss’, ’rsa-oaep’, ’dsa’, ’ecdsa’, ’ed25519, ’ed448’, ’x25519’, and ’x448’.’. When combined with certificate generation it can be used to specify an RSA-PSS certificate when an RSA key is given.

curve option.

This is the “specify the curve used for ec key generation” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Supported values are secp192r1, secp224r1, secp256r1, secp384r1 and secp521r1.

sec-param option.

This is the “specify the security level [low, legacy, medium, high, ultra]” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument Security parameter. This is alternative to the bits option.

to-p8 option.

This is the “convert a given key to a pkcs #8 structure” option. This needs to be combined with –load-privkey.

provable option.

This is the “generate a private key or parameters from a seed using a provable method” option. This will use the FIPS PUB186-4 algorithms (i.e., Shawe-Taylor) for provable key generation. When specified the private keys or parameters will be generated from a seed, and can be later validated with –verify-provable-privkey to be correctly generated from the seed. You may specify –seed or allow GnuTLS to generate one (recommended). This option can be combined with –generate-privkey or –generate-dh-params.

That option applies to RSA and DSA keys. On the DSA keys the PQG parameters are generated using the seed, and on RSA the two primes.

verify-provable-privkey option.

This is the “verify a private key generated from a seed using a provable method” option. This will use the FIPS-186-4 algorithms for provable key generation. You may specify –seed or use the seed stored in the private key structure.

seed option.

This is the “when generating a private key use the given hex-encoded seed” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. The seed acts as a security parameter for the private key, and thus a seed size which corresponds to the security level of the private key should be provided (e.g., 256-bits seed).

crl-options options

CRL related options.

generate-crl option.

This is the “generate a crl” option. This option generates a Certificate Revocation List. When combined with –load-crl it would use the loaded CRL as base for the generated (i.e., all revoked certificates in the base will be copied to the new CRL). To add new certificates to the CRL use –load-certificate.

verify-crl option.

This is the “verify a certificate revocation list using a trusted list” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

The trusted certificate list must be loaded with –load-ca-certificate.

cert-verify-options options

Certificate verification related options.

verify-chain option (-e).

This is the “verify a pem encoded certificate chain” option. Verifies the validity of a certificate chain. That is, an ordered set of certificates where each one is the issuer of the previous, and the first is the end-certificate to be validated. In a proper chain the last certificate is a self signed one. It can be combined with –verify-purpose or –verify-hostname.

verify option.

This is the “verify a pem encoded certificate (chain) against a trusted set” option. The trusted certificate list can be loaded with –load-ca-certificate. If no certificate list is provided, then the system’s trusted certificate list is used. Note that during verification multiple paths may be explored. On a successful verification the successful path will be the last one. It can be combined with –verify-purpose or –verify-hostname.

verify-hostname option.

This is the “specify a hostname to be used for certificate chain verification” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This is to be combined with one of the verify certificate options.

verify-email option.

This is the “specify a email to be used for certificate chain verification” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

This is to be combined with one of the verify certificate options.

verify-purpose option.

This is the “specify a purpose oid to be used for certificate chain verification” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This object identifier restricts the purpose of the certificates to be verified. Example purposes are 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.1 (TLS WWW), 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.4 (EMAIL) etc. Note that a CA certificate without a purpose set (extended key usage) is valid for any purpose.

verify-allow-broken option.

This is the “allow broken algorithms, such as md5 for verification” option. This can be combined with –p7-verify, –verify or –verify-chain.

verify-profile option.

This is the “specify a security level profile to be used for verification” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be used to specify a certificate verification profile. Certificate verification profiles correspond to the security level. This should be one of ’none’, ’very weak’, ’low’, ’legacy’, ’medium’, ’high’, ’ultra’, ’future’. Note that by default no profile is applied, unless one is set as minimum in the gnutls configuration file.

pkcs7-options options

PKCS#7 structure options.

p7-generate option.

This is the “generate a pkcs #7 structure” option. This option generates a PKCS #7 certificate container structure. To add certificates in the structure use –load-certificate and –load-crl.

p7-sign option.

This is the “signs using a pkcs #7 structure” option. This option generates a PKCS #7 structure containing a signature for the provided data from infile. The data are stored within the structure. The signer certificate has to be specified using –load-certificate and –load-privkey. The input to –load-certificate can be a list of certificates. In case of a list, the first certificate is used for signing and the other certificates are included in the structure.

p7-detached-sign option.

This is the “signs using a detached pkcs #7 structure” option. This option generates a PKCS #7 structure containing a signature for the provided data from infile. The signer certificate has to be specified using –load-certificate and –load-privkey. The input to –load-certificate can be a list of certificates. In case of a list, the first certificate is used for signing and the other certificates are included in the structure.

p7-include-cert option.

This is the “the signer’s certificate will be included in the cert list” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

This options works with –p7-sign or –p7-detached-sign and will include or exclude the signer’s certificate into the generated signature.

p7-time option.

This is the “will include a timestamp in the pkcs #7 structure” option. This option will include a timestamp in the generated signature

p7-show-data option.

This is the “will show the embedded data in the pkcs #7 structure” option. This option can be combined with –p7-verify or –p7-info and will display the embedded signed data in the PKCS #7 structure.

p7-verify option.

This is the “verify the provided pkcs #7 structure” option. This option verifies the signed PKCS #7 structure. The certificate list to use for verification can be specified with –load-ca-certificate. When no certificate list is provided, then the system’s certificate list is used. Alternatively a direct signer can be provided using –load-certificate. A key purpose can be enforced with the –verify-purpose option, and the –load-data option will utilize detached data.

other-options options

Other options.

generate-dh-params option.

This is the “generate pkcs #3 encoded diffie-hellman parameters” option. The will generate random parameters to be used with Diffie-Hellman key exchange. The output parameters will be in PKCS #3 format. Note that it is recommended to use the –get-dh-params option instead.

NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED

get-dh-params option.

This is the “list the included pkcs #3 encoded diffie-hellman parameters” option. Returns stored DH parameters in GnuTLS. Those parameters returned are defined in RFC7919, and can be considered standard parameters for a TLS key exchange. This option is provided for old applications which require DH parameters to be specified; modern GnuTLS applications should not require them.

load-privkey option.

This is the “loads a private key file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This can be either a file or a PKCS #11 URL

load-pubkey option.

This is the “loads a public key file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This can be either a file or a PKCS #11 URL

load-request option.

This is the “loads a certificate request file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be used with a file

load-certificate option.

This is the “loads a certificate file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be used with a file

load-ca-privkey option.

This is the “loads the certificate authority’s private key file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This can be either a file or a PKCS #11 URL

load-ca-certificate option.

This is the “loads the certificate authority’s certificate file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This can be either a file or a PKCS #11 URL

load-crl option.

This is the “loads the provided crl” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be used with a file

load-data option.

This is the “loads auxiliary data” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be used with a file

password option.

This is the “password to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. You can use this option to specify the password in the command line instead of reading it from the tty. Note, that the command line arguments are available for view in others in the system. Specifying password as ” is the same as specifying no password.

null-password option.

This is the “enforce a null password” option. This option enforces a NULL password. This is different than the empty or no password in schemas like PKCS #8.

empty-password option.

This is the “enforce an empty password” option. This option enforces an empty password. This is different than the NULL or no password in schemas like PKCS #8.

cprint option.

This is the “in certain operations it prints the information in c-friendly format” option. In certain operations it prints the information in C-friendly format, suitable for including into C programs.

rsa option.

This is the “generate rsa key” option. When combined with –generate-privkey generates an RSA private key.

NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED

dsa option.

This is the “generate dsa key” option. When combined with –generate-privkey generates a DSA private key.

NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED

ecc option.

This is the “generate ecc (ecdsa) key” option. When combined with –generate-privkey generates an elliptic curve private key to be used with ECDSA.

NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED

ecdsa option.

This is an alias for the ecc option, see the ecc option documentation.

hash option.

This is the “hash algorithm to use for signing” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Available hash functions are SHA1, RMD160, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512, SHA3-224, SHA3-256, SHA3-384, SHA3-512.

salt-size option.

This is the “specify the rsa-pss key default salt size” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Typical keys shouldn’t set or restrict this option.

label option.

This is the “specify the rsa-oaep label, encoded in hexadecimal” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Typical keys shouldn’t set or restrict this option.

inder option.

This is the “use der format for input certificates, private keys, and dh parameters ” option. The input files will be assumed to be in DER or RAW format. Unlike options that in PEM input would allow multiple input data (e.g. multiple certificates), when reading in DER format a single data structure is read.

inraw option.

This is an alias for the inder option, see the inder option documentation.

outder option.

This is the “use der format for output certificates, private keys, and dh parameters” option. The output will be in DER or RAW format.

outraw option.

This is an alias for the outder option, see the outder option documentation.

ask-pass option.

This is the “enable interaction for entering password when in batch mode” option. This option will enable interaction to enter password when in batch mode. That is useful when the template option has been specified.

pkcs-cipher option.

This is the “cipher to use for pkcs #8 and #12 operations” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument Cipher. Cipher may be one of 3des, 3des-pkcs12, aes-128, aes-192, aes-256, rc2-40, arcfour.

provider option.

This is the “specify the pkcs #11 provider library” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This will override the default options in /etc/gnutls/pkcs11.conf

text option.

This is the “output textual information before pem-encoded certificates, private keys, etc” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Output textual information before PEM-encoded data

version option (-v).

This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.

help option (-h).

This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.

more-help option (-!).

This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.

certtool exit status

One of the following exit values will be returned:

0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

Successful program execution.

1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

certtool See Also

p11tool (1), psktool (1), srptool (1)

certtool Examples

Generating private keys

To create an RSA private key, run:

$ certtool --generate-privkey --outfile key.pem --rsa

To create a DSA or elliptic curves (ECDSA) private key use the above command combined with ’dsa’ or ’ecc’ options.

Generating certificate requests

To create a certificate request (needed when the certificate is issued by another party), run:

certtool --generate-request --load-privkey key.pem \
   --outfile request.pem

If the private key is stored in a smart card you can generate a request by specifying the private key object URL.

$ ./certtool --generate-request --load-privkey "pkcs11:..." \
  --load-pubkey "pkcs11:..." --outfile request.pem

Generating a self-signed certificate

To create a self signed certificate, use the command:

$ certtool --generate-privkey --outfile ca-key.pem
$ certtool --generate-self-signed --load-privkey ca-key.pem \
   --outfile ca-cert.pem

Note that a self-signed certificate usually belongs to a certificate authority, that signs other certificates.

Generating a certificate

To generate a certificate using the previous request, use the command:

$ certtool --generate-certificate --load-request request.pem \
   --outfile cert.pem --load-ca-certificate ca-cert.pem \
   --load-ca-privkey ca-key.pem

To generate a certificate using the private key only, use the command:

$ certtool --generate-certificate --load-privkey key.pem \
   --outfile cert.pem --load-ca-certificate ca-cert.pem \
   --load-ca-privkey ca-key.pem

Certificate information

To view the certificate information, use:

$ certtool --certificate-info --infile cert.pem

Changing the certificate format

To convert the certificate from PEM to DER format, use:

$ certtool --certificate-info --infile cert.pem --outder --outfile cert.der

PKCS #12 structure generation

To generate a PKCS #12 structure using the previous key and certificate, use the command:

$ certtool --load-certificate cert.pem --load-privkey key.pem \
   --to-p12 --outder --outfile key.p12

Some tools (reportedly web browsers) have problems with that file because it does not contain the CA certificate for the certificate. To work around that problem in the tool, you can use the –load-ca-certificate parameter as follows:

$ certtool --load-ca-certificate ca.pem \
  --load-certificate cert.pem --load-privkey key.pem \
  --to-p12 --outder --outfile key.p12

Obtaining Diffie-Hellman parameters

To obtain the RFC7919 parameters for Diffie-Hellman key exchange, use the command:

$ certtool --get-dh-params --outfile dh.pem --sec-param medium

Verifying a certificate

To verify a certificate in a file against the system’s CA trust store use the following command:

$ certtool --verify --infile cert.pem

It is also possible to simulate hostname verification with the following options:

$ certtool --verify --verify-hostname www.example.com --infile cert.pem

Proxy certificate generation

Proxy certificate can be used to delegate your credential to a temporary, typically short-lived, certificate. To create one from the previously created certificate, first create a temporary key and then generate a proxy certificate for it, using the commands:

$ certtool --generate-privkey > proxy-key.pem
$ certtool --generate-proxy --load-ca-privkey key.pem \
  --load-privkey proxy-key.pem --load-certificate cert.pem \
  --outfile proxy-cert.pem

Certificate revocation list generation

To create an empty Certificate Revocation List (CRL) do:

$ certtool --generate-crl --load-ca-privkey x509-ca-key.pem \
           --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem

To create a CRL that contains some revoked certificates, place the certificates in a file and use --load-certificate as follows:

$ certtool --generate-crl --load-ca-privkey x509-ca-key.pem \
  --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem --load-certificate revoked-certs.pem

To verify a Certificate Revocation List (CRL) do:

$ certtool --verify-crl --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem < crl.pem

certtool Files

Certtool’s template file format

A template file can be used to avoid the interactive questions of certtool. Initially create a file named ’cert.cfg’ that contains the information about the certificate. The template can be used as below:

$ certtool --generate-certificate --load-privkey key.pem  \
   --template cert.cfg --outfile cert.pem \
   --load-ca-certificate ca-cert.pem --load-ca-privkey ca-key.pem

An example certtool template file that can be used to generate a certificate request or a self signed certificate follows.

# X.509 Certificate options
#
# DN options

# The organization of the subject.
organization = "Koko inc."

# The organizational unit of the subject.
unit = "sleeping dept."

# The locality of the subject.
# locality =

# The state of the certificate owner.
state = "Attiki"

# The country of the subject. Two letter code.
country = GR

# The common name of the certificate owner.
cn = "Cindy Lauper"

# A user id of the certificate owner.
#uid = "clauper"

# Set domain components
#dc = "name"
#dc = "domain"

# If the supported DN OIDs are not adequate you can set
# any OID here.
# For example set the X.520 Title and the X.520 Pseudonym
# by using OID and string pairs.
#dn_oid = "2.5.4.12 Dr."
#dn_oid = "2.5.4.65 jackal"

# This is deprecated and should not be used in new
# certificates.
# pkcs9_email = "none@none.org"

# An alternative way to set the certificate's distinguished name directly
# is with the "dn" option. The attribute names allowed are:
# C (country), street, O (organization), OU (unit), title, CN (common name),
# L (locality), ST (state), placeOfBirth, gender, countryOfCitizenship, 
# countryOfResidence, serialNumber, telephoneNumber, surName, initials, 
# generationQualifier, givenName, pseudonym, dnQualifier, postalCode, name, 
# businessCategory, DC, UID, jurisdictionOfIncorporationLocalityName, 
# jurisdictionOfIncorporationStateOrProvinceName,
# jurisdictionOfIncorporationCountryName, XmppAddr, and numeric OIDs.

#dn = "cn = Nikos,st = New\, Something,C=GR,surName=Mavrogiannopoulos,2.5.4.9=Arkadias"

# The serial number of the certificate
# The value is in decimal (i.e. 1963) or hex (i.e. 0x07ab).
# Comment the field for a random serial number.
serial = 007

# In how many days, counting from today, this certificate will expire.
# Use -1 if there is no expiration date.
expiration_days = 700

# Alternatively you may set concrete dates and time. The GNU date string 
# formats are accepted. See:
# https://www.gnu.org/software/tar/manual/html_node/Date-input-formats.html

#activation_date = "2004-02-29 16:21:42"
#expiration_date = "2025-02-29 16:24:41"

# X.509 v3 extensions

# A dnsname in case of a WWW server.
#dns_name = "www.none.org"
#dns_name = "www.morethanone.org"

# An othername defined by an OID and a hex encoded string
#other_name = "1.3.6.1.5.2.2 302ca00d1b0b56414e5245494e2e4f5247a11b3019a006020400000002a10f300d1b047269636b1b0561646d696e"
#other_name_utf8 = "1.2.4.5.6 A UTF8 string"
#other_name_octet = "1.2.4.5.6 A string that will be encoded as ASN.1 octet string"

# Allows writing an XmppAddr Identifier
#xmpp_name = juliet@im.example.com

# Names used in PKINIT
#krb5_principal = user@REALM.COM
#krb5_principal = HTTP/user@REALM.COM

# A subject alternative name URI
#uri = "https://www.example.com"

# An IP address in case of a server.
#ip_address = "192.168.1.1"

# An email in case of a person
email = "none@none.org"

# TLS feature (rfc7633) extension. That can is used to indicate mandatory TLS
# extension features to be provided by the server. In practice this is used
# to require the Status Request (extid: 5) extension from the server. That is,
# to require the server holding this certificate to provide a stapled OCSP response.
# You can have multiple lines for multiple TLS features.

# To ask for OCSP status request use:
#tls_feature = 5

# Challenge password used in certificate requests
challenge_password = 123456

# Password when encrypting a private key
#password = secret

# An URL that has CRLs (certificate revocation lists)
# available. Needed in CA certificates.
#crl_dist_points = "https://www.getcrl.crl/getcrl/"

# Whether this is a CA certificate or not
#ca

# Subject Unique ID (in hex)
#subject_unique_id = 00153224

# Issuer Unique ID (in hex)
#issuer_unique_id = 00153225

#### Key usage

# The following key usage flags are used by CAs and end certificates

# Whether this certificate will be used to sign data (needed
# in TLS DHE ciphersuites). This is the digitalSignature flag
# in RFC5280 terminology.
signing_key

# Whether this certificate will be used to encrypt data (needed
# in TLS RSA ciphersuites). Note that it is preferred to use different
# keys for encryption and signing. This is the keyEncipherment flag
# in RFC5280 terminology.
encryption_key

# Whether this key will be used to sign other certificates. The
# keyCertSign flag in RFC5280 terminology.
#cert_signing_key

# Whether this key will be used to sign CRLs. The
# cRLSign flag in RFC5280 terminology.
#crl_signing_key

# The keyAgreement flag of RFC5280. Its purpose is loosely
# defined. Not use it unless required by a protocol.
#key_agreement

# The dataEncipherment flag of RFC5280. Its purpose is loosely
# defined. Not use it unless required by a protocol.
#data_encipherment

# The nonRepudiation flag of RFC5280. Its purpose is loosely
# defined. Not use it unless required by a protocol.
#non_repudiation

#### Extended key usage (key purposes)

# The following extensions are used in an end certificate
# to clarify its purpose. Some CAs also use it to indicate
# the types of certificates they are purposed to sign.


# Whether this certificate will be used for a TLS client;
# this sets the id-kp-clientAuth (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.2) of
# extended key usage.
#tls_www_client

# Whether this certificate will be used for a TLS server;
# this sets the id-kp-serverAuth (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.1) of
# extended key usage.
#tls_www_server

# Whether this key will be used to sign code. This sets the
# id-kp-codeSigning (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.3) of extended key usage
# extension.
#code_signing_key

# Whether this key will be used to sign OCSP data. This sets the
# id-kp-OCSPSigning (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.9) of extended key usage extension.
#ocsp_signing_key

# Whether this key will be used for time stamping. This sets the
# id-kp-timeStamping (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.8) of extended key usage extension.
#time_stamping_key

# Whether this key will be used for email protection. This sets the
# id-kp-emailProtection (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.4) of extended key usage extension.
#email_protection_key

# Whether this key will be used for IPsec IKE operations (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.17).
#ipsec_ike_key

## adding custom key purpose OIDs

# for microsoft smart card logon
# key_purpose_oid = 1.3.6.1.4.1.311.20.2.2

# for email protection
# key_purpose_oid = 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.4

# for any purpose (must not be used in intermediate CA certificates)
# key_purpose_oid = 2.5.29.37.0

### end of key purpose OIDs

### Adding arbitrary extensions
# This requires to provide the extension OIDs, as well as the extension data in
# hex format. The following two options are available since GnuTLS 3.5.3.
#add_extension = "1.2.3.4 0x0AAB01ACFE"

# As above but encode the data as an octet string
#add_extension = "1.2.3.4 octet_string(0x0AAB01ACFE)"

# For portability critical extensions shouldn't be set to certificates.
#add_critical_extension = "5.6.7.8 0x1AAB01ACFE"

# When generating a certificate from a certificate
# request, then honor the extensions stored in the request
# and store them in the real certificate.
#honor_crq_extensions

# Alternatively only specific extensions can be copied.
#honor_crq_ext = 2.5.29.17
#honor_crq_ext = 2.5.29.15

# Path length constraint. Sets the maximum number of
# certificates that can be used to certify this certificate.
# (i.e. the certificate chain length)
#path_len = -1
#path_len = 2

# OCSP URI
# ocsp_uri = https://my.ocsp.server/ocsp

# CA issuers URI
# ca_issuers_uri = https://my.ca.issuer

# Certificate policies
#policy1 = 1.3.6.1.4.1.5484.1.10.99.1.0
#policy1_txt = "This is a long policy to summarize"
#policy1_url = https://www.example.com/a-policy-to-read

#policy2 = 1.3.6.1.4.1.5484.1.10.99.1.1
#policy2_txt = "This is a short policy"
#policy2_url = https://www.example.com/another-policy-to-read

# The number of additional certificates that may appear in a
# path before the anyPolicy is no longer acceptable.
#inhibit_anypolicy_skip_certs 1

# Name constraints

# DNS
#nc_permit_dns = example.com
#nc_exclude_dns = test.example.com

# EMAIL
#nc_permit_email = "nmav@ex.net"

# Exclude subdomains of example.com
#nc_exclude_email = .example.com

# Exclude all e-mail addresses of example.com
#nc_exclude_email = example.com

# IP
#nc_permit_ip = 192.168.0.0/16
#nc_exclude_ip = 192.168.5.0/24
#nc_permit_ip = fc0a:eef2:e7e7:a56e::/64


# Options for proxy certificates
#proxy_policy_language = 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.21.1


# Options for generating a CRL

# The number of days the next CRL update will be due.
# next CRL update will be in 43 days
#crl_next_update = 43

# this is the 5th CRL by this CA
# The value is in decimal (i.e. 1963) or hex (i.e. 0x07ab).
# Comment the field for a time-based number.
# Time-based CRL numbers generated in GnuTLS 3.6.3 and later
# are significantly larger than those generated in previous
# versions. Since CRL numbers need to be monotonic, you need
# to specify the CRL number here manually if you intend to
# downgrade to an earlier version than 3.6.3 after publishing
# the CRL as it is not possible to specify CRL numbers greater
# than 2**63-2 using hex notation in those versions.
#crl_number = 5

# Specify the update dates more precisely.
#crl_this_update_date = "2004-02-29 16:21:42"
#crl_next_update_date = "2025-02-29 16:24:41"

# The date that the certificates will be made seen as
# being revoked.
#crl_revocation_date = "2025-02-29 16:24:41"


Next: , Previous: , Up: More on certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.2.7 Invoking ocsptool

On verification

Responses are typically signed/issued by designated certificates or certificate authorities and thus this tool requires on verification the certificate of the issuer or the full certificate chain in order to determine the appropriate signing authority. The specified certificate of the issuer is assumed trusted.

ocsptool help/usage (-?)

The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option (--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. more-help is disabled on platforms without a working fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

ocsptool - GnuTLS OCSP tool
Usage:  ocsptool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... 

None:

   -d, --debug=num            Enable debugging
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 9999
   -V, --verbose              More verbose output
       --infile=file          Input file
				- file must pre-exist
       --outfile=str          Output file
       --ask[=str]            Ask an OCSP/HTTP server on a certificate validity
   -e, --verify-response      Verify response
   -i, --request-info         Print information on a OCSP request
   -j, --response-info        Print information on a OCSP response
   -q, --generate-request     Generates an OCSP request
       --nonce                Use (or not) a nonce to OCSP request
       --load-chain=file      Reads a set of certificates forming a chain from file
				- file must pre-exist
       --load-issuer=file     Reads issuer's certificate from file
				- file must pre-exist
       --load-cert=file       Reads the certificate to check from file
				- file must pre-exist
       --load-trust=file      Read OCSP trust anchors from file
				- prohibits the option 'load-signer'
				- file must pre-exist
       --load-signer=file     Reads the OCSP response signer from file
				- prohibits the option 'load-trust'
				- file must pre-exist
       --inder                Use DER format for input certificates and private keys
       --outder               Use DER format for output of responses (this is the default)
       --outpem               Use PEM format for output of responses
   -Q, --load-request=file    Reads the DER encoded OCSP request from file
				- file must pre-exist
   -S, --load-response=file   Reads the DER encoded OCSP response from file
				- file must pre-exist
       --ignore-errors        Ignore any verification errors
       --verify-allow-broken  Allow broken algorithms, such as MD5 for verification
       --attime=str           Perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time

Version, usage and configuration options:

   -v, --version[=arg]        output version information and exit
   -h, --help                 display extended usage information and exit
   -!, --more-help            extended usage information passed thru pager

Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
hyphen and the flag character.

ocsptool is a program that can parse and print information about
OCSP requests/responses, generate requests and verify responses. Unlike
other GnuTLS applications it outputs DER encoded structures by default
unless the '--outpem' option is specified.

Please send bug reports to:  <bugs@gnutls.org>

debug option (-d).

This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.

ask option.

This is the “ask an ocsp/http server on a certificate validity” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument server name|url. Connects to the specified HTTP OCSP server and queries on the validity of the loaded certificate. Its argument can be a URL or a plain server name. It can be combined with –load-chain, where it checks all certificates in the provided chain, or with –load-cert and –load-issuer options. The latter checks the provided certificate against its specified issuer certificate.

verify-response option (-e).

This is the “verify response” option. Verifies the provided OCSP response against the system trust anchors (unless –load-trust is provided). It requires the –load-signer or –load-chain options to obtain the signer of the OCSP response.

request-info option (-i).

This is the “print information on a ocsp request” option. Display detailed information on the provided OCSP request.

response-info option (-j).

This is the “print information on a ocsp response” option. Display detailed information on the provided OCSP response.

load-trust option.

This is the “read ocsp trust anchors from file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.FILE argument.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

When verifying an OCSP response read the trust anchors from the provided file. When this is not provided, the system’s trust anchors will be used.

outder option.

This is the “use der format for output of responses (this is the default)” option. The output will be in DER encoded format. Unlike other GnuTLS tools, this is the default for this tool

outpem option.

This is the “use pem format for output of responses” option. The output will be in PEM format.

verify-allow-broken option.

This is the “allow broken algorithms, such as md5 for verification” option. This can be combined with –verify-response.

attime option.

This is the “perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument timestamp. timestamp is an instance in time encoded as Unix time or in a human readable timestring such as "29 Feb 2004", "2004-02-29". Full documentation available at <https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/Date-input-formats.html> or locally via info ’(coreutils) date invocation’.

version option (-v).

This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.

help option (-h).

This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.

more-help option (-!).

This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.

ocsptool exit status

One of the following exit values will be returned:

0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

Successful program execution.

1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

ocsptool See Also

certtool (1)

ocsptool Examples

Print information about an OCSP request

To parse an OCSP request and print information about the content, the -i or --request-info parameter may be used as follows. The -Q parameter specify the name of the file containing the OCSP request, and it should contain the OCSP request in binary DER format.

$ ocsptool -i -Q ocsp-request.der

The input file may also be sent to standard input like this:

$ cat ocsp-request.der | ocsptool --request-info

Print information about an OCSP response

Similar to parsing OCSP requests, OCSP responses can be parsed using the -j or --response-info as follows.

$ ocsptool -j -Q ocsp-response.der
$ cat ocsp-response.der | ocsptool --response-info

Generate an OCSP request

The -q or --generate-request parameters are used to generate an OCSP request. By default the OCSP request is written to standard output in binary DER format, but can be stored in a file using --outfile. To generate an OCSP request the issuer of the certificate to check needs to be specified with --load-issuer and the certificate to check with --load-cert. By default PEM format is used for these files, although --inder can be used to specify that the input files are in DER format.

$ ocsptool -q --load-issuer issuer.pem --load-cert client.pem \
           --outfile ocsp-request.der

When generating OCSP requests, the tool will add an OCSP extension containing a nonce. This behaviour can be disabled by specifying --no-nonce.

Verify signature in OCSP response

To verify the signature in an OCSP response the -e or --verify-response parameter is used. The tool will read an OCSP response in DER format from standard input, or from the file specified by --load-response. The OCSP response is verified against a set of trust anchors, which are specified using --load-trust. The trust anchors are concatenated certificates in PEM format. The certificate that signed the OCSP response needs to be in the set of trust anchors, or the issuer of the signer certificate needs to be in the set of trust anchors and the OCSP Extended Key Usage bit has to be asserted in the signer certificate.

$ ocsptool -e --load-trust issuer.pem \
           --load-response ocsp-response.der

The tool will print status of verification.

Verify signature in OCSP response against given certificate

It is possible to override the normal trust logic if you know that a certain certificate is supposed to have signed the OCSP response, and you want to use it to check the signature. This is achieved using --load-signer instead of --load-trust. This will load one certificate and it will be used to verify the signature in the OCSP response. It will not check the Extended Key Usage bit.

$ ocsptool -e --load-signer ocsp-signer.pem \
           --load-response ocsp-response.der

This approach is normally only relevant in two situations. The first is when the OCSP response does not contain a copy of the signer certificate, so the --load-trust code would fail. The second is if you want to avoid the indirect mode where the OCSP response signer certificate is signed by a trust anchor.

Real-world example

Here is an example of how to generate an OCSP request for a certificate and to verify the response. For illustration we’ll use the blog.josefsson.org host, which (as of writing) uses a certificate from CACert. First we’ll use gnutls-cli to get a copy of the server certificate chain. The server is not required to send this information, but this particular one is configured to do so.

$ echo | gnutls-cli -p 443 blog.josefsson.org --save-cert chain.pem

The saved certificates normally contain a pointer to where the OCSP responder is located, in the Authority Information Access Information extension. For example, from certtool -i < chain.pem there is this information:

		Authority Information Access Information (not critical):
			Access Method: 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.48.1 (id-ad-ocsp)
			Access Location URI: https://ocsp.CAcert.org/

This means that ocsptool can discover the servers to contact over HTTP. We can now request information on the chain certificates.

$ ocsptool --ask --load-chain chain.pem

The request is sent via HTTP to the OCSP server address found in the certificates. It is possible to override the address of the OCSP server as well as ask information on a particular certificate using –load-cert and –load-issuer.

$ ocsptool --ask https://ocsp.CAcert.org/ --load-chain chain.pem

Previous: , Up: More on certificate authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.2.8 Invoking danetool

Tool to generate and check DNS resource records for the DANE protocol.

danetool help/usage (-?)

The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option (--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. more-help is disabled on platforms without a working fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

danetool - GnuTLS DANE tool
Usage:  danetool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... 

None:

   -d, --debug=num            Enable debugging
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 9999
   -V, --verbose              More verbose output
       --outfile=str          Output file
       --load-pubkey=str      Loads a public key file
       --load-certificate=str Loads a certificate file
       --dlv=str              Sets a DLV file
       --hash=str             Hash algorithm to use for signing
       --check=str            Check a host's DANE TLSA entry
       --check-ee             Check only the end-entity's certificate
       --check-ca             Check only the CA's certificate
       --tlsa-rr              Print the DANE RR data on a certificate or public key
				- requires the option 'host'
       --host=str             Specify the hostname to be used in the DANE RR
       --proto=str            The protocol set for DANE data (tcp, udp etc.)
       --port=str             The port or service to connect to, for DANE data
       --app-proto            an alias for the 'starttls-proto' option
       --starttls-proto=str   The application protocol to be used to obtain the server's certificate (https, ftp, smtp, imap, ldap, xmpp, lmtp, pop3, nntp, sieve, postgres)
       --ca                   Whether the provided certificate or public key is a Certificate Authority
       --x509                 Use the hash of the X.509 certificate, rather than the public key
       --local                an alias for the 'domain' option
       --domain               The provided certificate or public key is issued by the local domain
				- enabled by default
				- disabled as '--no-domain'
       --local-dns            Use the local DNS server for DNSSEC resolving
       --insecure             Do not verify any DNSSEC signature
       --inder                Use DER format for input certificates and private keys
       --inraw                an alias for the 'inder' option
       --print-raw            Print the received DANE data in raw format
       --quiet                Suppress several informational messages

Version, usage and configuration options:

   -v, --version[=arg]        output version information and exit
   -h, --help                 display extended usage information and exit
   -!, --more-help            extended usage information passed thru pager

Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
hyphen and the flag character.

Tool to generate and check DNS resource records for the DANE protocol.

Please send bug reports to:  <bugs@gnutls.org>

debug option (-d).

This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.

load-pubkey option.

This is the “loads a public key file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This can be either a file or a PKCS #11 URL

load-certificate option.

This is the “loads a certificate file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This can be either a file or a PKCS #11 URL

dlv option.

This is the “sets a dlv file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This sets a DLV file to be used for DNSSEC verification.

hash option.

This is the “hash algorithm to use for signing” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Available hash functions are SHA1, RMD160, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512.

check option.

This is the “check a host’s dane tlsa entry” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Obtains the DANE TLSA entry from the given hostname and prints information. Note that the actual certificate of the host can be provided using –load-certificate, otherwise danetool will connect to the server to obtain it. The exit code on verification success will be zero.

check-ee option.

This is the “check only the end-entity’s certificate” option. Checks the end-entity’s certificate only. Trust anchors or CAs are not considered.

check-ca option.

This is the “check only the ca’s certificate” option. Checks the trust anchor’s and CA’s certificate only. End-entities are not considered.

tlsa-rr option.

This is the “print the dane rr data on a certificate or public key” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

This command prints the DANE RR data needed to enable DANE on a DNS server.

host option.

This is the “specify the hostname to be used in the dane rr” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument Hostname. This command sets the hostname for the DANE RR.

proto option.

This is the “the protocol set for dane data (tcp, udp etc.)” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument Protocol. This command specifies the protocol for the service set in the DANE data.

app-proto option.

This is an alias for the starttls-proto option, see the starttls-proto option documentation.

starttls-proto option.

This is the “the application protocol to be used to obtain the server’s certificate (https, ftp, smtp, imap, ldap, xmpp, lmtp, pop3, nntp, sieve, postgres)” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. When the server’s certificate isn’t provided danetool will connect to the server to obtain the certificate. In that case it is required to know the protocol to talk with the server prior to initiating the TLS handshake.

ca option.

This is the “whether the provided certificate or public key is a certificate authority” option. Marks the DANE RR as a CA certificate if specified.

x509 option.

This is the “use the hash of the x.509 certificate, rather than the public key” option. This option forces the generated record to contain the hash of the full X.509 certificate. By default only the hash of the public key is used.

local option.

This is an alias for the domain option, see the domain option documentation.

domain option.

This is the “the provided certificate or public key is issued by the local domain” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

DANE distinguishes certificates and public keys offered via the DNSSEC to trusted and local entities. This flag indicates that this is a domain-issued certificate, meaning that there could be no CA involved.

local-dns option.

This is the “use the local dns server for dnssec resolving” option. This option will use the local DNS server for DNSSEC. This is disabled by default due to many servers not allowing DNSSEC.

insecure option.

This is the “do not verify any dnssec signature” option. Ignores any DNSSEC signature verification results.

inder option.

This is the “use der format for input certificates and private keys” option. The input files will be assumed to be in DER or RAW format. Unlike options that in PEM input would allow multiple input data (e.g. multiple certificates), when reading in DER format a single data structure is read.

inraw option.

This is an alias for the inder option, see the inder option documentation.

print-raw option.

This is the “print the received dane data in raw format” option. This option will print the received DANE data.

quiet option.

This is the “suppress several informational messages” option. In that case on the exit code can be used as an indication of verification success

version option (-v).

This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.

help option (-h).

This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.

more-help option (-!).

This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.

danetool exit status

One of the following exit values will be returned:

0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

Successful program execution.

1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

danetool See Also

certtool (1)

danetool Examples

DANE TLSA RR generation

To create a DANE TLSA resource record for a certificate (or public key) that was issued locally and may or may not be signed by a CA use the following command.

$ danetool --tlsa-rr --host www.example.com --load-certificate cert.pem

To create a DANE TLSA resource record for a CA signed certificate, which will be marked as such use the following command.

$ danetool --tlsa-rr --host www.example.com --load-certificate cert.pem \
  --no-domain

The former is useful to add in your DNS entry even if your certificate is signed by a CA. That way even users who do not trust your CA will be able to verify your certificate using DANE.

In order to create a record for the CA signer of your certificate use the following.

$ danetool --tlsa-rr --host www.example.com --load-certificate cert.pem \
  --ca --no-domain

To read a server’s DANE TLSA entry, use:

$ danetool --check www.example.com --proto tcp --port 443

To verify an HTTPS server’s DANE TLSA entry, use:

$ danetool --check www.example.com --proto tcp --port 443 --load-certificate chain.pem

To verify an SMTP server’s DANE TLSA entry, use:

$ danetool --check www.example.com --proto tcp --starttls-proto=smtp --load-certificate chain.pem

Next: , Previous: , Up: Authentication methods   [Contents][Index]

4.3 Shared-key and anonymous authentication

In addition to certificate authentication, the TLS protocol may be used with password, shared-key and anonymous authentication methods. The rest of this chapter discusses details of these methods.


Next: , Up: Shared-key and anonymous authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.3.1 PSK authentication


Next: , Up: PSK authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.3.1.1 Authentication using PSK

Authentication using Pre-shared keys is a method to authenticate using usernames and binary keys. This protocol avoids making use of public key infrastructure and expensive calculations, thus it is suitable for constraint clients. It is available under all TLS protocol versions.

The implementation in GnuTLS is based on [TLSPSK]. The supported PSK key exchange methods are:

PSK:

Authentication using the PSK protocol (no forward secrecy).

DHE-PSK:

Authentication using the PSK protocol and Diffie-Hellman key exchange. This method offers perfect forward secrecy.

ECDHE-PSK:

Authentication using the PSK protocol and Elliptic curve Diffie-Hellman key exchange. This method offers perfect forward secrecy.

RSA-PSK:

Authentication using the PSK protocol for the client and an RSA certificate for the server. This is not available under TLS 1.3.

Helper functions to generate and maintain PSK keys are also included in GnuTLS.

int gnutls_key_generate (gnutls_datum_t * key, unsigned int key_size)
int gnutls_hex_encode (const gnutls_datum_t * data, char * result, size_t * result_size)
int gnutls_hex_decode (const gnutls_datum_t * hex_data, void * result, size_t * result_size)

Previous: , Up: PSK authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.3.1.2 Invoking psktool

Program that generates random keys for use with TLS-PSK. The keys are stored in hexadecimal format in a key file.

psktool help/usage (-?)

The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option (--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. more-help is disabled on platforms without a working fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

psktool - GnuTLS PSK tool
Usage:  psktool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... 

None:

   -d, --debug=num            Enable debugging
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 9999
   -s, --keysize=num          Specify the key size in bytes (default is 32-bytes or 256-bits)
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 512
   -u, --username=str         Specify the username to use
   -p, --pskfile=str          Specify a pre-shared key file

Version, usage and configuration options:

   -v, --version[=arg]        output version information and exit
   -h, --help                 display extended usage information and exit
   -!, --more-help            extended usage information passed thru pager

Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
hyphen and the flag character.

Program  that generates random keys for use with TLS-PSK. The
keys are stored in hexadecimal format in a key file.

Please send bug reports to:  <bugs@gnutls.org>

debug option (-d).

This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.

pskfile option (-p).

This is the “specify a pre-shared key file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option will specify the pre-shared key file to store the generated keys.

passwd option.

This is an alias for the pskfile option, see the pskfile option documentation.

version option (-v).

This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.

help option (-h).

This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.

more-help option (-!).

This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.

psktool exit status

One of the following exit values will be returned:

0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

Successful program execution.

1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

psktool See Also

gnutls-cli-debug (1), gnutls-serv (1), srptool (1), certtool (1)

psktool Examples

To add a user ’psk_identity’ in keys.psk for use with GnuTLS run:

$ ./psktool -u psk_identity -p keys.psk
Generating a random key for user 'psk_identity'
Key stored to keys.psk
$ cat keys.psk
psk_identity:88f3824b3e5659f52d00e959bacab954b6540344
$

This command will create keys.psk if it does not exist and will add user ’psk_identity’.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Shared-key and anonymous authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.3.2 SRP authentication


Next: , Up: SRP authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.3.2.1 Authentication using SRP

GnuTLS supports authentication via the Secure Remote Password or SRP protocol (see [TOMSRP] for a description). The SRP key exchange is an extension to the TLS protocol, and it provides an authenticated with a password key exchange. The peers can be identified using a single password, or there can be combinations where the client is authenticated using SRP and the server using a certificate. It is only available under TLS 1.2 or earlier versions.

The advantage of SRP authentication, over other proposed secure password authentication schemes, is that SRP is not susceptible to off-line dictionary attacks. Moreover, SRP does not require the server to hold the user’s password. This kind of protection is similar to the one used traditionally in the UNIX /etc/passwd file, where the contents of this file did not cause harm to the system security if they were revealed. The SRP needs instead of the plain password something called a verifier, which is calculated using the user’s password, and if stolen cannot be used to impersonate the user.

Typical conventions in SRP are a password file, called tpasswd that holds the SRP verifiers (encoded passwords) and another file, tpasswd.conf, which holds the allowed SRP parameters. The included in GnuTLS helper follow those conventions. The srptool program, discussed in the next section is a tool to manipulate the SRP parameters.

The implementation in GnuTLS is based on [TLSSRP]. The supported key exchange methods are shown below. Enabling any of these key exchange methods in a session disables support for TLS1.3.

SRP:

Authentication using the SRP protocol.

SRP_DSS:

Client authentication using the SRP protocol. Server is authenticated using a certificate with DSA parameters.

SRP_RSA:

Client authentication using the SRP protocol. Server is authenticated using a certificate with RSA parameters.

Function: int gnutls_srp_verifier (const char * username, const char * password, const gnutls_datum_t * salt, const gnutls_datum_t * generator, const gnutls_datum_t * prime, gnutls_datum_t * res)

username: is the user’s name

password: is the user’s password

salt: should be some randomly generated bytes

generator: is the generator of the group

prime: is the group’s prime

res: where the verifier will be stored.

This function will create an SRP verifier, as specified in RFC2945. The prime and generator should be one of the static parameters defined in gnutls/gnutls.h or may be generated.

The verifier will be allocated with gnutls_malloc () and will be stored in res using binary format.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, or an error code.

int gnutls_srp_base64_encode2 (const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_datum_t * result)
int gnutls_srp_base64_decode2 (const gnutls_datum_t * b64_data, gnutls_datum_t * result)

Previous: , Up: SRP authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.3.2.2 Invoking srptool

Simple program that emulates the programs in the Stanford SRP (Secure Remote Password) libraries using GnuTLS. It is intended for use in places where you don’t expect SRP authentication to be the used for system users.

In brief, to use SRP you need to create two files. These are the password file that holds the users and the verifiers associated with them and the configuration file to hold the group parameters (called tpasswd.conf).

srptool help/usage (-?)

The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option (--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. more-help is disabled on platforms without a working fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

srptool - GnuTLS SRP tool
Usage:  srptool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... 

None:

   -d, --debug=num            Enable debugging
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 9999
   -i, --index=num            specify the index of the group parameters in tpasswd.conf to use
   -u, --username=str         specify a username
   -p, --passwd=str           specify a password file
   -s, --salt=num             specify salt size
       --verify               just verify the password
   -v, --passwd-conf=str      specify a password conf file
       --create-conf=str      Generate a password configuration file

Version, usage and configuration options:

   -v, --version[=arg]        output version information and exit
   -h, --help                 display extended usage information and exit
   -!, --more-help            extended usage information passed thru pager

Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
hyphen and the flag character.

Simple program that emulates the programs in the Stanford SRP (Secure
Remote Password) libraries using GnuTLS.  It is intended for use in  places
where you don't expect SRP authentication to be the used for system users.

In  brief,  to use SRP you need to create two files. These are the password
file that holds the users and the verifiers associated with  them  and  the
configuration file to hold the group parameters (called tpasswd.conf).

Please send bug reports to:  <bugs@gnutls.org>

debug option (-d).

This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.

verify option.

This is the “just verify the password” option. Verifies the password provided against the password file.

passwd-conf option (-v).

This is the “specify a password conf file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Specify a filename or a PKCS #11 URL to read the CAs from.

create-conf option.

This is the “generate a password configuration file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This generates a password configuration file (tpasswd.conf) containing the required for TLS parameters.

version option (-v).

This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.

help option (-h).

This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.

more-help option (-!).

This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.

srptool exit status

One of the following exit values will be returned:

0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

Successful program execution.

1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

srptool See Also

gnutls-cli-debug (1), gnutls-serv (1), srptool (1), psktool (1), certtool (1)

srptool Examples

To create tpasswd.conf which holds the g and n values for SRP protocol (generator and a large prime), run:

$ srptool --create-conf /etc/tpasswd.conf

This command will create /etc/tpasswd and will add user ’test’ (you will also be prompted for a password). Verifiers are stored by default in the way libsrp expects.

$ srptool --passwd /etc/tpasswd --passwd-conf /etc/tpasswd.conf -u test

This command will check against a password. If the password matches the one in /etc/tpasswd you will get an ok.

$ srptool --passwd /etc/tpasswd --passwd\-conf /etc/tpasswd.conf --verify -u test

Previous: , Up: Shared-key and anonymous authentication   [Contents][Index]

4.3.3 Anonymous authentication

The anonymous key exchange offers encryption without any indication of the peer’s identity. This kind of authentication is vulnerable to a man in the middle attack, but can be used even if there is no prior communication or shared trusted parties with the peer. It is useful to establish a session over which certificate authentication will occur in order to hide the identities of the participants from passive eavesdroppers. It is only available under TLS 1.2 or earlier versions.

Unless in the above case, it is not recommended to use anonymous authentication. In the cases where there is no prior communication with the peers, an alternative with better properties, such as key continuity, is trust on first use (see Verifying a certificate using trust on first use authentication).

The available key exchange algorithms for anonymous authentication are shown below, but note that few public servers support them, and they have to be explicitly enabled. These ciphersuites are negotiated only under TLS 1.2.

ANON_DH:

This algorithm exchanges Diffie-Hellman parameters.

ANON_ECDH:

This algorithm exchanges elliptic curve Diffie-Hellman parameters. It is more efficient than ANON_DH on equivalent security levels.


Previous: , Up: Authentication methods   [Contents][Index]

4.4 Selecting an appropriate authentication method

This section provides some guidance on how to use the available authentication methods in GnuTLS in various scenarios.

4.4.1 Two peers with an out-of-band channel

Let’s consider two peers who need to communicate over an untrusted channel (the Internet), but have an out-of-band channel available. The latter channel is considered safe from eavesdropping and message modification and thus can be used for an initial bootstrapping of the protocol. The options available are:

Provided that the out-of-band channel is trusted all of the above provide a similar level of protection. An out-of-band channel may be the initial bootstrapping of a user’s PC in a corporate environment, in-person communication, communication over an alternative network (e.g. the phone network), etc.

4.4.2 Two peers without an out-of-band channel

When an out-of-band channel is not available a peer cannot be reliably authenticated. What can be done, however, is to allow some form of registration of users connecting for the first time and ensure that their keys remain the same after that initial connection. This is termed key continuity or trust on first use (TOFU).

The available option is to use public key authentication (see Certificate authentication). The client and the server store each other’s public keys (or fingerprints of them) and associate them with their identity. On future sessions over the untrusted channel they verify the keys being the same (see Verifying a certificate using trust on first use authentication).

To mitigate the uncertainty of the information exchanged in the first connection other channels over the Internet may be used, e.g., DNSSEC (see Verifying a certificate using DANE).

4.4.3 Two peers and a trusted third party

When a trusted third party is available (or a certificate authority) the most suitable option is to use certificate authentication (see Certificate authentication). The client and the server obtain certificates that associate their identity and public keys using a digital signature by the trusted party and use them to on the subsequent communications with each other. Each party verifies the peer’s certificate using the trusted third party’s signature. The parameters of the third party’s signature are present in its certificate which must be available to all communicating parties.

While the above is the typical authentication method for servers in the Internet by using the commercial CAs, the users that act as clients in the protocol rarely possess such certificates. In that case a hybrid method can be used where the server is authenticated by the client using the commercial CAs and the client is authenticated based on some information the client provided over the initial server-authenticated channel. The available options are:


Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

5 Abstract key types and Hardware security modules

In several cases storing the long term cryptographic keys in a hard disk or even in memory poses a significant risk. Once the system they are stored is compromised the keys must be replaced as the secrecy of future sessions is no longer guaranteed. Moreover, past sessions that were not protected by a perfect forward secrecy offering ciphersuite are also to be assumed compromised.

If such threats need to be addressed, then it may be wise storing the keys in a security module such as a smart card, an HSM or the TPM chip. Those modules ensure the protection of the cryptographic keys by only allowing operations on them and preventing their extraction. The purpose of the abstract key API is to provide an API that will allow the handle of keys in memory and files, as well as keys stored in such modules.

In GnuTLS the approach is to handle all keys transparently by the high level API, e.g., the API that loads a key or certificate from a file. The high-level API will accept URIs in addition to files that specify keys on an HSM or in TPM, and a callback function will be used to obtain any required keys. The URI format is defined in [PKCS11URI].

More information on the API is provided in the next sections. Examples of a URI of a certificate stored in an HSM, as well as a key stored in the TPM chip are shown below. To discover the URIs of the objects the p11tool (see p11tool Invocation).

pkcs11:token=Nikos;serial=307521161601031;model=PKCS%2315; \
manufacturer=EnterSafe;object=test1;type=cert


Next: , Up: Hardware security modules and abstract key types   [Contents][Index]

5.1 Abstract key types

Since there are many forms of a public or private keys supported by GnuTLS such as X.509, PKCS #11 or TPM it is desirable to allow common operations on them. For these reasons the abstract gnutls_privkey_t and gnutls_pubkey_t were introduced in gnutls/abstract.h header. Those types are initialized using a specific type of key and then can be used to perform operations in an abstract way. For example in order to sign an X.509 certificate with a key that resides in a token the following steps can be used.

#include <gnutls/abstract.h>

void sign_cert( gnutls_x509_crt_t to_be_signed)
{
gnutls_x509_crt_t ca_cert;
gnutls_privkey_t abs_key;

  /* initialize the abstract key */
  gnutls_privkey_init(&abs_key);

  /* keys stored in tokens are identified by URLs */
  gnutls_privkey_import_url(abs_key, key_url);

  gnutls_x509_crt_init(&ca_cert);
  gnutls_x509_crt_import_url(&ca_cert, cert_url);

  /* sign the certificate to be signed */
  gnutls_x509_crt_privkey_sign(to_be_signed, ca_cert, abs_key, 
                               GNUTLS_DIG_SHA256, 0);
}

Next: , Up: Abstract key types   [Contents][Index]

5.1.1 Public keys

An abstract gnutls_pubkey_t can be initialized and freed by using the functions below.

int gnutls_pubkey_init (gnutls_pubkey_t * key)
void gnutls_pubkey_deinit (gnutls_pubkey_t key)

After initialization its values can be imported from an existing structure like gnutls_x509_crt_t, or through an ASN.1 encoding of the X.509 SubjectPublicKeyInfo sequence.

int gnutls_pubkey_import_x509 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_import_pkcs11 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t obj, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_import_url (gnutls_pubkey_t key, const char * url, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_import_privkey (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_privkey_t pkey, unsigned int usage, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_import (gnutls_pubkey_t key, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format)
int gnutls_pubkey_export (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, void * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)
Function: int gnutls_pubkey_export2 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, gnutls_datum_t * out)

key: Holds the certificate

format: the format of output params. One of PEM or DER.

out: will contain a certificate PEM or DER encoded

This function will export the public key to DER or PEM format. The contents of the exported data is the SubjectPublicKeyInfo X.509 structure.

The output buffer will be allocated using gnutls_malloc() .

If the structure is PEM encoded, it will have a header of "BEGIN CERTIFICATE".

Returns: In case of failure a negative error code will be returned, and 0 on success.

Since: 3.1.3

Other helper functions that allow directly importing from raw X.509 structures are shown below.

int gnutls_pubkey_import_x509_raw (gnutls_pubkey_t pkey, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, unsigned int flags)

An important function is gnutls_pubkey_import_url which will import public keys from URLs that identify objects stored in tokens (see Smart cards and HSMs and Trusted Platform Module). A function to check for a supported by GnuTLS URL is gnutls_url_is_supported.

Function: unsigned gnutls_url_is_supported (const char * url)

url: A URI to be tested

Check whether the provided url is supported. Depending on the system libraries GnuTLS may support pkcs11, tpmkey or other URLs.

Returns: return non-zero if the given URL is supported, and zero if it is not known.

Since: 3.1.0

Additional functions are available that will return information over a public key, such as a unique key ID, as well as a function that given a public key fingerprint would provide a memorable sketch.

Note that gnutls_pubkey_get_key_id calculates a SHA1 digest of the public key as a DER-formatted, subjectPublicKeyInfo object. Other implementations use different approaches, e.g., some use the “common method” described in section 4.2.1.2 of [RFC5280] which calculates a digest on a part of the subjectPublicKeyInfo object.

int gnutls_pubkey_get_pk_algorithm (gnutls_pubkey_t key, unsigned int * bits)
int gnutls_pubkey_get_preferred_hash_algorithm (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t * hash, unsigned int * mand)
int gnutls_pubkey_get_key_id (gnutls_pubkey_t key, unsigned int flags, unsigned char * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)
int gnutls_random_art (gnutls_random_art_t type, const char * key_type, unsigned int key_size, void * fpr, size_t fpr_size, gnutls_datum_t * art)

To export the key-specific parameters, or obtain a unique key ID the following functions are provided.

int gnutls_pubkey_export_rsa_raw2 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * m, gnutls_datum_t * e, unsigned flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_export_dsa_raw2 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * p, gnutls_datum_t * q, gnutls_datum_t * g, gnutls_datum_t * y, unsigned flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_export_ecc_raw2 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_ecc_curve_t * curve, gnutls_datum_t * x, gnutls_datum_t * y, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_export_ecc_x962 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * parameters, gnutls_datum_t * ecpoint)

Next: , Previous: , Up: Abstract key types   [Contents][Index]

5.1.2 Private keys

An abstract gnutls_privkey_t can be initialized and freed by using the functions below.

int gnutls_privkey_init (gnutls_privkey_t * key)
void gnutls_privkey_deinit (gnutls_privkey_t key)

After initialization its values can be imported from an existing structure like gnutls_x509_privkey_t, but unlike public keys it cannot be exported. That is to allow abstraction over keys stored in hardware that makes available only operations.

int gnutls_privkey_import_x509 (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_privkey_import_pkcs11 (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, gnutls_pkcs11_privkey_t key, unsigned int flags)

Other helper functions that allow directly importing from raw X.509 structures are shown below. Again, as with public keys, private keys can be imported from a hardware module using URLs.

Function: int gnutls_privkey_import_url (gnutls_privkey_t key, const char * url, unsigned int flags)

key: A key of type gnutls_privkey_t

url: A PKCS 11 url

flags: should be zero

This function will import a PKCS11 or TPM URL as a private key. The supported URL types can be checked using gnutls_url_is_supported() .

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.1.0

int gnutls_privkey_import_x509_raw (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * password, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_privkey_get_pk_algorithm (gnutls_privkey_t key, unsigned int * bits)
gnutls_privkey_type_t gnutls_privkey_get_type (gnutls_privkey_t key)
int gnutls_privkey_status (gnutls_privkey_t key)

In order to support cryptographic operations using an external API, the following function is provided. This allows for a simple extensibility API without resorting to PKCS #11.

Function: int gnutls_privkey_import_ext4 (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, void * userdata, gnutls_privkey_sign_data_func sign_data_fn, gnutls_privkey_sign_hash_func sign_hash_fn, gnutls_privkey_decrypt_func decrypt_fn, gnutls_privkey_deinit_func deinit_fn, gnutls_privkey_info_func info_fn, unsigned int flags)

pkey: The private key

userdata: private data to be provided to the callbacks

sign_data_fn: callback for signature operations (may be NULL )

sign_hash_fn: callback for signature operations (may be NULL )

decrypt_fn: callback for decryption operations (may be NULL )

deinit_fn: a deinitialization function

info_fn: returns info about the public key algorithm (should not be NULL )

flags: Flags for the import

This function will associate the given callbacks with the gnutls_privkey_t type. At least one of the callbacks must be non-null. If a deinitialization function is provided then flags is assumed to contain GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_IMPORT_AUTO_RELEASE .

Note that in contrast with the signing function of gnutls_privkey_import_ext3() , the signing functions provided to this function take explicitly the signature algorithm as parameter and different functions are provided to sign the data and hashes.

The sign_hash_fn is to be called to sign pre-hashed data. The input to the callback is the output of the hash (such as SHA256) corresponding to the signature algorithm. For RSA PKCS1 signatures, the signature algorithm can be set to GNUTLS_SIGN_RSA_RAW , and in that case the data should be handled as if they were an RSA PKCS1 DigestInfo structure.

The sign_data_fn is to be called to sign data. The input data will be he data to be signed (and hashed), with the provided signature algorithm. This function is to be used for signature algorithms like Ed25519 which cannot take pre-hashed data as input.

When both sign_data_fn and sign_hash_fn functions are provided they must be able to operate on all the supported signature algorithms, unless prohibited by the type of the algorithm (e.g., as with Ed25519).

The info_fn must provide information on the signature algorithms supported by this private key, and should support the flags GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_INFO_PK_ALGO , GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_INFO_HAVE_SIGN_ALGO and GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_INFO_PK_ALGO_BITS . It must return -1 on unknown flags.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.6.0

On the private keys where exporting of parameters is possible (i.e., software keys), the following functions are also available.

int gnutls_privkey_export_rsa_raw2 (gnutls_privkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * m, gnutls_datum_t * e, gnutls_datum_t * d, gnutls_datum_t * p, gnutls_datum_t * q, gnutls_datum_t * u, gnutls_datum_t * e1, gnutls_datum_t * e2, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_privkey_export_dsa_raw2 (gnutls_privkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * p, gnutls_datum_t * q, gnutls_datum_t * g, gnutls_datum_t * y, gnutls_datum_t * x, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_privkey_export_ecc_raw2 (gnutls_privkey_t key, gnutls_ecc_curve_t * curve, gnutls_datum_t * x, gnutls_datum_t * y, gnutls_datum_t * k, unsigned int flags)

Previous: , Up: Abstract key types   [Contents][Index]

5.1.3 Operations

The abstract key types can be used to access signing and signature verification operations with the underlying keys.

Function: int gnutls_pubkey_verify_data2 (gnutls_pubkey_t pubkey, gnutls_sign_algorithm_t algo, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * data, const gnutls_datum_t * signature)

pubkey: Holds the public key

algo: The signature algorithm used

flags: Zero or an OR list of gnutls_certificate_verify_flags

data: holds the signed data

signature: contains the signature

This function will verify the given signed data, using the parameters from the certificate.

Returns: In case of a verification failure GNUTLS_E_PK_SIG_VERIFY_FAILED is returned, and zero or positive code on success. For known to be insecure signatures this function will return GNUTLS_E_INSUFFICIENT_SECURITY unless the flag GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_BROKEN is specified.

Since: 3.0

Function: int gnutls_pubkey_verify_hash2 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_sign_algorithm_t algo, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * hash, const gnutls_datum_t * signature)

key: Holds the public key

algo: The signature algorithm used

flags: Zero or an OR list of gnutls_certificate_verify_flags

hash: holds the hash digest to be verified

signature: contains the signature

This function will verify the given signed digest, using the parameters from the public key. Note that unlike gnutls_privkey_sign_hash() , this function accepts a signature algorithm instead of a digest algorithm. You can use gnutls_pk_to_sign() to get the appropriate value.

Returns: In case of a verification failure GNUTLS_E_PK_SIG_VERIFY_FAILED is returned, and zero or positive code on success. For known to be insecure signatures this function will return GNUTLS_E_INSUFFICIENT_SECURITY unless the flag GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_BROKEN is specified.

Since: 3.0

Function: int gnutls_pubkey_encrypt_data (gnutls_pubkey_t key, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * plaintext, gnutls_datum_t * ciphertext)

key: Holds the public key

flags: should be 0 for now

plaintext: The data to be encrypted

ciphertext: contains the encrypted data

This function will encrypt the given data, using the public key. On success the ciphertext will be allocated using gnutls_malloc() .

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.0

Function: int gnutls_privkey_sign_data (gnutls_privkey_t signer, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t hash, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_datum_t * signature)

signer: Holds the key

hash: should be a digest algorithm

flags: Zero or one of gnutls_privkey_flags_t

data: holds the data to be signed

signature: will contain the signature allocated with gnutls_malloc()

This function will sign the given data using a signature algorithm supported by the private key. Signature algorithms are always used together with a hash functions. Different hash functions may be used for the RSA algorithm, but only the SHA family for the DSA keys.

You may use gnutls_pubkey_get_preferred_hash_algorithm() to determine the hash algorithm.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 2.12.0

Function: int gnutls_privkey_sign_hash (gnutls_privkey_t signer, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t hash_algo, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * hash_data, gnutls_datum_t * signature)

signer: Holds the signer’s key

hash_algo: The hash algorithm used

flags: Zero or one of gnutls_privkey_flags_t

hash_data: holds the data to be signed

signature: will contain newly allocated signature

This function will sign the given hashed data using a signature algorithm supported by the private key. Signature algorithms are always used together with a hash functions. Different hash functions may be used for the RSA algorithm, but only SHA-XXX for the DSA keys.

You may use gnutls_pubkey_get_preferred_hash_algorithm() to determine the hash algorithm.

The flags may be GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_SIGN_FLAG_TLS1_RSA or GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_SIGN_FLAG_RSA_PSS . In the former case this function will ignore hash_algo and perform a raw PKCS1 signature, and in the latter an RSA-PSS signature will be generated.

Note that, not all algorithm support signing already hashed data. When signing with Ed25519, gnutls_privkey_sign_data() should be used.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 2.12.0

Function: int gnutls_privkey_decrypt_data (gnutls_privkey_t key, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * ciphertext, gnutls_datum_t * plaintext)

key: Holds the key

flags: zero for now

ciphertext: holds the data to be decrypted

plaintext: will contain the decrypted data, allocated with gnutls_malloc()

This function will decrypt the given data using the algorithm supported by the private key.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 2.12.0

Signing existing structures, such as certificates, CRLs, or certificate requests, as well as associating public keys with structures is also possible using the key abstractions.

Function: int gnutls_x509_crq_set_pubkey (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, gnutls_pubkey_t key)

crq: should contain a gnutls_x509_crq_t type

key: holds a public key

This function will set the public parameters from the given public key to the request. The key can be deallocated after that.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 2.12.0

Function: int gnutls_x509_crt_set_pubkey (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, gnutls_pubkey_t key)

crt: should contain a gnutls_x509_crt_t type

key: holds a public key

This function will set the public parameters from the given public key to the certificate. The key can be deallocated after that.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 2.12.0

int gnutls_x509_crt_privkey_sign (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_privkey_t issuer_key, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t dig, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_x509_crl_privkey_sign (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_privkey_t issuer_key, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t dig, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_x509_crq_privkey_sign (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, gnutls_privkey_t key, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t dig, unsigned int flags)

Next: , Previous: , Up: Hardware security modules and abstract key types   [Contents][Index]

5.2 System and application-specific keys

5.2.1 System-specific keys

In several systems there are keystores which allow to read, store and use certificates and private keys. For these systems GnuTLS provides the system-key API in gnutls/system-keys.h. That API provides the ability to iterate through all stored keys, add and delete keys as well as use these keys using a URL which starts with "system:". The format of the URLs is system-specific. The systemkey tool is also provided to assist in listing keys and debugging.

The systems supported via this API are the following.

Function: int gnutls_system_key_iter_get_info (gnutls_system_key_iter_t * iter, unsigned cert_type, char ** cert_url, char ** key_url, char ** label, gnutls_datum_t * der, unsigned int flags)

iter: an iterator of the system keys (must be set to NULL initially)

cert_type: A value of gnutls_certificate_type_t which indicates the type of certificate to look for

cert_url: The certificate URL of the pair (may be NULL )

key_url: The key URL of the pair (may be NULL )

label: The friendly name (if any) of the pair (may be NULL )

der: if non-NULL the DER data of the certificate

flags: should be zero

This function will return on each call a certificate and key pair URLs, as well as a label associated with them, and the DER-encoded certificate. When the iteration is complete it will return GNUTLS_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE .

Typically cert_type should be GNUTLS_CRT_X509 .

All values set are allocated and must be cleared using gnutls_free() ,

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.4.0

void gnutls_system_key_iter_deinit (gnutls_system_key_iter_t iter)
int gnutls_system_key_add_x509 (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, gnutls_x509_privkey_t privkey, const char * label, char ** cert_url, char ** key_url)
int gnutls_system_key_delete (const char * cert_url, const char * key_url)

5.2.2 Application-specific keys

For systems where GnuTLS doesn’t provide a system specific store, it may often be desirable to define a custom class of keys that are identified via URLs and available to GnuTLS calls such as gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2. Such keys can be registered using the API in gnutls/urls.h. The function which registers such keys is gnutls_register_custom_url.

Function: int gnutls_register_custom_url (const gnutls_custom_url_st * st)

st: A gnutls_custom_url_st structure

Register a custom URL. This will affect the following functions: gnutls_url_is_supported() , gnutls_privkey_import_url() , gnutls_pubkey_import_url, gnutls_x509_crt_import_url() and all functions that depend on them, e.g., gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2() .

The provided structure and callback functions must be valid throughout the lifetime of the process. The registration of an existing URL type will fail with GNUTLS_E_INVALID_REQUEST . Since GnuTLS 3.5.0 this function can be used to override the builtin URLs.

This function is not thread safe.

Returns: returns zero if the given structure was imported or a negative value otherwise.

Since: 3.4.0

The input to this function are three callback functions as well as the prefix of the URL, (e.g., "mypkcs11:") and the length of the prefix. The types of the callbacks are shown below, and are expected to use the exported gnutls functions to import the keys and certificates. E.g., a typical import_key callback should use gnutls_privkey_import_ext4.

typedef int (*gnutls_privkey_import_url_func)(gnutls_privkey_t pkey,
                                              const char *url,
                                              unsigned flags);

typedef int (*gnutls_x509_crt_import_url_func)(gnutls_x509_crt_t pkey,
                                               const char *url,
                                               unsigned flags);

/* The following callbacks are optional */

/* This is to enable gnutls_pubkey_import_url() */
typedef int (*gnutls_pubkey_import_url_func)(gnutls_pubkey_t pkey,
					     const char *url, unsigned flags);

/* This is to allow constructing a certificate chain. It will be provided
 * the initial certificate URL and the certificate to find its issuer, and must
 * return zero and the DER encoding of the issuer's certificate. If not available,
 * it should return GNUTLS_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE. */
typedef int (*gnutls_get_raw_issuer_func)(const char *url, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt,
					  gnutls_datum_t *issuer_der, unsigned flags);

typedef struct custom_url_st {
        const char *name;
        unsigned name_size;
        gnutls_privkey_import_url_func import_key;
        gnutls_x509_crt_import_url_func import_crt;
        gnutls_pubkey_import_url_func import_pubkey;
	gnutls_get_raw_issuer_func get_issuer;
} gnutls_custom_url_st;

Next: , Previous: , Up: Hardware security modules and abstract key types   [Contents][Index]

5.3 Smart cards and HSMs

In this section we present the smart-card and hardware security module (HSM) support in GnuTLS using PKCS #11 [PKCS11]. Hardware security modules and smart cards provide a way to store private keys and perform operations on them without exposing them. This decouples cryptographic keys from the applications that use them and provide an additional security layer against cryptographic key extraction. Since this can also be achieved in software components such as in Gnome keyring, we will use the term security module to describe any cryptographic key separation subsystem.

PKCS #11 is plugin API allowing applications to access cryptographic operations on a security module, as well as to objects residing on it. PKCS #11 modules exist for hardware tokens such as smart cards9, cryptographic tokens, as well as for software modules like Gnome Keyring. The objects residing on a security module may be certificates, public keys, private keys or secret keys. Of those certificates and public/private key pairs can be used with GnuTLS. PKCS #11’s main advantage is that it allows operations on private key objects such as decryption and signing without exposing the key. In GnuTLS the PKCS #11 functionality is available in gnutls/pkcs11.h.

pkcs11-vision

Figure 5.1: PKCS #11 module usage.


Next: , Up: Smart cards and HSMs   [Contents][Index]

5.3.1 Initialization

To allow all GnuTLS applications to transparently access smart cards and tokens, PKCS #11 is automatically initialized during the first call of a PKCS #11 related function, in a thread safe way. The default initialization process, utilizes p11-kit configuration, and loads any appropriate PKCS #11 modules. The p11-kit configuration files10 are typically stored in /etc/pkcs11/modules/. For example a file that will instruct GnuTLS to load the OpenSC module, could be named /etc/pkcs11/modules/opensc.module and contain the following:

module: /usr/lib/opensc-pkcs11.so

If you use these configuration files, then there is no need for other initialization in GnuTLS, except for the PIN and token callbacks (see next section). In several cases, however, it is desirable to limit badly behaving modules (e.g., modules that add an unacceptable delay on initialization) to single applications. That can be done using the “enable-in:” option followed by the base name of applications that this module should be used.

It is also possible to manually initialize or even disable the PKCS #11 subsystem if the default settings are not desirable or not available (see PKCS11 Manual Initialization for more information).

Note that, PKCS #11 modules behave in a peculiar way after a fork; they require a reinitialization of all the used PKCS #11 resources. While GnuTLS automates that process, there are corner cases where it is not possible to handle it correctly in an automated way11. For that, it is recommended not to mix fork() and PKCS #11 module usage. It is recommended to initialize and use any PKCS #11 resources in a single process.

Older versions of GnuTLS required to call gnutls_pkcs11_reinit after a fork() call; since 3.3.0 this is no longer required.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Smart cards and HSMs   [Contents][Index]

5.3.2 Manual initialization of user-specific modules

In systems where one cannot rely on a globally available p11-kit configuration to be available, it is still possible to utilize PKCS #11 objects. That can be done by loading directly the PKCS #11 shared module in the application using gnutls_pkcs11_add_provider, after having called gnutls_pkcs11_init specifying the GNUTLS_PKCS11_FLAG_MANUAL flag.

Function: int gnutls_pkcs11_add_provider (const char * name, const char * params)

name: The filename of the module

params: should be NULL or a known string (see description)

This function will load and add a PKCS 11 module to the module list used in gnutls. After this function is called the module will be used for PKCS 11 operations.

When loading a module to be used for certificate verification, use the string ’trusted’ as params .

Note that this function is not thread safe.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 2.12.0

In that case, the application will only have access to the modules explicitly loaded. If the GNUTLS_PKCS11_FLAG_MANUAL flag is specified and no calls to gnutls_pkcs11_add_provider are made, then the PKCS #11 functionality is effectively disabled.

Function: int gnutls_pkcs11_init (unsigned int flags, const char * deprecated_config_file)

flags: An ORed sequence of GNUTLS_PKCS11_FLAG_ *

deprecated_config_file: either NULL or the location of a deprecated configuration file

This function will initialize the PKCS 11 subsystem in gnutls. It will read configuration files if GNUTLS_PKCS11_FLAG_AUTO is used or allow you to independently load PKCS 11 modules using gnutls_pkcs11_add_provider() if GNUTLS_PKCS11_FLAG_MANUAL is specified.

You don’t need to call this function since GnuTLS 3.3.0 because it is being called during the first request PKCS 11 operation. That call will assume the GNUTLS_PKCS11_FLAG_AUTO flag. If another flags are required then it must be called independently prior to any PKCS 11 operation.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 2.12.0


Next: , Previous: , Up: Smart cards and HSMs   [Contents][Index]

5.3.3 Accessing objects that require a PIN

Objects stored in token such as a private keys are typically protected from access by a PIN or password. This PIN may be required to either read the object (if allowed) or to perform operations with it. To allow obtaining the PIN when accessing a protected object, as well as probe the user to insert the token the following functions allow to set a callback.

void gnutls_pkcs11_set_token_function (gnutls_pkcs11_token_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
void gnutls_pkcs11_set_pin_function (gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
int gnutls_pkcs11_add_provider (const char * name, const char * params)
gnutls_pin_callback_t gnutls_pkcs11_get_pin_function (void ** userdata)

The callback is of type gnutls_pin_callback_t and will have as input the provided userdata, the PIN attempt number, a URL describing the token, a label describing the object and flags. The PIN must be at most of pin_max size and must be copied to pin variable. The function must return 0 on success or a negative error code otherwise.

typedef int (*gnutls_pin_callback_t) (void *userdata, int attempt,
                                      const char *token_url,
                                      const char *token_label,
                                      unsigned int flags,
                                      char *pin, size_t pin_max);

The flags are of gnutls_pin_flag_t type and are explained below.

GNUTLS_PIN_USER

The PIN for the user.

GNUTLS_PIN_SO

The PIN for the security officer (admin).

GNUTLS_PIN_FINAL_TRY

This is the final try before blocking.

GNUTLS_PIN_COUNT_LOW

Few tries remain before token blocks.

GNUTLS_PIN_CONTEXT_SPECIFIC

The PIN is for a specific action and key like signing.

GNUTLS_PIN_WRONG

Last given PIN was not correct.

Figure 5.2: The gnutls_pin_flag_t enumeration.

Note that due to limitations of PKCS #11 there are issues when multiple libraries are sharing a module. To avoid this problem GnuTLS uses p11-kit that provides a middleware to control access to resources over the multiple users.

To avoid conflicts with multiple registered callbacks for PIN functions, gnutls_pkcs11_get_pin_function may be used to check for any previously set functions. In addition context specific PIN functions are allowed, e.g., by using functions below.

void gnutls_certificate_set_pin_function (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
void gnutls_pubkey_set_pin_function (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
void gnutls_privkey_set_pin_function (gnutls_privkey_t key, gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
void gnutls_pkcs11_obj_set_pin_function (gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t obj, gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
void gnutls_x509_crt_set_pin_function (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)

Next: , Previous: , Up: Smart cards and HSMs   [Contents][Index]

5.3.4 Reading objects

All PKCS #11 objects are referenced by GnuTLS functions by URLs as described in [PKCS11URI]. This allows for a consistent naming of objects across systems and applications in the same system. For example a public key on a smart card may be referenced as:

pkcs11:token=Nikos;serial=307521161601031;model=PKCS%2315; \
manufacturer=EnterSafe;object=test1;type=public;\
id=32f153f3e37990b08624141077ca5dec2d15faed

while the smart card itself can be referenced as:

pkcs11:token=Nikos;serial=307521161601031;model=PKCS%2315;manufacturer=EnterSafe

Objects stored in a PKCS #11 token can typically be extracted if they are not marked as sensitive. Usually only private keys are marked as sensitive and cannot be extracted, while certificates and other data can be retrieved. The functions that can be used to enumerate and access objects are shown below.

int gnutls_pkcs11_obj_list_import_url4 (gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t ** p_list, unsigned int * n_list, const char * url, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pkcs11_obj_import_url (gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t obj, const char * url, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pkcs11_obj_export_url (gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t obj, gnutls_pkcs11_url_type_t detailed, char ** url)
Function: int gnutls_pkcs11_obj_get_info (gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t obj, gnutls_pkcs11_obj_info_t itype, void * output, size_t * output_size)

obj: should contain a gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t type

itype: Denotes the type of information requested

output: where output will be stored

output_size: contains the maximum size of the output buffer and will be overwritten with the actual size.

This function will return information about the PKCS11 certificate such as the label, id as well as token information where the key is stored.

When output is text, a null terminated string is written to output and its string length is written to output_size (without null terminator). If the buffer is too small, output_size will contain the expected buffer size (with null terminator for text) and return GNUTLS_E_SHORT_MEMORY_BUFFER .

In versions previously to 3.6.0 this function included the null terminator to output_size . After 3.6.0 the output size doesn’t include the terminator character.

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) on success or a negative error code on error.

Since: 2.12.0

int gnutls_x509_crt_import_pkcs11 (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t pkcs11_crt)
int gnutls_x509_crt_import_url (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, const char * url, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_x509_crt_list_import_pkcs11 (gnutls_x509_crt_t * certs, unsigned int cert_max, gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t *const objs, unsigned int flags)

Properties of the physical token can also be accessed and altered with GnuTLS. For example data in a token can be erased (initialized), PIN can be altered, etc.

int gnutls_pkcs11_token_init (const char * token_url, const char * so_pin, const char * label)
int gnutls_pkcs11_token_get_url (unsigned int seq, gnutls_pkcs11_url_type_t detailed, char ** url)
int gnutls_pkcs11_token_get_info (const char * url, gnutls_pkcs11_token_info_t ttype, void * output, size_t * output_size)
int gnutls_pkcs11_token_get_flags (const char * url, unsigned int * flags)
int gnutls_pkcs11_token_set_pin (const char * token_url, const char * oldpin, const char * newpin, unsigned int flags)

The following examples demonstrate the usage of the API. The first example will list all available PKCS #11 tokens in a system and the latter will list all certificates in a token that have a corresponding private key.

int i;
char* url;

gnutls_global_init();

for (i=0;;i++) 
  {
    ret = gnutls_pkcs11_token_get_url(i, &url);
    if (ret == GNUTLS_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE)
      break;

    if (ret < 0)
      exit(1);
		
    fprintf(stdout, "Token[%d]: URL: %s\n", i, url);
    gnutls_free(url);
  }
gnutls_global_deinit();
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#include <config.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/pkcs11.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>

#define URL "pkcs11:URL"

int main(int argc, char **argv)
{
	gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t *obj_list;
	gnutls_x509_crt_t xcrt;
	unsigned int obj_list_size = 0;
	gnutls_datum_t cinfo;
	int ret;
	unsigned int i;

	ret = gnutls_pkcs11_obj_list_import_url4(
		&obj_list, &obj_list_size, URL,
		GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_CRT |
			GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_WITH_PRIVKEY);
	if (ret < 0)
		return -1;

	/* now all certificates are in obj_list */
	for (i = 0; i < obj_list_size; i++) {
		gnutls_x509_crt_init(&xcrt);

		gnutls_x509_crt_import_pkcs11(xcrt, obj_list[i]);

		gnutls_x509_crt_print(xcrt, GNUTLS_CRT_PRINT_FULL, &cinfo);

		fprintf(stdout, "cert[%d]:\n %s\n\n", i, cinfo.data);

		gnutls_free(cinfo.data);
		gnutls_x509_crt_deinit(xcrt);
	}

	for (i = 0; i < obj_list_size; i++)
		gnutls_pkcs11_obj_deinit(obj_list[i]);
	gnutls_free(obj_list);

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: Smart cards and HSMs   [Contents][Index]

5.3.5 Writing objects

With GnuTLS you can copy existing private keys and certificates to a token. Note that when copying private keys it is recommended to mark them as sensitive using the GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_SENSITIVE to prevent its extraction. An object can be marked as private using the flag GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_PRIVATE, to require PIN to be entered before accessing the object (for operations or otherwise).

Function: int gnutls_pkcs11_copy_x509_privkey2 (const char * token_url, gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, const char * label, const gnutls_datum_t * cid, unsigned int key_usage, unsigned int flags)

token_url: A PKCS 11 URL specifying a token

key: A private key

label: A name to be used for the stored data

cid: The CKA_ID to set for the object -if NULL, the ID will be derived from the public key

key_usage: One of GNUTLS_KEY_*

flags: One of GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_* flags

This function will copy a private key into a PKCS 11 token specified by a URL.

Since 3.6.3 the objects are marked as sensitive by default unless GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_NOT_SENSITIVE is specified.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.4.0

Function: int gnutls_pkcs11_copy_x509_crt2 (const char * token_url, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, const char * label, const gnutls_datum_t * cid, unsigned int flags)

token_url: A PKCS 11 URL specifying a token

crt: The certificate to copy

label: The name to be used for the stored data

cid: The CKA_ID to set for the object -if NULL, the ID will be derived from the public key

flags: One of GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_*

This function will copy a certificate into a PKCS 11 token specified by a URL. Valid flags to mark the certificate: GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_TRUSTED , GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_PRIVATE , GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_CA , GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_ALWAYS_AUTH .

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.4.0

Function: int gnutls_pkcs11_delete_url (const char * object_url, unsigned int flags)

object_url: The URL of the object to delete.

flags: One of GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_* flags

This function will delete objects matching the given URL. Note that not all tokens support the delete operation.

Returns: On success, the number of objects deleted is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 2.12.0


Next: , Previous: , Up: Smart cards and HSMs   [Contents][Index]

5.3.6 Low Level Access

When it is needed to use PKCS#11 functionality which is not wrapped by GnuTLS, it is possible to extract the PKCS#11 session, object or token pointers. That allows an application to still access the low-level functionality, while at the same time take advantage of the URI addressing scheme supported by GnuTLS.

Function: int gnutls_pkcs11_token_get_ptr (const char * url, void ** ptr, unsigned long * slot_id, unsigned int flags)

url: should contain a PKCS11 URL identifying a token

ptr: will contain the CK_FUNCTION_LIST_PTR pointer

slot_id: will contain the slot_id (may be NULL )

flags: should be zero

This function will return the function pointer of the specified token by the URL. The returned pointers are valid until gnutls is deinitialized, c.f. _global_deinit() .

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) on success or a negative error code on error.

Since: 3.6.3

Function: int gnutls_pkcs11_obj_get_ptr (gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t obj, void ** ptr, void ** session, void ** ohandle, unsigned long * slot_id, unsigned int flags)

obj: should contain a gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t type

ptr: will contain the CK_FUNCTION_LIST_PTR pointer (may be NULL )

session: will contain the CK_SESSION_HANDLE of the object

ohandle: will contain the CK_OBJECT_HANDLE of the object

slot_id: the identifier of the slot (may be NULL )

flags: Or sequence of GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_* flags

Obtains the PKCS11 session handles of an object. session and ohandle must be deinitialized by the caller. The returned pointers are independent of the obj lifetime.

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) on success or a negative error code on error.

Since: 3.6.3


Next: , Previous: , Up: Smart cards and HSMs   [Contents][Index]

5.3.7 Using a PKCS #11 token with TLS

It is possible to use a PKCS #11 token to a TLS session, as shown in ex-pkcs11-client. In addition the following functions can be used to load PKCS #11 key and certificates by specifying a PKCS #11 URL instead of a filename.

int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const char * cafile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char * certfile, const char * keyfile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type, const char * pass, unsigned int flags)

Next: , Previous: , Up: Smart cards and HSMs   [Contents][Index]

5.3.8 Verifying certificates over PKCS #11

The PKCS #11 API can be used to allow all applications in the same operating system to access shared cryptographic keys and certificates in a uniform way, as in Figure 5.1. That way applications could load their trusted certificate list, as well as user certificates from a common PKCS #11 module. Such a provider is the p11-kit trust storage module12 and it provides access to the trusted Root CA certificates in a system. That provides a more dynamic list of Root CA certificates, as opposed to a static list in a file or directory.

That store, allows for distrusting of CAs or certificates, as well as categorization of the Root CAs (Web verification, Code signing, etc.), in addition to restricting their purpose via stapled extensions13. GnuTLS will utilize the p11-kit trust module as the default trust store if configured to; i.e., if ’–with-default-trust-store-pkcs11=pkcs11:’ is given to the configure script.


Previous: , Up: Smart cards and HSMs   [Contents][Index]

5.3.9 Invoking p11tool

Program that allows operations on PKCS #11 smart cards and security modules.

To use PKCS #11 tokens with GnuTLS the p11-kit configuration files need to be setup. That is create a .module file in /etc/pkcs11/modules with the contents ’module: /path/to/pkcs11.so’. Alternatively the configuration file /etc/gnutls/pkcs11.conf has to exist and contain a number of lines of the form ’load=/usr/lib/opensc-pkcs11.so’.

You can provide the PIN to be used for the PKCS #11 operations with the environment variables GNUTLS_PIN and GNUTLS_SO_PIN.

p11tool help/usage (-?)

The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option (--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. more-help is disabled on platforms without a working fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

p11tool - GnuTLS PKCS #11 tool
Usage:  p11tool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [url]

None:


Tokens:

       --list-tokens          List all available tokens
       --list-token-urls      List the URLs available tokens
       --list-mechanisms      List all available mechanisms in a token
       --initialize           Initializes a PKCS #11 token
       --initialize-pin       Initializes/Resets a PKCS #11 token user PIN
       --initialize-so-pin    Initializes/Resets a PKCS #11 token security officer PIN
       --set-pin=str          Specify the PIN to use on token operations
       --set-so-pin=str       Specify the Security Officer's PIN to use on token initialization

Object listing:

       --list-all             List all available objects in a token
       --list-all-certs       List all available certificates in a token
       --list-certs           List all certificates that have an associated private key
       --list-all-privkeys    List all available private keys in a token
       --list-privkeys        an alias for the 'list-all-privkeys' option
       --list-keys            an alias for the 'list-all-privkeys' option
       --list-all-trusted     List all available certificates marked as trusted
       --export               Export the object specified by the URL
				- prohibits these options:
				export-stapled
				export-chain
				export-pubkey
       --export-stapled       Export the certificate object specified by the URL
				- prohibits these options:
				export
				export-chain
				export-pubkey
       --export-chain         Export the certificate specified by the URL and its chain of trust
				- prohibits these options:
				export-stapled
				export
				export-pubkey
       --export-pubkey        Export the public key for a private key
				- prohibits these options:
				export-stapled
				export
				export-chain
       --info                 List information on an available object in a token
       --trusted              an alias for the 'mark-trusted' option
       --distrusted           an alias for the 'mark-distrusted' option

Key generation:

       --generate-privkey=str Generate private-public key pair of given type
       --bits=num             Specify the number of bits for the key generate
       --curve=str            Specify the curve used for EC key generation
       --sec-param=str        Specify the security level

Writing objects:

       --set-id=str           Set the CKA_ID (in hex) for the specified by the URL object
				- prohibits the option 'write'
       --set-label=str        Set the CKA_LABEL for the specified by the URL object
				- prohibits these options:
				write
				set-id
       --write                Writes the loaded objects to a PKCS #11 token
       --delete               Deletes the objects matching the given PKCS #11 URL
       --label=str            Sets a label for the write operation
       --id=str               Sets an ID for the write operation
       --mark-wrap            Marks the generated key to be a wrapping key
       --mark-trusted         Marks the object to be written as trusted
				- prohibits the option 'mark-distrusted'
       --mark-distrusted      When retrieving objects, it requires the objects to be distrusted
				- prohibits the option 'mark-trusted'
       --mark-decrypt         Marks the object to be written for decryption
       --mark-sign            Marks the object to be written for signature generation
       --mark-ca              Marks the object to be written as a CA
       --mark-private         Marks the object to be written as private
       --ca                   an alias for the 'mark-ca' option
       --private              an alias for the 'mark-private' option
       --mark-always-authenticate  Marks the object to be written as always authenticate
       --secret-key=str       Provide a hex encoded secret key
       --load-privkey=file    Private key file to use
				- file must pre-exist
       --load-pubkey=file     Public key file to use
				- file must pre-exist
       --load-certificate=file Certificate file to use
				- file must pre-exist

Other options:

   -d, --debug=num            Enable debugging
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 9999
       --outfile=str          Output file
       --login                Force (user) login to token
       --so-login             Force security officer login to token
       --admin-login          an alias for the 'so-login' option
       --test-sign            Tests the signature operation of the provided object
       --sign-params=str      Sign with a specific signature algorithm
       --hash=str             Hash algorithm to use for signing
       --generate-random=num  Generate random data
   -8, --pkcs8                Use PKCS #8 format for private keys
       --inder                Use DER/RAW format for input
       --inraw                an alias for the 'inder' option
       --outder               Use DER format for output certificates, private keys, and DH parameters
       --outraw               an alias for the 'outder' option
       --provider=file        Specify the PKCS #11 provider library
       --detailed-url         Print detailed URLs
       --only-urls            Print a compact listing using only the URLs
       --batch                Disable all interaction with the tool

Version, usage and configuration options:

   -v, --version[=arg]        output version information and exit
   -h, --help                 display extended usage information and exit
   -!, --more-help            extended usage information passed thru pager

Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
hyphen and the flag character.
Operands and options may be intermixed.  They will be reordered.

Program that allows operations on PKCS #11 smart cards
and security modules. 

To use PKCS #11 tokens with GnuTLS the p11-kit configuration files need to be setup.
That is create a .module file in /etc/pkcs11/modules with the contents 'module: /path/to/pkcs11.so'.
Alternatively the configuration file /etc/gnutls/pkcs11.conf has to exist and contain a number
of lines of the form 'load=/usr/lib/opensc-pkcs11.so'.

You can provide the PIN to be used for the PKCS #11 operations with the environment variables
GNUTLS_PIN and GNUTLS_SO_PIN.


Please send bug reports to:  <bugs@gnutls.org>

token-related-options options

Tokens.

list-token-urls option.

This is the “list the urls available tokens” option. This is a more compact version of –list-tokens.

initialize-so-pin option.

This is the “initializes/resets a pkcs #11 token security officer pin” option. This initializes the security officer’s PIN. When used non-interactively use the GNUTLS_NEW_SO_PIN environment variables to initialize SO’s PIN.

set-pin option.

This is the “specify the pin to use on token operations” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Alternatively the GNUTLS_PIN environment variable may be used.

set-so-pin option.

This is the “specify the security officer’s pin to use on token initialization” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Alternatively the GNUTLS_SO_PIN environment variable may be used.

object-list-related-options options

Object listing.

list-all option.

This is the “list all available objects in a token” option. All objects available in the token will be listed. That includes objects which are potentially unaccessible using this tool.

list-all-certs option.

This is the “list all available certificates in a token” option. That option will also provide more information on the certificates, for example, expand the attached extensions in a trust token (like p11-kit-trust).

list-certs option.

This is the “list all certificates that have an associated private key” option. That option will only display certificates which have a private key associated with them (share the same ID).

list-all-privkeys option.

This is the “list all available private keys in a token” option. Lists all the private keys in a token that match the specified URL.

list-privkeys option.

This is an alias for the list-all-privkeys option, see the list-all-privkeys option documentation.

list-keys option.

This is an alias for the list-all-privkeys option, see the list-all-privkeys option documentation.

export-stapled option.

This is the “export the certificate object specified by the url” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Exports the certificate specified by the URL while including any attached extensions to it. Since attached extensions are a p11-kit extension, this option is only available on p11-kit registered trust modules.

export-chain option.

This is the “export the certificate specified by the url and its chain of trust” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Exports the certificate specified by the URL and generates its chain of trust based on the stored certificates in the module.

export-pubkey option.

This is the “export the public key for a private key” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Exports the public key for the specified private key

trusted option.

This is an alias for the mark-trusted option, see the mark-trusted option documentation.

distrusted option.

This is an alias for the mark-distrusted option, see the mark-distrusted option documentation.

keygen-related-options options

Key generation.

generate-privkey option.

This is the “generate private-public key pair of given type” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Generates a private-public key pair in the specified token. Acceptable types are RSA, ECDSA, Ed25519, and DSA. Should be combined with –sec-param or –bits.

generate-rsa option.

This is the “generate an rsa private-public key pair” option. Generates an RSA private-public key pair on the specified token. Should be combined with –sec-param or –bits.

NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED

generate-dsa option.

This is the “generate a dsa private-public key pair” option. Generates a DSA private-public key pair on the specified token. Should be combined with –sec-param or –bits.

NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED

generate-ecc option.

This is the “generate an ecdsa private-public key pair” option. Generates an ECDSA private-public key pair on the specified token. Should be combined with –curve, –sec-param or –bits.

NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED

bits option.

This is the “specify the number of bits for the key generate” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. For applications which have no key-size restrictions the –sec-param option is recommended, as the sec-param levels will adapt to the acceptable security levels with the new versions of gnutls.

curve option.

This is the “specify the curve used for ec key generation” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Supported values are secp192r1, secp224r1, secp256r1, secp384r1 and secp521r1.

sec-param option.

This is the “specify the security level” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument Security parameter. This is alternative to the bits option. Available options are [low, legacy, medium, high, ultra].

write-object-related-options options

Writing objects.

set-id option.

This is the “set the cka_id (in hex) for the specified by the url object” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Modifies or sets the CKA_ID in the specified by the URL object. The ID should be specified in hexadecimal format without a ’0x’ prefix.

set-label option.

This is the “set the cka_label for the specified by the url object” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Modifies or sets the CKA_LABEL in the specified by the URL object

write option.

This is the “writes the loaded objects to a pkcs #11 token” option. It can be used to write private, public keys, certificates or secret keys to a token. Must be combined with one of –load-privkey, –load-pubkey, –load-certificate option.

When writing a certificate object, its CKA_ID is set to the same CKA_ID of the corresponding public key, if it exists on the token; otherwise it will be derived from the X.509 Subject Key Identifier of the certificate. If this behavior is undesired, write the public key to the token beforehand.

id option.

This is the “sets an id for the write operation” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Sets the CKA_ID to be set by the write operation. The ID should be specified in hexadecimal format without a ’0x’ prefix.

mark-wrap option.

This is the “marks the generated key to be a wrapping key” option. Marks the generated key with the CKA_WRAP flag.

mark-trusted option.

This is the “marks the object to be written as trusted” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Marks the object to be generated/written with the CKA_TRUST flag.

mark-distrusted option.

This is the “when retrieving objects, it requires the objects to be distrusted” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Ensures that the objects retrieved have the CKA_X_TRUST flag. This is p11-kit trust module extension, thus this flag is only valid with p11-kit registered trust modules.

mark-decrypt option.

This is the “marks the object to be written for decryption” option. Marks the object to be generated/written with the CKA_DECRYPT flag set to true.

mark-sign option.

This is the “marks the object to be written for signature generation” option. Marks the object to be generated/written with the CKA_SIGN flag set to true.

mark-ca option.

This is the “marks the object to be written as a ca” option. Marks the object to be generated/written with the CKA_CERTIFICATE_CATEGORY as CA.

mark-private option.

This is the “marks the object to be written as private” option. Marks the object to be generated/written with the CKA_PRIVATE flag. The written object will require a PIN to be used.

ca option.

This is an alias for the mark-ca option, see the mark-ca option documentation.

private option.

This is an alias for the mark-private option, see the mark-private option documentation.

mark-always-authenticate option.

This is the “marks the object to be written as always authenticate” option. Marks the object to be generated/written with the CKA_ALWAYS_AUTHENTICATE flag. The written object will Mark the object as requiring authentication (pin entry) before every operation.

secret-key option.

This is the “provide a hex encoded secret key” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This secret key will be written to the module if –write is specified.

other-options options

Other options.

debug option (-d).

This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.

so-login option.

This is the “force security officer login to token” option. Forces login to the token as security officer (admin).

admin-login option.

This is an alias for the so-login option, see the so-login option documentation.

test-sign option.

This is the “tests the signature operation of the provided object” option. It can be used to test the correct operation of the signature operation. If both a private and a public key are available this operation will sign and verify the signed data.

sign-params option.

This is the “sign with a specific signature algorithm” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be combined with –test-sign, to sign with a specific signature algorithm variant. The only option supported is ’RSA-PSS’, and should be specified in order to use RSA-PSS signature on RSA keys.

hash option.

This is the “hash algorithm to use for signing” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be combined with test-sign. Available hash functions are SHA1, RMD160, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512, SHA3-224, SHA3-256, SHA3-384, SHA3-512.

generate-random option.

This is the “generate random data” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Asks the token to generate a number of bytes of random bytes.

inder option.

This is the “use der/raw format for input” option. Use DER/RAW format for input certificates and private keys.

inraw option.

This is an alias for the inder option, see the inder option documentation.

outder option.

This is the “use der format for output certificates, private keys, and dh parameters” option. The output will be in DER or RAW format.

outraw option.

This is an alias for the outder option, see the outder option documentation.

provider option.

This is the “specify the pkcs #11 provider library” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.FILE argument. This will override the default options in /etc/gnutls/pkcs11.conf

provider-opts option.

This is the “specify parameters for the pkcs #11 provider library” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This is a PKCS#11 internal option used by few modules. Mainly for testing PKCS#11 modules.

NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED

batch option.

This is the “disable all interaction with the tool” option. In batch mode there will be no prompts, all parameters need to be specified on command line.

version option (-v).

This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.

help option (-h).

This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.

more-help option (-!).

This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.

p11tool exit status

One of the following exit values will be returned:

0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

Successful program execution.

1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

p11tool See Also

certtool (1)

p11tool Examples

To view all tokens in your system use:

$ p11tool --list-tokens

To view all objects in a token use:

$ p11tool --login --list-all "pkcs11:TOKEN-URL"

To store a private key and a certificate in a token run:

$ p11tool --login --write "pkcs11:URL" --load-privkey key.pem \
          --label "Mykey"
$ p11tool --login --write "pkcs11:URL" --load-certificate cert.pem \
          --label "Mykey"

Note that some tokens require the same label to be used for the certificate and its corresponding private key.

To generate an RSA private key inside the token use:

$ p11tool --login --generate-privkey rsa --bits 1024 --label "MyNewKey" \
          --outfile MyNewKey.pub "pkcs11:TOKEN-URL"

The bits parameter in the above example is explicitly set because some tokens only support limited choices in the bit length. The output file is the corresponding public key. This key can be used to general a certificate request with certtool.

certtool --generate-request --load-privkey "pkcs11:KEY-URL" \
   --load-pubkey MyNewKey.pub --outfile request.pem

Previous: , Up: Hardware security modules and abstract key types   [Contents][Index]

5.4 Trusted Platform Module (TPM)

In this section we present the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) support in GnuTLS. Note that we recommend against using TPM with this API because it is restricted to TPM 1.2. We recommend instead to use PKCS#11 wrappers for TPM such as CHAPS14 or opencryptoki15. These will allow using the standard smart card and HSM functionality (see Smart cards and HSMs) for TPM keys.

There was a big hype when the TPM chip was introduced into computers. Briefly it is a co-processor in your PC that allows it to perform calculations independently of the main processor. This has good and bad side-effects. In this section we focus on the good ones; these are the fact that you can use the TPM chip to perform cryptographic operations on keys stored in it, without accessing them. That is very similar to the operation of a PKCS #11 smart card. The chip allows for storage and usage of RSA keys, but has quite some operational differences from PKCS #11 module, and thus require different handling. The basic TPM operations supported and used by GnuTLS, are key generation and signing. That support is currently limited to TPM 1.2.

The next sections assume that the TPM chip in the system is already initialized and in a operational state. If not, ensure that the TPM chip is enabled by your BIOS, that the tcsd daemon is running, and that TPM ownership is set (by running tpm_takeownership).

In GnuTLS the TPM functionality is available in gnutls/tpm.h.


Next: , Up: Trusted Platform Module   [Contents][Index]

5.4.1 Keys in TPM

The RSA keys in the TPM module may either be stored in a flash memory within TPM or stored in a file in disk. In the former case the key can provide operations as with PKCS #11 and is identified by a URL. The URL is described in [TPMURI] and is of the following form.

tpmkey:uuid=42309df8-d101-11e1-a89a-97bb33c23ad1;storage=user

It consists from a unique identifier of the key as well as the part of the flash memory the key is stored at. The two options for the storage field are ‘user’ and ‘system’. The user keys are typically only available to the generating user and the system keys to all users. The stored in TPM keys are called registered keys.

The keys that are stored in the disk are exported from the TPM but in an encrypted form. To access them two passwords are required. The first is the TPM Storage Root Key (SRK), and the other is a key-specific password. Also those keys are identified by a URL of the form:

tpmkey:file=/path/to/file

When objects require a PIN to be accessed the same callbacks as with PKCS #11 objects are expected (see Accessing objects that require a PIN). Note that the PIN function may be called multiple times to unlock the SRK and the specific key in use. The label in the key function will then be set to ‘SRK’ when unlocking the SRK key, or to ‘TPM’ when unlocking any other key.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Trusted Platform Module   [Contents][Index]

5.4.2 Key generation

All keys used by the TPM must be generated by the TPM. This can be done using gnutls_tpm_privkey_generate.

Function: int gnutls_tpm_privkey_generate (gnutls_pk_algorithm_t pk, unsigned int bits, const char * srk_password, const char * key_password, gnutls_tpmkey_fmt_t format, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t pub_format, gnutls_datum_t * privkey, gnutls_datum_t * pubkey, unsigned int flags)

pk: the public key algorithm

bits: the security bits

srk_password: a password to protect the exported key (optional)

key_password: the password for the TPM (optional)

format: the format of the private key

pub_format: the format of the public key

privkey: the generated key

pubkey: the corresponding public key (may be null)

flags: should be a list of GNUTLS_TPM_* flags

This function will generate a private key in the TPM chip. The private key will be generated within the chip and will be exported in a wrapped with TPM’s master key form. Furthermore the wrapped key can be protected with the provided password .

Note that bits in TPM is quantized value. If the input value is not one of the allowed values, then it will be quantized to one of 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192 and 16384.

Allowed flags are:

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.1.0

int gnutls_tpm_get_registered (gnutls_tpm_key_list_t * list)
void gnutls_tpm_key_list_deinit (gnutls_tpm_key_list_t list)
int gnutls_tpm_key_list_get_url (gnutls_tpm_key_list_t list, unsigned int idx, char ** url, unsigned int flags)
Function: int gnutls_tpm_privkey_delete (const char * url, const char * srk_password)

url: the URL describing the key

srk_password: a password for the SRK key

This function will unregister the private key from the TPM chip.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.1.0


Next: , Previous: , Up: Trusted Platform Module   [Contents][Index]

5.4.3 Using keys

Importing keys

The TPM keys can be used directly by the abstract key types and do not require any special structures. Moreover functions like gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2 can access TPM URLs.

int gnutls_privkey_import_tpm_raw (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, const gnutls_datum_t * fdata, gnutls_tpmkey_fmt_t format, const char * srk_password, const char * key_password, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_import_tpm_raw (gnutls_pubkey_t pkey, const gnutls_datum_t * fdata, gnutls_tpmkey_fmt_t format, const char * srk_password, unsigned int flags)
Function: int gnutls_privkey_import_tpm_url (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, const char * url, const char * srk_password, const char * key_password, unsigned int flags)

pkey: The private key

url: The URL of the TPM key to be imported

srk_password: The password for the SRK key (optional)

key_password: A password for the key (optional)

flags: One of the GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_* flags

This function will import the given private key to the abstract gnutls_privkey_t type.

Note that unless GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_DISABLE_CALLBACKS is specified, if incorrect (or NULL) passwords are given the PKCS11 callback functions will be used to obtain the correct passwords. Otherwise if the SRK password is wrong GNUTLS_E_TPM_SRK_PASSWORD_ERROR is returned and if the key password is wrong or not provided then GNUTLS_E_TPM_KEY_PASSWORD_ERROR is returned.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.1.0

Function: int gnutls_pubkey_import_tpm_url (gnutls_pubkey_t pkey, const char * url, const char * srk_password, unsigned int flags)

pkey: The public key

url: The URL of the TPM key to be imported

srk_password: The password for the SRK key (optional)

flags: should be zero

This function will import the given private key to the abstract gnutls_privkey_t type.

Note that unless GNUTLS_PUBKEY_DISABLE_CALLBACKS is specified, if incorrect (or NULL) passwords are given the PKCS11 callback functions will be used to obtain the correct passwords. Otherwise if the SRK password is wrong GNUTLS_E_TPM_SRK_PASSWORD_ERROR is returned.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.1.0

Listing and deleting keys

The registered keys (that are stored in the TPM) can be listed using one of the following functions. Those keys are unfortunately only identified by their UUID and have no label or other human friendly identifier. Keys can be deleted from permanent storage using gnutls_tpm_privkey_delete.

int gnutls_tpm_get_registered (gnutls_tpm_key_list_t * list)
void gnutls_tpm_key_list_deinit (gnutls_tpm_key_list_t list)
int gnutls_tpm_key_list_get_url (gnutls_tpm_key_list_t list, unsigned int idx, char ** url, unsigned int flags)
Function: int gnutls_tpm_privkey_delete (const char * url, const char * srk_password)

url: the URL describing the key

srk_password: a password for the SRK key

This function will unregister the private key from the TPM chip.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.1.0


Previous: , Up: Trusted Platform Module   [Contents][Index]

5.4.4 Invoking tpmtool

Program that allows handling cryptographic data from the TPM chip.

tpmtool help/usage (-?)

The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option (--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. more-help is disabled on platforms without a working fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

tpmtool - GnuTLS TPM tool
Usage:  tpmtool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... 

None:

   -d, --debug=num            Enable debugging
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 9999
       --infile=file          Input file
				- file must pre-exist
       --outfile=str          Output file
       --generate-rsa         Generate an RSA private-public key pair
       --register             Any generated key will be registered in the TPM
				- requires the option 'generate-rsa'
       --signing              Any generated key will be a signing key
				- prohibits the option 'legacy'
				- requires the option 'generate-rsa'
       --legacy               Any generated key will be a legacy key
				- prohibits the option 'signing'
				- requires the option 'generate-rsa'
       --user                 Any registered key will be a user key
				- prohibits the option 'system'
				- requires the option 'register'
       --system               Any registered key will be a system key
				- prohibits the option 'user'
				- requires the option 'register'
       --pubkey=str           Prints the public key of the provided key
       --list                 Lists all stored keys in the TPM
       --delete=str           Delete the key identified by the given URL (UUID)
       --test-sign=str        Tests the signature operation of the provided object
       --sec-param=str        Specify the security level [low, legacy, medium, high, ultra]
       --bits=num             Specify the number of bits for key generate
       --inder                Use the DER format for keys
       --outder               Use DER format for output keys
       --srk-well-known       SRK has well known password (20 bytes of zeros)

Version, usage and configuration options:

   -v, --version[=arg]        output version information and exit
   -h, --help                 display extended usage information and exit
   -!, --more-help            extended usage information passed thru pager

Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
hyphen and the flag character.

Program that allows handling cryptographic data from the TPM chip.

Please send bug reports to:  <bugs@gnutls.org>

debug option (-d).

This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.

generate-rsa option.

This is the “generate an rsa private-public key pair” option. Generates an RSA private-public key pair in the TPM chip. The key may be stored in file system and protected by a PIN, or stored (registered) in the TPM chip flash.

user option.

This is the “any registered key will be a user key” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

The generated key will be stored in a user specific persistent storage.

system option.

This is the “any registered key will be a system key” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

The generated key will be stored in system persistent storage.

test-sign option.

This is the “tests the signature operation of the provided object” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument url. It can be used to test the correct operation of the signature operation. This operation will sign and verify the signed data.

sec-param option.

This is the “specify the security level [low, legacy, medium, high, ultra]” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument Security parameter. This is alternative to the bits option. Note however that the values allowed by the TPM chip are quantized and given values may be rounded up.

inder option.

This is the “use the der format for keys” option. The input files will be assumed to be in the portable DER format of TPM. The default format is a custom format used by various TPM tools

outder option.

This is the “use der format for output keys” option. The output will be in the TPM portable DER format.

version option (-v).

This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.

help option (-h).

This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.

more-help option (-!).

This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.

tpmtool exit status

One of the following exit values will be returned:

0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

Successful program execution.

1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

tpmtool See Also

p11tool (1), certtool (1)

tpmtool Examples

To generate a key that is to be stored in file system use:

$ tpmtool --generate-rsa --bits 2048 --outfile tpmkey.pem

To generate a key that is to be stored in TPM’s flash use:

$ tpmtool --generate-rsa --bits 2048 --register --user

To get the public key of a TPM key use:

$ tpmtool --pubkey tpmkey:uuid=58ad734b-bde6-45c7-89d8-756a55ad1891;storage=user \
          --outfile pubkey.pem

or if the key is stored in the file system:

$ tpmtool --pubkey tpmkey:file=tmpkey.pem --outfile pubkey.pem

To list all keys stored in TPM use:

$ tpmtool --list

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

6 How to use GnuTLS in applications


Next: , Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications   [Contents][Index]

6.1 Introduction

This chapter tries to explain the basic functionality of the current GnuTLS library. Note that there may be additional functionality not discussed here but included in the library. Checking the header files in /usr/include/gnutls/ and the manpages is recommended.


Next: , Up: Introduction to the library   [Contents][Index]

6.1.1 General idea

A brief description of how GnuTLS sessions operate is shown at Figure 6.1. This section will become more clear when it is completely read. As shown in the figure, there is a read-only global state that is initialized once by the global initialization function. This global structure, among others, contains the memory allocation functions used, structures needed for the ASN.1 parser and depending on the system’s CPU, pointers to hardware accelerated encryption functions. This structure is never modified by any GnuTLS function, except for the deinitialization function which frees all allocated memory and must be called after the program has permanently finished using GnuTLS.

gnutls-internals

Figure 6.1: High level design of GnuTLS.

The credentials structures are used by the authentication methods, such as certificate authentication. They store certificates, privates keys, and other information that is needed to prove the identity to the peer, and/or verify the identity of the peer. The information stored in the credentials structures is initialized once and then can be shared by many TLS sessions.

A GnuTLS session contains all the required state and information to handle one secure connection. The session communicates with the peers using the provided functions of the transport layer. Every session has a unique session ID shared with the peer.

Since TLS sessions can be resumed, servers need a database back-end to hold the session’s parameters. Every GnuTLS session after a successful handshake calls the appropriate back-end function (see resume) to store the newly negotiated session. The session database is examined by the server just after having received the client hello16, and if the session ID sent by the client, matches a stored session, the stored session will be retrieved, and the new session will be a resumed one, and will share the same session ID with the previous one.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to the library   [Contents][Index]

6.1.2 Error handling

There two types of GnuTLS functions. The first type returns a boolean value, true (non-zero) or false (zero) value; these functions are defined to return an unsigned integer type. The other type returns a signed integer type with zero (or a positive number) indicating success and a negative value indicating failure. For the latter type it is recommended to check for errors as following.

    ret = gnutls_function();
    if (ret < 0) {
        return -1;
    }

The above example checks for a failure condition rather than for explicit success (e.g., equality to zero). That has the advantage that future extensions of the API can be extended to provide additional information via positive returned values (see for example gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file).

In GnuTLS, many objects are represented as opaque types that are initialized by passing an address to storage of that type to a pointer parameter of a function name gnutls_obj_init, and which have a counterpart function gnutls_obj_deinit. It is safe, but not mandatory, to pre-initialize the opaque storage to contain all zeroes (such as by using calloc() or memset()). If the initializer succeeds, the storage must be passed to the counterpart deinitializer when the object is no longer in use to avoid memory leaks. As of version 3.8.0, if the initializer function fails, it is safe, but not mandatory, to call the counterpart deinitializer, regardless of whether the storage was pre-initialized. However, this was not guaranteed in earlier versions; for maximum portability to older library versions, callers should either pre-initialize the storage to zero before initialization or refrain from calling the deinitializer if the initializer fails.

For certain operations such as TLS handshake and TLS packet receive there is the notion of fatal and non-fatal error codes. Fatal errors terminate the TLS session immediately and further sends and receives will be disallowed. Such an example is GNUTLS_E_DECRYPTION_FAILED. Non-fatal errors may warn about something, i.e., a warning alert was received, or indicate the some action has to be taken. This is the case with the error code GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE returned by gnutls_record_recv. This error code indicates that the server requests a re-handshake. The client may ignore this request, or may reply with an alert. You can test if an error code is a fatal one by using the gnutls_error_is_fatal. All errors can be converted to a descriptive string using gnutls_strerror.

If any non fatal errors, that require an action, are to be returned by a function, these error codes will be documented in the function’s reference. For example the error codes GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED and GNUTLS_E_FATAL_ALERT_RECEIVED that may returned when receiving data, should be handled by notifying the user of the alert (as explained in Handling alerts). See Error codes, for a description of the available error codes.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to the library   [Contents][Index]

6.1.3 Common types

All strings that are to provided as input to GnuTLS functions should be in UTF-8 unless otherwise specified. Output strings are also in UTF-8 format unless otherwise specified. When functions take as input passwords, they will normalize them using [RFC7613] rules (since GnuTLS 3.5.7).

When data of a fixed size are provided to GnuTLS functions then the helper structure gnutls_datum_t is often used. Its definition is shown below.

  typedef struct
  {
    unsigned char *data;
    unsigned int size;
  } gnutls_datum_t;

In functions where this structure is a returned type, if the function succeeds, it is expected from the caller to use gnutls_free() to deinitialize the data element after use, unless otherwise specified. If the function fails, the contents of the gnutls_datum_t should be considered undefined and must not be deinitialized.

Other functions that require data for scattered read use a structure similar to struct iovec typically used by readv. It is shown below.

  typedef struct
  {
    void *iov_base;             /* Starting address */
    size_t iov_len;             /* Number of bytes to transfer */
  } giovec_t;

Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to the library   [Contents][Index]

6.1.4 Debugging and auditing

In many cases things may not go as expected and further information, to assist debugging, from GnuTLS is desired. Those are the cases where the gnutls_global_set_log_level and gnutls_global_set_log_function are to be used. Those will print verbose information on the GnuTLS functions internal flow.

void gnutls_global_set_log_level (int level)
void gnutls_global_set_log_function (gnutls_log_func log_func)

Alternatively the environment variable GNUTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL can be set to a logging level and GnuTLS will output debugging output to standard error. Other available environment variables are shown in Table 6.1.

VariablePurpose
GNUTLS_DEBUG_LEVELWhen set to a numeric value, it sets the default debugging level for GnuTLS applications.
SSLKEYLOGFILEWhen set to a filename, GnuTLS will append to it the session keys in the NSS Key Log format. That format can be read by wireshark and will allow decryption of the session for debugging.
GNUTLS_CPUID_OVERRIDEThat environment variable can be used to explicitly enable/disable the use of certain CPU capabilities. Note that CPU detection cannot be overridden, i.e., VIA options cannot be enabled on an Intel CPU. The currently available options are:
  • 0x1: Disable all run-time detected optimizations
  • 0x2: Enable AES-NI
  • 0x4: Enable SSSE3
  • 0x8: Enable PCLMUL
  • 0x10: Enable AVX
  • 0x20: Enable SHA_NI
  • 0x100000: Enable VIA padlock
  • 0x200000: Enable VIA PHE
  • 0x400000: Enable VIA PHE SHA512
GNUTLS_FORCE_FIPS_MODEIn setups where GnuTLS is compiled with support for FIPS140-2 (see FIPS140-2 mode) if set to one it will force the FIPS mode enablement.

Table 6.1: Environment variables used by the library.

When debugging is not required, important issues, such as detected attacks on the protocol still need to be logged. This is provided by the logging function set by gnutls_global_set_audit_log_function. The provided function will receive an message and the corresponding TLS session. The session information might be used to derive IP addresses or other information about the peer involved.

Function: void gnutls_global_set_audit_log_function (gnutls_audit_log_func log_func)

log_func: it is the audit log function

This is the function to set the audit logging function. This is a function to report important issues, such as possible attacks in the protocol. This is different from gnutls_global_set_log_function() because it will report also session-specific events. The session parameter will be null if there is no corresponding TLS session.

gnutls_audit_log_func is of the form, void (*gnutls_audit_log_func)( gnutls_session_t, const char*);

Since: 3.0


Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to the library   [Contents][Index]

6.1.5 Thread safety

The GnuTLS library is thread safe by design, meaning that objects of the library such as TLS sessions, can be safely divided across threads as long as a single thread accesses a single object. This is sufficient to support a server which handles several sessions per thread. Read-only access to objects, for example the credentials holding structures, is also thread-safe.

A gnutls_session_t object could also be shared by two threads, one sending, the other receiving. However, care must be taken on the following use cases:

For several aspects of the library (e.g., the random generator, PKCS#11 operations), the library may utilize mutex locks (e.g., pthreads on GNU/Linux and CriticalSection on Windows) which are transparently setup on library initialization. Prior to version 3.3.0 these were setup by explicitly calling gnutls_global_init.17

Note that, on Glibc systems, unless the application is explicitly linked with the libpthread library, no mutex locks are used and setup by GnuTLS. It will use the Glibc mutex stubs.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to the library   [Contents][Index]

6.1.6 Running in a sandbox

Given that TLS protocol handling as well as X.509 certificate parsing are complicated processes involving several thousands lines of code, it is often desirable (and recommended) to run the TLS session handling in a sandbox like seccomp. That has to be allowed by the overall software design, but if available, it adds an additional layer of protection by preventing parsing errors from becoming vessels for further security issues such as code execution.

GnuTLS requires the following system calls to be available for its proper operation.

As well as any calls needed for memory allocation to work. Note however, that GnuTLS depends on libc for the system calls, and there is no guarantee that libc will call the expected system call. For that it is recommended to test your program in all the targeted platforms when filters like seccomp are in place.

An example with a seccomp filter from GnuTLS’ test suite is at: https://gitlab.com/gnutls/gnutls/blob/master/tests/seccomp.c.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Introduction to the library   [Contents][Index]

6.1.7 Sessions and fork

A gnutls_session_t object can be shared by two processes after a fork, one sending, the other receiving. In that case rehandshakes, cannot and must not be performed. As with threads, the termination of a session should be handled by the sender process using gnutls_bye with GNUTLS_SHUT_WR and the receiving process waiting for a return value of zero.


Previous: , Up: Introduction to the library   [Contents][Index]

6.1.8 Callback functions

There are several cases where GnuTLS may need out of band input from your program. This is now implemented using some callback functions, which your program is expected to register.

An example of this type of functions are the push and pull callbacks which are used to specify the functions that will retrieve and send data to the transport layer.

void gnutls_transport_set_push_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_push_func push_func)
void gnutls_transport_set_pull_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_pull_func pull_func)

Other callback functions may require more complicated input and data to be allocated. Such an example is gnutls_srp_set_server_credentials_function. All callbacks should allocate and free memory using gnutls_malloc and gnutls_free.


Next: , Previous: , Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications   [Contents][Index]

6.2 Preparation

To use GnuTLS, you have to perform some changes to your sources and your build system. The necessary changes are explained in the following subsections.


Next: , Up: Preparation   [Contents][Index]

6.2.1 Headers

All the data types and functions of the GnuTLS library are defined in the header file gnutls/gnutls.h. This must be included in all programs that make use of the GnuTLS library.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Preparation   [Contents][Index]

6.2.2 Initialization

The GnuTLS library is initialized on load; prior to 3.3.0 was initialized by calling gnutls_global_init18. gnutls_global_init in versions after 3.3.0 is thread-safe (see Thread safety).

The initialization typically enables CPU-specific acceleration, performs any required precalculations needed, opens any required system devices (e.g., /dev/urandom on Linux) and initializes subsystems that could be used later.

The resources allocated by the initialization process will be released on library deinitialization.

Note that on certain systems file descriptors may be kept open by GnuTLS (e.g. /dev/urandom) on library load. Applications closing all unknown file descriptors must immediately call gnutls_global_init, after that, to ensure they don’t disrupt GnuTLS’ operation.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Preparation   [Contents][Index]

6.2.3 Version check

It is often desirable to check that the version of ‘gnutls’ used is indeed one which fits all requirements. Even with binary compatibility new features may have been introduced but due to problem with the dynamic linker an old version is actually used. So you may want to check that the version is okay right after program start-up. See the function gnutls_check_version.

On the other hand, it is often desirable to support more than one versions of the library. In that case you could utilize compile-time feature checks using the GNUTLS_VERSION_NUMBER macro. For example, to conditionally add code for GnuTLS 3.2.1 or later, you may use:

#if GNUTLS_VERSION_NUMBER >= 0x030201
 ...
#endif

Previous: , Up: Preparation   [Contents][Index]

6.2.4 Building the source

If you want to compile a source file including the gnutls/gnutls.h header file, you must make sure that the compiler can find it in the directory hierarchy. This is accomplished by adding the path to the directory in which the header file is located to the compilers include file search path (via the -I option).

However, the path to the include file is determined at the time the source is configured. To solve this problem, the library uses the external package pkg-config that knows the path to the include file and other configuration options. The options that need to be added to the compiler invocation at compile time are output by the --cflags option to pkg-config gnutls. The following example shows how it can be used at the command line:

gcc -c foo.c `pkg-config gnutls --cflags`

Adding the output of ‘pkg-config gnutls --cflags’ to the compilers command line will ensure that the compiler can find the gnutls/gnutls.h header file.

A similar problem occurs when linking the program with the library. Again, the compiler has to find the library files. For this to work, the path to the library files has to be added to the library search path (via the -L option). For this, the option --libs to pkg-config gnutls can be used. For convenience, this option also outputs all other options that are required to link the program with the library (for instance, the ‘-ltasn1’ option). The example shows how to link foo.o with the library to a program foo.

gcc -o foo foo.o `pkg-config gnutls --libs`

Of course you can also combine both examples to a single command by specifying both options to pkg-config:

gcc -o foo foo.c `pkg-config gnutls --cflags --libs`

When a program uses the GNU autoconf system, then the following line or similar can be used to detect the presence of GnuTLS.

PKG_CHECK_MODULES([LIBGNUTLS], [gnutls >= 3.3.0])

AC_SUBST([LIBGNUTLS_CFLAGS])
AC_SUBST([LIBGNUTLS_LIBS])

Next: , Previous: , Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications   [Contents][Index]

6.3 Session initialization

In the previous sections we have discussed the global initialization required for GnuTLS as well as the initialization required for each authentication method’s credentials (see Authentication). In this section we elaborate on the TLS or DTLS session initiation. Each session is initialized using gnutls_init which among others is used to specify the type of the connection (server or client), and the underlying protocol type, i.e., datagram (UDP) or reliable (TCP).

Function: int gnutls_init (gnutls_session_t * session, unsigned int flags)

session: is a pointer to a gnutls_session_t type.

flags: indicate if this session is to be used for server or client.

This function initializes the provided session. Every session must be initialized before use, and after successful initialization and use must be deinitialized by calling gnutls_deinit() .

flags can be any combination of flags from gnutls_init_flags_t .

Note that since version 3.1.2 this function enables some common TLS extensions such as session tickets and OCSP certificate status request in client side by default. To prevent that use the GNUTLS_NO_DEFAULT_EXTENSIONS flag.

Note that it is never mandatory to use gnutls_deinit() after this function fails. Since gnutls 3.8.0, it is safe to unconditionally use gnutls_deinit() even after failure regardless of whether the memory was initialized prior to gnutls_init() ; however, clients wanting to be portable to older versions of the library should either skip deinitialization on failure, or pre-initialize the memory passed in to gnutls_init() to all zeroes via memset() or similar.

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS on success, or an error code.

GNUTLS_SERVER

Connection end is a server.

GNUTLS_CLIENT

Connection end is a client.

GNUTLS_DATAGRAM

Connection is datagram oriented (DTLS). Since 3.0.0.

GNUTLS_NONBLOCK

Connection should not block. Since 3.0.0.

GNUTLS_NO_DEFAULT_EXTENSIONS

Do not enable any TLS extensions by default such as session tickets and OCSP certificate status request (since 3.1.2). As TLS 1.2 and later require extensions this option is considered obsolete and should not be used.

GNUTLS_NO_REPLAY_PROTECTION

Disable any replay protection in DTLS. This must only be used if replay protection is achieved using other means. Since 3.2.2.

GNUTLS_NO_SIGNAL

In systems where SIGPIPE is delivered on send, it will be disabled. That flag has effect in systems which support the MSG_NOSIGNAL sockets flag (since 3.4.2).

GNUTLS_ALLOW_ID_CHANGE

Allow the peer to replace its certificate, or change its ID during a rehandshake. This change is often used in attacks and thus prohibited by default. Since 3.5.0.

GNUTLS_ENABLE_FALSE_START

Enable the TLS false start on client side if the negotiated ciphersuites allow it. This will enable sending data prior to the handshake being complete, and may introduce a risk of crypto failure when combined with certain key exchanged; for that GnuTLS may not enable that option in ciphersuites that are known to be not safe for false start. Since 3.5.0.

GNUTLS_FORCE_CLIENT_CERT

When in client side and only a single cert is specified, send that certificate irrespective of the issuers expected by the server. Since 3.5.0.

GNUTLS_NO_TICKETS

Flag to indicate that the session should not use resumption with session tickets.

GNUTLS_KEY_SHARE_TOP

Generate key share for the first group which is enabled. For example x25519. This option is the most performant for client (less CPU spent generating keys), but if the server doesn’t support the advertised option it may result to more roundtrips needed to discover the server’s choice.

GNUTLS_KEY_SHARE_TOP2

Generate key shares for the top-2 different groups which are enabled. For example (ECDH + x25519). This is the default.

GNUTLS_KEY_SHARE_TOP3

Generate key shares for the top-3 different groups which are enabled. That is, as each group is associated with a key type (EC, finite field, x25519), generate three keys using GNUTLS_PK_DH , GNUTLS_PK_EC , GNUTLS_PK_ECDH_X25519 if all of them are enabled.

GNUTLS_POST_HANDSHAKE_AUTH

Enable post handshake authentication for server and client. When set and a server requests authentication after handshake GNUTLS_E_REAUTH_REQUEST will be returned by gnutls_record_recv() . A client should then call gnutls_reauth() to re-authenticate.

GNUTLS_NO_AUTO_REKEY

Disable auto-rekeying under TLS1.3. If this option is not specified gnutls will force a rekey after 2^24 records have been sent.

GNUTLS_SAFE_PADDING_CHECK

Flag to indicate that the TLS 1.3 padding check will be done in a safe way which doesn’t leak the pad size based on GnuTLS processing time. This is of use to applications which hide the length of transferred data via the TLS1.3 padding mechanism and are already taking steps to hide the data processing time. This comes at a performance penalty.

GNUTLS_ENABLE_EARLY_START

Under TLS1.3 allow the server to return earlier than the full handshake finish; similarly to false start the handshake will be completed once data are received by the client, while the server is able to transmit sooner. This is not enabled by default as it could break certain existing server assumptions and use-cases. Since 3.6.4.

GNUTLS_ENABLE_RAWPK

Allows raw public-keys to be negotiated during the handshake. Since 3.6.6.

GNUTLS_AUTO_REAUTH

Enable transparent re-authentication in client side when the server requests to. That is, reauthentication is handled within gnutls_record_recv() , and the GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE or GNUTLS_E_REAUTH_REQUEST are not returned. This must be enabled with GNUTLS_POST_HANDSHAKE_AUTH for TLS1.3. Enabling this flag requires to restore interrupted calls to gnutls_record_recv() based on the output of gnutls_record_get_direction() , since gnutls_record_recv() could be interrupted when sending when this flag is enabled. Note this flag may not be used if you are using the same session for sending and receiving in different threads.

GNUTLS_ENABLE_EARLY_DATA

Under TLS1.3 allow the server to receive early data sent as part of the initial ClientHello (0-RTT). This can also be used to explicitly indicate that the client will send early data. This is not enabled by default as early data has weaker security properties than other data. Since 3.6.5.

GNUTLS_NO_AUTO_SEND_TICKET

Under TLS1.3 disable auto-sending of session tickets during the handshake.

GNUTLS_NO_END_OF_EARLY_DATA

Under TLS1.3 suppress sending EndOfEarlyData message. Since 3.7.2.

GNUTLS_NO_TICKETS_TLS12

Flag to indicate that the session should not use resumption with session tickets. This flag only has effect if TLS 1.2 is used.

GNUTLS_NO_STATUS_REQUEST

Prevents client from including the "status_request" TLS extension in the client hello, thus disabling the receival of certificate status information. Since 3.8.0.

Figure 6.2: The gnutls_init_flags_t enumeration.

After the session initialization details on the allowed ciphersuites and protocol versions should be set using the priority functions such as gnutls_priority_set and gnutls_priority_set_direct. We elaborate on them in Priority Strings. The credentials used for the key exchange method, such as certificates or usernames and passwords should also be associated with the session current session using gnutls_credentials_set.

Function: int gnutls_credentials_set (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_credentials_type_t type, void * cred)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

type: is the type of the credentials

cred: the credentials to set

Sets the needed credentials for the specified type. E.g. username, password - or public and private keys etc. The cred parameter is a structure that depends on the specified type and on the current session (client or server).

In order to minimize memory usage, and share credentials between several threads gnutls keeps a pointer to cred, and not the whole cred structure. Thus you will have to keep the structure allocated until you call gnutls_deinit() .

For GNUTLS_CRD_ANON , cred should be gnutls_anon_client_credentials_t in case of a client. In case of a server it should be gnutls_anon_server_credentials_t .

For GNUTLS_CRD_SRP , cred should be gnutls_srp_client_credentials_t in case of a client, and gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t , in case of a server.

For GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE , cred should be gnutls_certificate_credentials_t .

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error code is returned.


Next: , Previous: , Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications   [Contents][Index]

6.4 Associating the credentials

Each authentication method is associated with a key exchange method, and a credentials type. The contents of the credentials is method-dependent, e.g. certificates for certificate authentication and should be initialized and associated with a session (see gnutls_credentials_set). A mapping of the key exchange methods with the credential types is shown in Table 6.2.

Authentication methodKey exchangeClient credentialsServer credentials
Certificate and Raw public-keyKX_RSA, KX_DHE_RSA, KX_DHE_DSS, KX_ECDHE_RSA, KX_ECDHE_ECDSACRD_CERTIFICATECRD_CERTIFICATE
Password and certificateKX_SRP_RSA, KX_SRP_DSSCRD_SRPCRD_CERTIFICATE, CRD_SRP
PasswordKX_SRPCRD_SRPCRD_SRP
AnonymousKX_ANON_DH, KX_ANON_ECDHCRD_ANONCRD_ANON
Pre-shared keyKX_PSK, KX_DHE_PSK, KX_ECDHE_PSKCRD_PSKCRD_PSK

Table 6.2: Key exchange algorithms and the corresponding credential types.


Next: , Up: Associating the credentials   [Contents][Index]

6.4.1 Certificates

Server certificate authentication

When using certificates the server is required to have at least one certificate and private key pair. Clients may not hold such a pair, but a server could require it. In this section we discuss general issues applying to both client and server certificates. The next section will elaborate on issues arising from client authentication only.

In order to use certificate credentials one must first initialize a credentials structure of type gnutls_certificate_credentials_t. After use this structure must be freed. This can be done with the following functions.

int gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t * res)
void gnutls_certificate_free_credentials (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t sc)

After the credentials structures are initialized, the certificate and key pair must be loaded. This occurs before any TLS session is initialized, and the same structures are reused for multiple sessions. Depending on the certificate type different loading functions are available, as shown below. For X.509 certificates, the functions will accept and use a certificate chain that leads to a trusted authority. The certificate chain must be ordered in such way that every certificate certifies the one before it. The trusted authority’s certificate need not to be included since the peer should possess it already.

int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char * certfile, const char * keyfile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type, const char * pass, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_mem2 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const gnutls_datum_t * cert, const gnutls_datum_t * key, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type, const char * pass, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, gnutls_x509_crt_t * cert_list, int cert_list_size, gnutls_x509_privkey_t key)

It is recommended to use the higher level functions such as gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2 which accept not only file names but URLs that specify objects stored in token, or system certificates and keys (see Application-specific keys). For these cases, another important function is gnutls_certificate_set_pin_function, that allows setting a callback function to retrieve a PIN if the input keys are protected by PIN.

Function: void gnutls_certificate_set_pin_function (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)

cred: is a gnutls_certificate_credentials_t type.

fn: A PIN callback

userdata: Data to be passed in the callback

This function will set a callback function to be used when required to access a protected object. This function overrides any other global PIN functions.

Note that this function must be called right after initialization to have effect.

Since: 3.1.0

If the imported keys and certificates need to be accessed before any TLS session is established, it is convenient to use gnutls_certificate_set_key in combination with gnutls_pcert_import_x509_raw and gnutls_privkey_import_x509_raw.

Function: int gnutls_certificate_set_key (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char ** names, int names_size, gnutls_pcert_st * pcert_list, int pcert_list_size, gnutls_privkey_t key)

res: is a gnutls_certificate_credentials_t type.

names: is an array of DNS names belonging to the public-key (NULL if none)

names_size: holds the size of the names list

pcert_list: contains a certificate list (chain) or raw public-key

pcert_list_size: holds the size of the certificate list

key: is a gnutls_privkey_t key corresponding to the first public-key in pcert_list

This function sets a public/private key pair in the gnutls_certificate_credentials_t type. The given public key may be encapsulated in a certificate or can be given as a raw key. This function may be called more than once, in case multiple key pairs exist for the server. For clients that want to send more than their own end- entity certificate (e.g., also an intermediate CA cert), the full certificate chain must be provided in pcert_list .

Note that the key will become part of the credentials structure and must not be deallocated. It will be automatically deallocated when the res structure is deinitialized.

If this function fails, the res structure is at an undefined state and it must not be reused to load other keys or certificates.

Note that, this function by default returns zero on success and a negative value on error. Since 3.5.6, when the flag GNUTLS_CERTIFICATE_API_V2 is set using gnutls_certificate_set_flags() it returns an index (greater or equal to zero). That index can be used for other functions to refer to the added key-pair.

Since GnuTLS 3.6.6 this function also handles raw public keys.

Returns: On success this functions returns zero, and otherwise a negative value on error (see above for modifying that behavior).

Since: 3.0

If multiple certificates are used with the functions above each client’s request will be served with the certificate that matches the requested name (see Server name indication).

As an alternative to loading from files or buffers, a callback may be used for the server or the client to specify the certificate and the key at the handshake time. In that case a certificate should be selected according the peer’s signature algorithm preferences. To get those preferences use gnutls_sign_algorithm_get_requested. Both functions are shown below.

void gnutls_certificate_set_retrieve_function (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_certificate_retrieve_function * func)
void gnutls_certificate_set_retrieve_function2 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_certificate_retrieve_function2 * func)
void gnutls_certificate_set_retrieve_function3 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_certificate_retrieve_function3 * func)
int gnutls_sign_algorithm_get_requested (gnutls_session_t session, size_t indx, gnutls_sign_algorithm_t * algo)

The functions above do not handle the requested server name automatically. A server would need to check the name requested by the client using gnutls_server_name_get, and serve the appropriate certificate. Note that some of these functions require the gnutls_pcert_st structure to be filled in. Helper functions to fill in the structure are listed below.

typedef struct gnutls_pcert_st
{
  gnutls_pubkey_t pubkey;
  gnutls_datum_t cert;
  gnutls_certificate_type_t type;
} gnutls_pcert_st;
int gnutls_pcert_import_x509 (gnutls_pcert_st * pcert, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pcert_import_x509_raw (gnutls_pcert_st * pcert, const gnutls_datum_t * cert, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, unsigned int flags)
void gnutls_pcert_deinit (gnutls_pcert_st * pcert)

In a handshake, the negotiated cipher suite depends on the certificate’s parameters, so some key exchange methods might not be available with all certificates. GnuTLS will disable ciphersuites that are not compatible with the key, or the enabled authentication methods. For example keys marked as sign-only, will not be able to access the plain RSA ciphersuites, that require decryption. It is not recommended to use RSA keys for both signing and encryption. If possible use a different key for the DHE-RSA which uses signing and RSA that requires decryption. All the key exchange methods shown in Table 4.1 are available in certificate authentication.

Client certificate authentication

If a certificate is to be requested from the client during the handshake, the server will send a certificate request message. This behavior is controlled by gnutls_certificate_server_set_request. The request contains a list of the by the server accepted certificate signers. This list is constructed using the trusted certificate authorities of the server. In cases where the server supports a large number of certificate authorities it makes sense not to advertise all of the names to save bandwidth. That can be controlled using the function gnutls_certificate_send_x509_rdn_sequence. This however will have the side-effect of not restricting the client to certificates signed by server’s acceptable signers.

Function: void gnutls_certificate_server_set_request (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_certificate_request_t req)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

req: is one of GNUTLS_CERT_REQUEST, GNUTLS_CERT_REQUIRE, GNUTLS_CERT_IGNORE

This function specifies if we (in case of a server) are going to send a certificate request message to the client. If req is GNUTLS_CERT_REQUIRE then the server will return the GNUTLS_E_NO_CERTIFICATE_FOUND error if the peer does not provide a certificate. If you do not call this function then the client will not be asked to send a certificate. Invoking the function with req GNUTLS_CERT_IGNORE has the same effect.

Function: void gnutls_certificate_send_x509_rdn_sequence (gnutls_session_t session, int status)

session: a gnutls_session_t type.

status: is 0 or 1

If status is non zero, this function will order gnutls not to send the rdnSequence in the certificate request message. That is the server will not advertise its trusted CAs to the peer. If status is zero then the default behaviour will take effect, which is to advertise the server’s trusted CAs.

This function has no effect in clients, and in authentication methods other than certificate with X.509 certificates.

On the client side, it needs to set its certificates on the credentials structure, similarly to server side from a file, or via a callback. Once the certificates are available in the credentials structure, the client will send them if during the handshake the server requests a certificate signed by the issuer of its CA.

In the case a single certificate is available and the server does not specify a signer’s list, then that certificate is always sent. It is, however possible, to send a certificate even when the advertised CA list by the server contains CAs other than its signer. That can be achieved using the GNUTLS_FORCE_CLIENT_CERT flag in gnutls_init.

int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char * certfile, const char * keyfile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_simple_pkcs12_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char * pkcs12file, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type, const char * password)
void gnutls_certificate_set_retrieve_function2 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_certificate_retrieve_function2 * func)

Client or server certificate verification

Certificate verification is possible by loading the trusted authorities into the credentials structure by using the following functions, applicable to X.509 certificates. In modern systems it is recommended to utilize gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust which will load the trusted authorities from the system store.

Function: int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred)

cred: is a gnutls_certificate_credentials_t type.

This function adds the system’s default trusted CAs in order to verify client or server certificates.

In the case the system is currently unsupported GNUTLS_E_UNIMPLEMENTED_FEATURE is returned.

Returns: the number of certificates processed or a negative error code on error.

Since: 3.0.20

int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const char * cafile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_dir (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const char * ca_dir, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)

The peer’s certificate will be automatically verified if gnutls_session_set_verify_cert is called prior to handshake.

Alternatively, one must set a callback function during the handshake using gnutls_certificate_set_verify_function, which will verify the peer’s certificate once received. The verification should happen using gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3 within the callback. It will verify the certificate’s signature and the owner of the certificate. That will provide a brief verification output. If a detailed output is required one should call gnutls_certificate_get_peers to obtain the raw certificate of the peer and verify it using the functions discussed in X.509 certificates.

In both the automatic and the manual cases, the verification status returned can be printed using gnutls_certificate_verification_status_print.

Function: void gnutls_session_set_verify_cert (gnutls_session_t session, const char * hostname, unsigned flags)

session: is a gnutls session

hostname: is the expected name of the peer; may be NULL

flags: flags for certificate verification – gnutls_certificate_verify_flags

This function instructs GnuTLS to verify the peer’s certificate using the provided hostname. If the verification fails the handshake will also fail with GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_ERROR . In that case the verification result can be obtained using gnutls_session_get_verify_cert_status() .

The hostname pointer provided must remain valid for the lifetime of the session. More precisely it should be available during any subsequent handshakes. If no hostname is provided, no hostname verification will be performed. For a more advanced verification function check gnutls_session_set_verify_cert2() .

If flags is provided which contain a profile, this function should be called after any session priority setting functions.

The gnutls_session_set_verify_cert() function is intended to be used by TLS clients to verify the server’s certificate.

Since: 3.4.6

int gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3 (gnutls_session_t session, const char * hostname, unsigned int * status)
void gnutls_certificate_set_verify_function (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_certificate_verify_function * func)

Note that when using raw public-keys verification will not work because there is no corresponding certificate body belonging to the raw key that can be verified. In that case the gnutls_certificate_verify_peers family of functions will return a GNUTLS_E_INVALID_REQUEST error code. For authenticating raw public-keys one must use an out-of-band mechanism, e.g. by comparing hashes or using trust on first use (see Verifying a certificate using trust on first use authentication).


Next: , Previous: , Up: Associating the credentials   [Contents][Index]

6.4.2 Raw public-keys

As of version 3.6.6 GnuTLS supports Raw public-keys. With raw public-keys only the public-key part (that is normally embedded in a certificate) is transmitted to the peer. In order to load a raw public-key and its corresponding private key in a credentials structure one can use the following functions.

int gnutls_certificate_set_key (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char ** names, int names_size, gnutls_pcert_st * pcert_list, int pcert_list_size, gnutls_privkey_t key)
int gnutls_certificate_set_rawpk_key_mem (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const gnutls_datum_t * spki, const gnutls_datum_t * pkey, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * pass, unsigned int key_usage, const char ** names, unsigned int names_length, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_certificate_set_rawpk_key_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const char * rawpkfile, const char * privkeyfile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * pass, unsigned int key_usage, const char ** names, unsigned int names_length, unsigned int privkey_flags, unsigned int pkcs11_flags)

Next: , Previous: , Up: Associating the credentials   [Contents][Index]

6.4.3 SRP

The initialization functions in SRP credentials differ between client and server. Clients supporting SRP should set the username and password prior to connection, to the credentials structure. Alternatively gnutls_srp_set_client_credentials_function may be used instead, to specify a callback function that should return the SRP username and password. The callback is called once during the TLS handshake.

int gnutls_srp_allocate_server_credentials (gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t * sc)
int gnutls_srp_allocate_client_credentials (gnutls_srp_client_credentials_t * sc)
void gnutls_srp_free_server_credentials (gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t sc)
void gnutls_srp_free_client_credentials (gnutls_srp_client_credentials_t sc)
int gnutls_srp_set_client_credentials (gnutls_srp_client_credentials_t res, const char * username, const char * password)
Function: void gnutls_srp_set_client_credentials_function (gnutls_srp_client_credentials_t cred, gnutls_srp_client_credentials_function * func)

cred: is a gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t type.

func: is the callback function

This function can be used to set a callback to retrieve the username and password for client SRP authentication. The callback’s function form is:

int (*callback)(gnutls_session_t, char** username, char**password);

The username and password must be allocated using gnutls_malloc() .

The username should be an ASCII string or UTF-8 string. In case of a UTF-8 string it is recommended to be following the PRECIS framework for usernames (rfc8265). The password can be in ASCII format, or normalized using gnutls_utf8_password_normalize() .

The callback function will be called once per handshake before the initial hello message is sent.

The callback should not return a negative error code the second time called, since the handshake procedure will be aborted.

The callback function should return 0 on success. -1 indicates an error.

In server side the default behavior of GnuTLS is to read the usernames and SRP verifiers from password files. These password file format is compatible the with the Stanford srp libraries format. If a different password file format is to be used, then gnutls_srp_set_server_credentials_function should be called, to set an appropriate callback.

Function: int gnutls_srp_set_server_credentials_file (gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t res, const char * password_file, const char * password_conf_file)

res: is a gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t type.

password_file: is the SRP password file (tpasswd)

password_conf_file: is the SRP password conf file (tpasswd.conf)

This function sets the password files, in a gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t type. Those password files hold usernames and verifiers and will be used for SRP authentication.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, or an error code.

Function: void gnutls_srp_set_server_credentials_function (gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t cred, gnutls_srp_server_credentials_function * func)

cred: is a gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t type.

func: is the callback function

This function can be used to set a callback to retrieve the user’s SRP credentials. The callback’s function form is:

int (*callback)(gnutls_session_t, const char* username, gnutls_datum_t *salt, gnutls_datum_t *verifier, gnutls_datum_t *generator, gnutls_datum_t *prime);

username contains the actual username. The salt , verifier , generator and prime must be filled in using the gnutls_malloc() . For convenience prime and generator may also be one of the static parameters defined in gnutls.h.

Initially, the data field is NULL in every gnutls_datum_t structure that the callback has to fill in. When the callback is done GnuTLS deallocates all of those buffers which are non-NULL, regardless of the return value.

In order to prevent attackers from guessing valid usernames, if a user does not exist, g and n values should be filled in using a random user’s parameters. In that case the callback must return the special value (1). See gnutls_srp_set_server_fake_salt_seed too. If this is not required for your application, return a negative number from the callback to abort the handshake.

The callback function will only be called once per handshake. The callback function should return 0 on success, while -1 indicates an error.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Associating the credentials   [Contents][Index]

6.4.4 PSK

The initialization functions in PSK credentials differ between client and server.

int gnutls_psk_allocate_server_credentials (gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t * sc)
int gnutls_psk_allocate_client_credentials (gnutls_psk_client_credentials_t * sc)
void gnutls_psk_free_server_credentials (gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t sc)
void gnutls_psk_free_client_credentials (gnutls_psk_client_credentials_t sc)

Clients supporting PSK should supply the username and key before a TLS session is established. Alternatively gnutls_psk_set_client_credentials_function can be used to specify a callback function. This has the advantage that the callback will be called only if PSK has been negotiated.

int gnutls_psk_set_client_credentials (gnutls_psk_client_credentials_t res, const char * username, const gnutls_datum_t * key, gnutls_psk_key_flags flags)
Function: void gnutls_psk_set_client_credentials_function (gnutls_psk_client_credentials_t cred, gnutls_psk_client_credentials_function * func)

cred: is a gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t type.

func: is the callback function

This function can be used to set a callback to retrieve the username and password for client PSK authentication. The callback’s function form is: int (*callback)(gnutls_session_t, char** username, gnutls_datum_t* key);

The username and key ->data must be allocated using gnutls_malloc() . The username should be an ASCII string or UTF-8 string. In case of a UTF-8 string it is recommended to be following the PRECIS framework for usernames (rfc8265).

The callback function will be called once per handshake.

The callback function should return 0 on success. -1 indicates an error.

In server side the default behavior of GnuTLS is to read the usernames and PSK keys from a password file. The password file should contain usernames and keys in hexadecimal format. The name of the password file can be stored to the credentials structure by calling gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_file. If a different password file format is to be used, then a callback should be set instead by gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_function.

The server can help the client chose a suitable username and password, by sending a hint. Note that there is no common profile for the PSK hint and applications are discouraged to use it. A server, may specify the hint by calling gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_hint. The client can retrieve the hint, for example in the callback function, using gnutls_psk_client_get_hint.

Function: int gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_file (gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t res, const char * password_file)

res: is a gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t type.

password_file: is the PSK password file (passwd.psk)

This function sets the password file, in a gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t type. This password file holds usernames and keys and will be used for PSK authentication.

Each entry in the file consists of a username, followed by a colon (’:’) and a hex-encoded key. If the username contains a colon or any other special character, it can be hex-encoded preceded by a ’#’.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise an error code is returned.

void gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_function (gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t cred, gnutls_psk_server_credentials_function * func)
int gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_hint (gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t res, const char * hint)
const char * gnutls_psk_client_get_hint (gnutls_session_t session)

Previous: , Up: Associating the credentials   [Contents][Index]

6.4.5 Anonymous

The key exchange methods for anonymous authentication since GnuTLS 3.6.0 will utilize the RFC7919 parameters, unless explicit parameters have been provided and associated with an anonymous credentials structure. Check Parameter generation for more information. The initialization functions for the credentials are shown below.

int gnutls_anon_allocate_server_credentials (gnutls_anon_server_credentials_t * sc)
int gnutls_anon_allocate_client_credentials (gnutls_anon_client_credentials_t * sc)
void gnutls_anon_free_server_credentials (gnutls_anon_server_credentials_t sc)
void gnutls_anon_free_client_credentials (gnutls_anon_client_credentials_t sc)

Next: , Previous: , Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications   [Contents][Index]

6.5 Setting up the transport layer

The next step is to setup the underlying transport layer details. The Berkeley sockets are implicitly used by GnuTLS, thus a call to gnutls_transport_set_int would be sufficient to specify the socket descriptor.

void gnutls_transport_set_int (gnutls_session_t session, int fd)
void gnutls_transport_set_int2 (gnutls_session_t session, int recv_fd, int send_fd)

If however another transport layer than TCP is selected, then a pointer should be used instead to express the parameter to be passed to custom functions. In that case the following functions should be used instead.

void gnutls_transport_set_ptr (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_transport_ptr_t ptr)
void gnutls_transport_set_ptr2 (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_transport_ptr_t recv_ptr, gnutls_transport_ptr_t send_ptr)

Moreover all of the following push and pull callbacks should be set.

Function: void gnutls_transport_set_push_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_push_func push_func)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

push_func: a callback function similar to write()

This is the function where you set a push function for gnutls to use in order to send data. If you are going to use berkeley style sockets, you do not need to use this function since the default send(2) will probably be ok. Otherwise you should specify this function for gnutls to be able to send data. The callback should return a positive number indicating the bytes sent, and -1 on error.

push_func is of the form, ssize_t (*gnutls_push_func)(gnutls_transport_ptr_t, const void*, size_t);

Function: void gnutls_transport_set_vec_push_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_vec_push_func vec_func)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

vec_func: a callback function similar to writev()

Using this function you can override the default writev(2) function for gnutls to send data. Setting this callback instead of gnutls_transport_set_push_function() is recommended since it introduces less overhead in the TLS handshake process.

vec_func is of the form, ssize_t (*gnutls_vec_push_func) (gnutls_transport_ptr_t, const giovec_t * iov, int iovcnt);

Since: 2.12.0

Function: void gnutls_transport_set_pull_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_pull_func pull_func)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

pull_func: a callback function similar to read()

This is the function where you set a function for gnutls to receive data. Normally, if you use berkeley style sockets, do not need to use this function since the default recv(2) will probably be ok. The callback should return 0 on connection termination, a positive number indicating the number of bytes received, and -1 on error.

gnutls_pull_func is of the form, ssize_t (*gnutls_pull_func)(gnutls_transport_ptr_t, void*, size_t);

Function: void gnutls_transport_set_pull_timeout_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_pull_timeout_func func)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

func: a callback function

This is the function where you set a function for gnutls to know whether data are ready to be received. It should wait for data a given time frame in milliseconds. The callback should return 0 on timeout, a positive number if data can be received, and -1 on error. You’ll need to override this function if select() is not suitable for the provided transport calls.

As with select() , if the timeout value is zero the callback should return zero if no data are immediately available. The special value GNUTLS_INDEFINITE_TIMEOUT indicates that the callback should wait indefinitely for data.

gnutls_pull_timeout_func is of the form, int (*gnutls_pull_timeout_func)(gnutls_transport_ptr_t, unsigned int ms);

This callback is necessary when gnutls_handshake_set_timeout() or gnutls_record_set_timeout() are set, under TLS1.3 and for enforcing the DTLS mode timeouts when in blocking mode.

For compatibility with future GnuTLS versions this callback must be set when a custom pull function is registered. The callback will not be used when the session is in TLS mode with non-blocking sockets. That is, when GNUTLS_NONBLOCK is specified for a TLS session in gnutls_init() .

The helper function gnutls_system_recv_timeout() is provided to simplify writing callbacks.

Since: 3.0

The functions above accept a callback function which should return the number of bytes written, or -1 on error and should set errno appropriately. In some environments, setting errno is unreliable. For example Windows have several errno variables in different CRTs, or in other systems it may be a non thread-local variable. If this is a concern to you, call gnutls_transport_set_errno with the intended errno value instead of setting errno directly.

Function: void gnutls_transport_set_errno (gnutls_session_t session, int err)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

err: error value to store in session-specific errno variable.

Store err in the session-specific errno variable. Useful values for err are EINTR, EAGAIN and EMSGSIZE, other values are treated will be treated as real errors in the push/pull function.

This function is useful in replacement push and pull functions set by gnutls_transport_set_push_function() and gnutls_transport_set_pull_function() under Windows, where the replacements may not have access to the same errno variable that is used by GnuTLS (e.g., the application is linked to msvcr71.dll and gnutls is linked to msvcrt.dll).

This function is unreliable if you are using the same session in different threads for sending and receiving.

GnuTLS currently only interprets the EINTR, EAGAIN and EMSGSIZE errno values and returns the corresponding GnuTLS error codes:

The EINTR and EAGAIN values are returned by interrupted system calls, or when non blocking IO is used. All GnuTLS functions can be resumed (called again), if any of the above error codes is returned. The EMSGSIZE value is returned when attempting to send a large datagram.

In the case of DTLS it is also desirable to override the generic transport functions with functions that emulate the operation of recvfrom and sendto. In addition DTLS requires timers during the receive of a handshake message, set using the gnutls_transport_set_pull_timeout_function function. To check the retransmission timers the function gnutls_dtls_get_timeout is provided, which returns the time remaining until the next retransmission, or better the time until gnutls_handshake should be called again.

Function: void gnutls_transport_set_pull_timeout_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_pull_timeout_func func)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

func: a callback function

This is the function where you set a function for gnutls to know whether data are ready to be received. It should wait for data a given time frame in milliseconds. The callback should return 0 on timeout, a positive number if data can be received, and -1 on error. You’ll need to override this function if select() is not suitable for the provided transport calls.

As with select() , if the timeout value is zero the callback should return zero if no data are immediately available. The special value GNUTLS_INDEFINITE_TIMEOUT indicates that the callback should wait indefinitely for data.

gnutls_pull_timeout_func is of the form, int (*gnutls_pull_timeout_func)(gnutls_transport_ptr_t, unsigned int ms);

This callback is necessary when gnutls_handshake_set_timeout() or gnutls_record_set_timeout() are set, under TLS1.3 and for enforcing the DTLS mode timeouts when in blocking mode.

For compatibility with future GnuTLS versions this callback must be set when a custom pull function is registered. The callback will not be used when the session is in TLS mode with non-blocking sockets. That is, when GNUTLS_NONBLOCK is specified for a TLS session in gnutls_init() .

The helper function gnutls_system_recv_timeout() is provided to simplify writing callbacks.

Since: 3.0

Function: unsigned int gnutls_dtls_get_timeout (gnutls_session_t session)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

This function will return the milliseconds remaining for a retransmission of the previously sent handshake message. This function is useful when DTLS is used in non-blocking mode, to estimate when to call gnutls_handshake() if no packets have been received.

Returns: the remaining time in milliseconds.

Since: 3.0


Next: , Up: Setting up the transport layer   [Contents][Index]

6.5.1 Asynchronous operation

GnuTLS can be used with asynchronous socket or event-driven programming. The approach is similar to using Berkeley sockets under such an environment. The blocking, due to network interaction, calls such as gnutls_handshake, gnutls_record_recv, can be set to non-blocking by setting the underlying sockets to non-blocking. If other push and pull functions are setup, then they should behave the same way as recv and send when used in a non-blocking way, i.e., return -1 and set errno to EAGAIN. Since, during a TLS protocol session GnuTLS does not block except for network interaction, the non blocking EAGAIN errno will be propagated and GnuTLS functions will return the GNUTLS_E_AGAIN error code. Such calls can be resumed the same way as a system call would. The only exception is gnutls_record_send, which if interrupted subsequent calls need not to include the data to be sent (can be called with NULL argument).

When using the poll or select system calls though, one should remember that they only apply to the kernel sockets API. To check for any available buffered data in a GnuTLS session, utilize gnutls_record_check_pending, either before the poll system call, or after a call to gnutls_record_recv. Data queued by gnutls_record_send (when interrupted) can be discarded using gnutls_record_discard_queued.

An example of GnuTLS’ usage with asynchronous operation can be found in doc/examples/tlsproxy.

The following paragraphs describe the detailed requirements for non-blocking operation when using the TLS or DTLS protocols.

6.5.1.1 TLS protocol

There are no special requirements for the TLS protocol operation in non-blocking mode if a non-blocking socket is used.

It is recommended, however, for future compatibility, when in non-blocking mode, to call the gnutls_init function with the GNUTLS_NONBLOCK flag set (see Session initialization).

6.5.1.2 Datagram TLS protocol

When in non-blocking mode the function, the gnutls_init function must be called with the GNUTLS_NONBLOCK flag set (see Session initialization).

In contrast with the TLS protocol, the pull timeout function is required, but will only be called with a timeout of zero. In that case it should indicate whether there are data to be received or not. When not using the default pull function, then gnutls_transport_set_pull_timeout_function should be called.

Although in the TLS protocol implementation each call to receive or send function implies to restoring the same function that was interrupted, in the DTLS protocol this requirement isn’t true. There are cases where a retransmission is required, which are indicated by a received message and thus gnutls_record_get_direction must be called to decide which direction to check prior to restoring a function call.

Function: int gnutls_record_get_direction (gnutls_session_t session)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

This function is useful to determine whether a GnuTLS function was interrupted while sending or receiving, so that select() or poll() may be called appropriately.

It provides information about the internals of the record protocol and is only useful if a prior gnutls function call, e.g. gnutls_handshake() , was interrupted and returned GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED or GNUTLS_E_AGAIN . After such an interrupt applications may call select() or poll() before restoring the interrupted GnuTLS function.

This function’s output is unreliable if you are using the same session in different threads for sending and receiving.

Returns: 0 if interrupted while trying to read data, or 1 while trying to write data.

When calling gnutls_handshake through a multi-plexer, to be able to handle properly the DTLS handshake retransmission timers, the function gnutls_dtls_get_timeout should be used to estimate when to call gnutls_handshake if no data have been received.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Setting up the transport layer   [Contents][Index]

6.5.2 Reducing round-trips

The full TLS 1.2 handshake requires 2 round-trips to complete, and when combined with TCP’s SYN and SYN-ACK negotiation it extends to 3 full round-trips. While, TLS 1.3 reduces that to two round-trips when under TCP, it still adds considerable latency, making the protocol unsuitable for certain applications.

To optimize the handshake latency, in client side, it is possible to take advantage of the TCP fast open [RFC7413] mechanism on operating systems that support it. That can be done either by manually crafting the push and pull callbacks, or by utilizing gnutls_transport_set_fastopen. In that case the initial TCP handshake is eliminated, reducing the TLS 1.2 handshake round-trip to 2, and the TLS 1.3 handshake to a single round-trip. Note, that when this function is used, any connection failures will be reported during the gnutls_handshake function call with error code GNUTLS_E_PUSH_ERROR.

Function: void gnutls_transport_set_fastopen (gnutls_session_t session, int fd, struct sockaddr * connect_addr, socklen_t connect_addrlen, unsigned int flags)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

fd: is the session’s socket descriptor

connect_addr: is the address we want to connect to

connect_addrlen: is the length of connect_addr

flags: must be zero

Enables TCP Fast Open (TFO) for the specified TLS client session. That means that TCP connection establishment and the transmission of the first TLS client hello packet are combined. The peer’s address must be specified in connect_addr and connect_addrlen , and the socket specified by fd should not be connected.

TFO only works for TCP sockets of type AF_INET and AF_INET6. If the OS doesn’t support TCP fast open this function will result to gnutls using connect() transparently during the first write.

Note: This function overrides all the transport callback functions. If this is undesirable, TCP Fast Open must be implemented on the user callback functions without calling this function. When using this function, transport callbacks must not be set, and gnutls_transport_set_ptr() or gnutls_transport_set_int() must not be called.

On GNU/Linux TFO has to be enabled at the system layer, that is in /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_fastopen, bit 0 has to be set.

This function has no effect on server sessions.

Since: 3.5.3

When restricted to TLS 1.2, and non-resumed sessions, it is possible to further reduce the round-trips to a single one by taking advantage of the False Start TLS extension. This can be enabled by setting the GNUTLS_ENABLE_FALSE_START flag on gnutls_init.

Under TLS 1.3, the server side can start transmitting before the handshake is complete (i.e., while the client Finished message is still in flight), when no client certificate authentication is requested. This, unlike false start, is part of protocol design with no known security implications. It can be enabled by setting the GNUTLS_ENABLE_EARLY_START on gnutls_init, and the gnutls_handshake function will return early, allowing the server to send data earlier.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Setting up the transport layer   [Contents][Index]

6.5.3 Zero-roundtrip mode

Under TLS 1.3, when the client has already connected to the server and is resuming a session, it can start transmitting application data during handshake. This is called zero round-trip time (0-RTT) mode, and the application data sent in this mode is called early data. The client can send early data with gnutls_record_send_early_data. The client should call this function before calling gnutls_handshake and after calling gnutls_session_set_data.

Note, however, that early data has weaker security properties than normal application data sent after handshake, such as lack of forward secrecy, no guarantees of non-replay between connections. Thus it is disabled on the server side by default. To enable it, the server needs to:

  1. Set GNUTLS_ENABLE_EARLY_DATA on gnutls_init. Note that this option only has effect on server.
  2. Enable anti-replay measure. See Anti-replay protection for the details.

The server caches the received early data until it is read. To set the maximum amount of data to be stored in the cache, use gnutls_record_set_max_early_data_size. After receiving the EndOfEarlyData handshake message, the server can start retrieving the received data with gnutls_record_recv_early_data. You can call the function either after the handshake is complete, or through a handshake hook (gnutls_handshake_set_hook_function).

When sending early data, the client should respect the maximum amount of early data, which may have been previously advertised by the server. It can be checked using gnutls_record_get_max_early_data_size, right after calling gnutls_session_set_data.

After sending early data, to check whether the sent early data was accepted by the server, use gnutls_session_get_flags and compare the result with GNUTLS_SFLAGS_EARLY_DATA. Similarly, on the server side, the same function and flag can be used to check whether it has actually accepted early data.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Setting up the transport layer   [Contents][Index]

6.5.4 Anti-replay protection

When 0-RTT mode is used, the server must protect itself from replay attacks, where adversary client reuses duplicate session ticket to send early data, before the server authenticates the client.

GnuTLS provides a simple mechanism against replay attacks, following the method called ClientHello recording. When a session ticket is accepted, the server checks if the ClientHello message has been already seen. If there is a duplicate, the server rejects early data.

The problem of this approach is that the number of recorded messages grows indefinitely. To prevent that, the server can limit the recording to a certain time window, which can be configured with gnutls_anti_replay_set_window.

The anti-replay mechanism shall be globally initialized with gnutls_anti_replay_init, and then attached to a session using gnutls_anti_replay_enable. It can be deinitialized with gnutls_anti_replay_deinit.

The server must also set up a database back-end to store ClientHello messages. That can be achieved using gnutls_anti_replay_set_add_function and gnutls_anti_replay_set_ptr.

Note that, if the back-end stores arbitrary number of ClientHello, it needs to periodically clean up the stored entries based on the time window set with gnutls_anti_replay_set_window. The cleanup can be implemented by iterating through the database entries and calling gnutls_db_check_entry_expire_time. This is similar to session database cleanup used by TLS1.2 sessions.

The full set up of the server using early data would be like the following example:

#define MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE 16384

static int
db_add_func(void *dbf, gnutls_datum_t key, gnutls_datum_t data)
{
    /* Return GNUTLS_E_DB_ENTRY_EXISTS, if KEY is found in the database.
     * Otherwise, store it and return 0.
     */
}

static int
handshake_hook_func(gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int htype,
                    unsigned when, unsigned int incoming, const gnutls_datum_t *msg)
{
    int ret;
    char buf[MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE];

    assert(htype == GNUTLS_HANDSHAKE_END_OF_EARLY_DATA);
    assert(when == GNUTLS_HOOK_POST);

    if (gnutls_session_get_flags(session) & GNUTLS_SFLAGS_EARLY_DATA) {
        ret = gnutls_record_recv_early_data(session, buf, sizeof(buf));
        assert(ret >= 0);
    }

    return ret;
}

int main(void)
{
  ...
  /* Initialize anti-replay measure, which can be shared
   * among multiple sessions.
   */
  gnutls_anti_replay_init(&anti_replay);

  /* Set the database back-end function for the anti-replay data. */
  gnutls_anti_replay_set_add_function(anti_replay, db_add_func);
  gnutls_anti_replay_set_ptr(anti_replay, NULL);

  ...

  gnutls_init(&server, GNUTLS_SERVER | GNUTLS_ENABLE_EARLY_DATA);
  gnutls_record_set_max_early_data_size(server, MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE);

  ...

  /* Set the anti-replay measure to the session.
   */
  gnutls_anti_replay_enable(server, anti_replay);
  ...

  /* Retrieve early data in a handshake hook;
   * you can also do that after handshake.
   */
  gnutls_handshake_set_hook_function(server, GNUTLS_HANDSHAKE_END_OF_EARLY_DATA,
                                     GNUTLS_HOOK_POST, handshake_hook_func);
  ...
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: Setting up the transport layer   [Contents][Index]

6.5.5 DTLS sessions

Because datagram TLS can operate over connections where the client cannot be reliably verified, functionality in the form of cookies, is available to prevent denial of service attacks to servers. GnuTLS requires a server to generate a secret key that is used to sign a cookie19. That cookie is sent to the client using gnutls_dtls_cookie_send, and the client must reply using the correct cookie. The server side should verify the initial message sent by client using gnutls_dtls_cookie_verify. If successful the session should be initialized and associated with the cookie using gnutls_dtls_prestate_set, before proceeding to the handshake.

int gnutls_key_generate (gnutls_datum_t * key, unsigned int key_size)
int gnutls_dtls_cookie_send (gnutls_datum_t * key, void * client_data, size_t client_data_size, gnutls_dtls_prestate_st * prestate, gnutls_transport_ptr_t ptr, gnutls_push_func push_func)
int gnutls_dtls_cookie_verify (gnutls_datum_t * key, void * client_data, size_t client_data_size, void * _msg, size_t msg_size, gnutls_dtls_prestate_st * prestate)
void gnutls_dtls_prestate_set (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_dtls_prestate_st * prestate)

Note that the above apply to server side only and they are not mandatory to be used. Not using them, however, allows denial of service attacks. The client side cookie handling is part of gnutls_handshake.

Datagrams are typically restricted by a maximum transfer unit (MTU). For that both client and server side should set the correct maximum transfer unit for the layer underneath GnuTLS. This will allow proper fragmentation of DTLS messages and prevent messages from being silently discarded by the transport layer. The “correct” maximum transfer unit can be obtained through a path MTU discovery mechanism [RFC4821].

void gnutls_dtls_set_mtu (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int mtu)
unsigned int gnutls_dtls_get_mtu (gnutls_session_t session)
unsigned int gnutls_dtls_get_data_mtu (gnutls_session_t session)

Previous: , Up: Setting up the transport layer   [Contents][Index]

6.5.6 DTLS and SCTP

Although DTLS can run under any reliable or unreliable layer, there are special requirements for SCTP according to [RFC6083]. We summarize the most important below, however for a full treatment we refer to [RFC6083].


Next: , Previous: , Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications   [Contents][Index]

6.6 TLS handshake

Once a session has been initialized and a network connection has been set up, TLS and DTLS protocols perform a handshake. The handshake is the actual key exchange.

Function: int gnutls_handshake (gnutls_session_t session)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

This function performs the handshake of the TLS/SSL protocol, and initializes the TLS session parameters.

The non-fatal errors expected by this function are: GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED , GNUTLS_E_AGAIN , GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED . When this function is called for re-handshake under TLS 1.2 or earlier, the non-fatal error code GNUTLS_E_GOT_APPLICATION_DATA may also be returned.

The former two interrupt the handshake procedure due to the transport layer being interrupted, and the latter because of a "warning" alert that was sent by the peer (it is always a good idea to check any received alerts). On these non-fatal errors call this function again, until it returns 0; cf. gnutls_record_get_direction() and gnutls_error_is_fatal() . In DTLS sessions the non-fatal error GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET is also possible, and indicates that the MTU should be adjusted.

When this function is called by a server after a rehandshake request under TLS 1.2 or earlier the GNUTLS_E_GOT_APPLICATION_DATA error code indicates that some data were pending prior to peer initiating the handshake. Under TLS 1.3 this function when called after a successful handshake, is a no-op and always succeeds in server side; in client side this function is equivalent to gnutls_session_key_update() with GNUTLS_KU_PEER flag.

This function handles both full and abbreviated TLS handshakes (resumption). For abbreviated handshakes, in client side, the gnutls_session_set_data() should be called prior to this function to set parameters from a previous session. In server side, resumption is handled by either setting a DB back-end, or setting up keys for session tickets.

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS on a successful handshake, otherwise a negative error code.

Function: void gnutls_handshake_set_timeout (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int ms)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

ms: is a timeout value in milliseconds

This function sets the timeout for the TLS handshake process to the provided value. Use an ms value of zero to disable timeout, or GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT for a reasonable default value. For the DTLS protocol, the more detailed gnutls_dtls_set_timeouts() is provided.

This function requires to set a pull timeout callback. See gnutls_transport_set_pull_timeout_function() .

Since: 3.1.0

In GnuTLS 3.5.0 and later it is recommended to use gnutls_session_set_verify_cert for the handshake process to ensure the verification of the peer’s identity. That will verify the peer’s certificate, against the trusted CA store while accounting for stapled OCSP responses during the handshake; any error will be returned as a handshake error.

In older GnuTLS versions it is required to verify the peer’s certificate during the handshake by setting a callback with gnutls_certificate_set_verify_function, and then using gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3 from it. See Certificate authentication for more information.

void gnutls_session_set_verify_cert (gnutls_session_t session, const char * hostname, unsigned flags)
int gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3 (gnutls_session_t session, const char * hostname, unsigned int * status)

Next: , Previous: , Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications   [Contents][Index]

6.7 Data transfer and termination

Once the handshake is complete and peer’s identity has been verified data can be exchanged. The available functions resemble the POSIX recv and send functions. It is suggested to use gnutls_error_is_fatal to check whether the error codes returned by these functions are fatal for the protocol or can be ignored.

Function: ssize_t gnutls_record_send (gnutls_session_t session, const void * data, size_t data_size)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

data: contains the data to send

data_size: is the length of the data

This function has the similar semantics with send() . The only difference is that it accepts a GnuTLS session, and uses different error codes. Note that if the send buffer is full, send() will block this function. See the send() documentation for more information.

You can replace the default push function which is send() , by using gnutls_transport_set_push_function() .

If the EINTR is returned by the internal push function then GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED will be returned. If GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED or GNUTLS_E_AGAIN is returned, you must call this function again with the exact same parameters, or provide a NULL pointer for data and 0 for data_size , in order to write the same data as before. If you wish to discard the previous data instead of retrying, you must call gnutls_record_discard_queued() before calling this function with different parameters. Note that the latter works only on special transports (e.g., UDP). cf. gnutls_record_get_direction() .

Note that in DTLS this function will return the GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET error code if the send data exceed the data MTU value - as returned by gnutls_dtls_get_data_mtu() . The errno value EMSGSIZE also maps to GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET . Note that since 3.2.13 this function can be called under cork in DTLS mode, and will refuse to send data over the MTU size by returning GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET .

Returns: The number of bytes sent, or a negative error code. The number of bytes sent might be less than data_size . The maximum number of bytes this function can send in a single call depends on the negotiated maximum record size.

Function: ssize_t gnutls_record_recv (gnutls_session_t session, void * data, size_t data_size)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

data: the buffer that the data will be read into

data_size: the number of requested bytes

This function has the similar semantics with recv() . The only difference is that it accepts a GnuTLS session, and uses different error codes. In the special case that the peer requests a renegotiation, the caller will receive an error code of GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE . In case of a client, this message may be simply ignored, replied with an alert GNUTLS_A_NO_RENEGOTIATION , or replied with a new handshake, depending on the client’s will. A server receiving this error code can only initiate a new handshake or terminate the session.

If EINTR is returned by the internal pull function (the default is recv() ) then GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED will be returned. If GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED or GNUTLS_E_AGAIN is returned, you must call this function again to get the data. See also gnutls_record_get_direction() .

Returns: The number of bytes received and zero on EOF (for stream connections). A negative error code is returned in case of an error. The number of bytes received might be less than the requested data_size .

Function: int gnutls_error_is_fatal (int error)

error: is a GnuTLS error code, a negative error code

If a GnuTLS function returns a negative error code you may feed that value to this function to see if the error condition is fatal to a TLS session (i.e., must be terminated).

Note that you may also want to check the error code manually, since some non-fatal errors to the protocol (such as a warning alert or a rehandshake request) may be fatal for your program.

This function is only useful if you are dealing with errors from functions that relate to a TLS session (e.g., record layer or handshake layer handling functions).

Returns: Non-zero value on fatal errors or zero on non-fatal.

Although, in the TLS protocol the receive function can be called at any time, when DTLS is used the GnuTLS receive functions must be called once a message is available for reading, even if no data are expected. This is because in DTLS various (internal) actions may be required due to retransmission timers. Moreover, an extended receive function is shown below, which allows the extraction of the message’s sequence number. Due to the unreliable nature of the protocol, this field allows distinguishing out-of-order messages.

Function: ssize_t gnutls_record_recv_seq (gnutls_session_t session, void * data, size_t data_size, unsigned char * seq)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

data: the buffer that the data will be read into

data_size: the number of requested bytes

seq: is the packet’s 64-bit sequence number. Should have space for 8 bytes.

This function is the same as gnutls_record_recv() , except that it returns in addition to data, the sequence number of the data. This is useful in DTLS where record packets might be received out-of-order. The returned 8-byte sequence number is an integer in big-endian format and should be treated as a unique message identification.

Returns: The number of bytes received and zero on EOF. A negative error code is returned in case of an error. The number of bytes received might be less than data_size .

Since: 3.0

The gnutls_record_check_pending helper function is available to allow checking whether data are available to be read in a GnuTLS session buffers. Note that this function complements but does not replace poll, i.e., gnutls_record_check_pending reports no data to be read, poll should be called to check for data in the network buffers.

Function: size_t gnutls_record_check_pending (gnutls_session_t session)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

This function checks if there are unread data in the gnutls buffers. If the return value is non-zero the next call to gnutls_record_recv() is guaranteed not to block.

Returns: Returns the size of the data or zero.

int gnutls_record_get_direction (gnutls_session_t session)

Once a TLS or DTLS session is no longer needed, it is recommended to use gnutls_bye to terminate the session. That way the peer is notified securely about the intention of termination, which allows distinguishing it from a malicious connection termination. A session can be deinitialized with the gnutls_deinit function.

Function: int gnutls_bye (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_close_request_t how)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

how: is an integer

Terminates the current TLS/SSL connection. The connection should have been initiated using gnutls_handshake() . how should be one of GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR , GNUTLS_SHUT_WR .

In case of GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR the TLS session gets terminated and further receives and sends will be disallowed. If the return value is zero you may continue using the underlying transport layer. GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR sends an alert containing a close request and waits for the peer to reply with the same message.

In case of GNUTLS_SHUT_WR the TLS session gets terminated and further sends will be disallowed. In order to reuse the connection you should wait for an EOF from the peer. GNUTLS_SHUT_WR sends an alert containing a close request.

Note that not all implementations will properly terminate a TLS connection. Some of them, usually for performance reasons, will terminate only the underlying transport layer, and thus not distinguishing between a malicious party prematurely terminating the connection and normal termination.

This function may also return GNUTLS_E_AGAIN or GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED ; cf. gnutls_record_get_direction() .

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS on success, or an error code, see function documentation for entire semantics.

Function: void gnutls_deinit (gnutls_session_t session)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

This function clears all buffers associated with the session . This function will also remove session data from the session database if the session was terminated abnormally.


Next: , Previous: , Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications   [Contents][Index]

6.8 Buffered data transfer

Although gnutls_record_send is sufficient to transmit data to the peer, when many small chunks of data are to be transmitted it is inefficient and wastes bandwidth due to the TLS record overhead. In that case it is preferable to combine the small chunks before transmission. The following functions provide that functionality.

Function: void gnutls_record_cork (gnutls_session_t session)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

If called, gnutls_record_send() will no longer send any records. Any sent records will be cached until gnutls_record_uncork() is called.

This function is safe to use with DTLS after GnuTLS 3.3.0.

Since: 3.1.9

Function: int gnutls_record_uncork (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int flags)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

flags: Could be zero or GNUTLS_RECORD_WAIT

This resets the effect of gnutls_record_cork() , and flushes any pending data. If the GNUTLS_RECORD_WAIT flag is specified then this function will block until the data is sent or a fatal error occurs (i.e., the function will retry on GNUTLS_E_AGAIN and GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED ).

If the flag GNUTLS_RECORD_WAIT is not specified and the function is interrupted then the GNUTLS_E_AGAIN or GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED errors will be returned. To obtain the data left in the corked buffer use gnutls_record_check_corked() .

Returns: On success the number of transmitted data is returned, or otherwise a negative error code.

Since: 3.1.9


Next: , Previous: , Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications   [Contents][Index]

6.9 Handling alerts

During a TLS connection alert messages may be exchanged by the two peers. Those messages may be fatal, meaning the connection must be terminated afterwards, or warning when something needs to be reported to the peer, but without interrupting the session. The error codes GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED or GNUTLS_E_FATAL_ALERT_RECEIVED signal those alerts when received, and may be returned by all GnuTLS functions that receive data from the peer, being gnutls_handshake and gnutls_record_recv.

If those error codes are received the alert and its level should be logged or reported to the peer using the functions below.

Function: gnutls_alert_description_t gnutls_alert_get (gnutls_session_t session)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

This function will return the last alert number received. This function should be called when GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED or GNUTLS_E_FATAL_ALERT_RECEIVED errors are returned by a gnutls function. The peer may send alerts if he encounters an error. If no alert has been received the returned value is undefined.

Returns: the last alert received, a gnutls_alert_description_t value.

Function: const char * gnutls_alert_get_name (gnutls_alert_description_t alert)

alert: is an alert number.

This function will return a string that describes the given alert number, or NULL . See gnutls_alert_get() .

Returns: string corresponding to gnutls_alert_description_t value.

The peer may also be warned or notified of a fatal issue by using one of the functions below. All the available alerts are listed in The Alert Protocol.

Function: int gnutls_alert_send (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_alert_level_t level, gnutls_alert_description_t desc)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

level: is the level of the alert

desc: is the alert description

This function will send an alert to the peer in order to inform him of something important (eg. his Certificate could not be verified). If the alert level is Fatal then the peer is expected to close the connection, otherwise he may ignore the alert and continue.

The error code of the underlying record send function will be returned, so you may also receive GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED or GNUTLS_E_AGAIN as well.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise an error code is returned.

Function: int gnutls_error_to_alert (int err, int * level)

err: is a negative integer

level: the alert level will be stored there

Get an alert depending on the error code returned by a gnutls function. All alerts sent by this function should be considered fatal. The only exception is when err is GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE , where a warning alert should be sent to the peer indicating that no renegotiation will be performed.

If there is no mapping to a valid alert the alert to indicate internal error (GNUTLS_A_INTERNAL_ERROR ) is returned.

Returns: the alert code to use for a particular error code.


Next: , Previous: , Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications   [Contents][Index]

6.10 Priority strings

How to use Priority Strings

The GnuTLS priority strings specify the TLS session’s handshake algorithms and options in a compact, easy-to-use format. These strings are intended as a user-specified override of the library defaults.

That is, we recommend applications using the default settings (c.f. gnutls_set_default_priority or gnutls_set_default_priority_append), and provide the user with access to priority strings for overriding the default behavior, on configuration files, or other UI. Following such a principle, makes the GnuTLS library as the default settings provider. That is necessary and a good practice, because TLS protocol hardening and phasing out of legacy algorithms, is easier to coordinate when happens in a single library.

int gnutls_set_default_priority (gnutls_session_t session)
int gnutls_set_default_priority_append (gnutls_session_t session, const char * add_prio, const char ** err_pos, unsigned flags)
int gnutls_priority_set_direct (gnutls_session_t session, const char * priorities, const char ** err_pos)

The priority string translation to the internal GnuTLS form requires processing and the generated internal form also occupies some memory. For that, it is recommended to do that processing once in server side, and share the generated data across sessions. The following functions allow the generation of a "priority cache" and the sharing of it across sessions.

int gnutls_priority_init2 (gnutls_priority_t * priority_cache, const char * priorities, const char ** err_pos, unsigned flags)
int gnutls_priority_init (gnutls_priority_t * priority_cache, const char * priorities, const char ** err_pos)
int gnutls_priority_set (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_priority_t priority)
void gnutls_priority_deinit (gnutls_priority_t priority_cache)

Using Priority Strings

A priority string string may contain a single initial keyword such as in Table 6.3 and may be followed by additional algorithm or special keywords. Note that their description is intentionally avoiding specific algorithm details, as the priority strings are not constant between gnutls versions (they are periodically updated to account for cryptographic advances while providing compatibility with old clients and servers).

KeywordDescription
@KEYWORDMeans that a compile-time specified system configuration file (see System-wide configuration of the library) will be used to expand the provided keyword. That is used to impose system-specific policies. It may be followed by additional options that will be appended to the system string (e.g., "@SYSTEM:+SRP"). The system file should have the format ’KEYWORD=VALUE’, e.g., ’SYSTEM=NORMAL:+ARCFOUR-128’.

Since version 3.5.1 it is allowed to specify fallback keywords such as @KEYWORD1,@KEYWORD2, and the first valid keyword will be used.

PERFORMANCEAll the known to be secure ciphersuites are enabled, limited to 128 bit ciphers and sorted by terms of speed performance. The message authenticity security level is of 64 bits or more, and the certificate verification profile is set to GNUTLS_PROFILE_LOW (80-bits).
NORMALMeans all the known to be secure ciphersuites. The ciphers are sorted by security margin, although the 256-bit ciphers are included as a fallback only. The message authenticity security level is of 64 bits or more, and the certificate verification profile is set to GNUTLS_PROFILE_LOW (80-bits).

This priority string implicitly enables ECDHE and DHE. The ECDHE ciphersuites are placed first in the priority order, but due to compatibility issues with the DHE ciphersuites they are placed last in the priority order, after the plain RSA ciphersuites.

LEGACYThis sets the NORMAL settings that were used for GnuTLS 3.2.x or earlier. There is no verification profile set, and the allowed DH primes are considered weak today (but are often used by misconfigured servers).
PFSMeans all the known to be secure ciphersuites that support perfect forward secrecy (ECDHE and DHE). The ciphers are sorted by security margin, although the 256-bit ciphers are included as a fallback only. The message authenticity security level is of 80 bits or more, and the certificate verification profile is set to GNUTLS_PROFILE_LOW (80-bits). This option is available since 3.2.4 or later.
SECURE128Means all known to be secure ciphersuites that offer a security level 128-bit or more. The message authenticity security level is of 80 bits or more, and the certificate verification profile is set to GNUTLS_PROFILE_LOW (80-bits).
SECURE192Means all the known to be secure ciphersuites that offer a security level 192-bit or more. The message authenticity security level is of 128 bits or more, and the certificate verification profile is set to GNUTLS_PROFILE_HIGH (128-bits).
SECURE256Currently alias for SECURE192. This option, will enable ciphers which use a 256-bit key but, due to limitations of the TLS protocol, the overall security level will be 192-bits (the security level depends on more factors than cipher key size).
SUITEB128Means all the NSA Suite B cryptography (RFC5430) ciphersuites with an 128 bit security level, as well as the enabling of the corresponding verification profile.
SUITEB192Means all the NSA Suite B cryptography (RFC5430) ciphersuites with an 192 bit security level, as well as the enabling of the corresponding verification profile.
NONEMeans nothing is enabled. This disables even protocol versions. It should be followed by the algorithms to be enabled. Note that using this option to build a priority string gives detailed control into the resulting settings, however with new revisions of the TLS protocol new priority items are routinely added, and such strings are not forward compatible with new protocols. As such, we advice against using that option for applications targeting multiple versions of the GnuTLS library, and recommend using the defaults (see above) or adjusting the defaults via gnutls_set_default_priority_append.

Table 6.3: Supported initial keywords.

Unless the initial keyword is "NONE" the defaults (in preference order) are for TLS protocols TLS 1.2, TLS1.1, TLS1.0; for certificate types X.509. In key exchange algorithms when in NORMAL or SECURE levels the perfect forward secrecy algorithms take precedence of the other protocols. In all cases all the supported key exchange algorithms are enabled.

Note that the SECURE levels distinguish between overall security level and message authenticity security level. That is because the message authenticity security level requires the adversary to break the algorithms at real-time during the protocol run, whilst the overall security level refers to off-line adversaries (e.g. adversaries breaking the ciphertext years after it was captured).

The NONE keyword, if used, must followed by keywords specifying the algorithms and protocols to be enabled. The other initial keywords do not require, but may be followed by such keywords. All level keywords can be combined, and for example a level of "SECURE256:+SECURE128" is allowed.

The order with which every algorithm or protocol is specified is significant. Algorithms specified before others will take precedence. The supported in the GnuTLS version corresponding to this document algorithms and protocols are shown in Table 6.4; to list the supported algorithms in your currently using version use gnutls-cli -l.

To avoid collisions in order to specify a protocol version with "VERS-", signature algorithms with "SIGN-" and certificate types with "CTYPE-". All other algorithms don’t need a prefix. Each specified keyword (except for special keywords) can be prefixed with any of the following characters.

’!’ or ’-’

appended with an algorithm will remove this algorithm.

"+"

appended with an algorithm will add this algorithm.

TypeKeywords
CiphersExamples are AES-128-GCM, AES-256-GCM, AES-256-CBC, GOST28147-TC26Z-CNT; see also Table 3.1 for more options. Catch all name is CIPHER-ALL which will add all the algorithms from NORMAL priority. The shortcut for secure GOST algorithms is CIPHER-GOST-ALL.
Key exchangeRSA, RSA-PSK, RSA-EXPORT, DHE-RSA, DHE-DSS, SRP, SRP-RSA, SRP-DSS, PSK, DHE-PSK, ECDHE-PSK, ECDHE-RSA, ECDHE-ECDSA, VKO-GOST-12, ANON-ECDH, ANON-DH. Catch all name is KX-ALL which will add all the algorithms from NORMAL priority. Under TLS1.3, the DHE-PSK and ECDHE-PSK strings are equivalent and instruct for a Diffie-Hellman key exchange using the enabled groups. The shortcut for secure GOST algorithms is KX-GOST-ALL.
MACMD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, GOST28147-TC26Z-IMIT, AEAD (used with GCM ciphers only). All algorithms from NORMAL priority can be accessed with MAC-ALL. The shortcut for secure GOST algorithms is MAC-GOST-ALL.
Compression algorithmsCOMP-NULL, COMP-DEFLATE. Catch all is COMP-ALL.
TLS versionsVERS-TLS1.0, VERS-TLS1.1, VERS-TLS1.2, VERS-TLS1.3, VERS-DTLS0.9, VERS-DTLS1.0, VERS-DTLS1.2. Catch all are VERS-ALL, and will enable all protocols from NORMAL priority. To distinguish between TLS and DTLS versions you can use VERS-TLS-ALL and VERS-DTLS-ALL.
Signature algorithmsSIGN-RSA-SHA1, SIGN-RSA-SHA224, SIGN-RSA-SHA256, SIGN-RSA-SHA384, SIGN-RSA-SHA512, SIGN-DSA-SHA1, SIGN-DSA-SHA224, SIGN-DSA-SHA256, SIGN-RSA-MD5, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA1, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA224, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA256, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA384, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA512, SIGN-EdDSA-Ed25519, SIGN-EdDSA-Ed448, SIGN-RSA-PSS-SHA256, SIGN-RSA-PSS-SHA384, SIGN-RSA-PSS-SHA512, SIGN-GOSTR341001, SIGN-GOSTR341012-256, SIGN-GOSTR341012-512. Catch all which enables all algorithms from NORMAL priority is SIGN-ALL. Shortcut which enables secure GOST algorithms is SIGN-GOST-ALL. This option is only considered for TLS 1.2 and later.
GroupsGROUP-SECP192R1, GROUP-SECP224R1, GROUP-SECP256R1, GROUP-SECP384R1, GROUP-SECP521R1, GROUP-X25519, GROUP-X448, GROUP-GC256B, GROUP-GC512A, GROUP-FFDHE2048, GROUP-FFDHE3072, GROUP-FFDHE4096, GROUP-FFDHE6144, and GROUP-FFDHE8192. Groups include both elliptic curve groups, e.g., SECP256R1, as well as finite field groups such as FFDHE2048. Catch all which enables all groups from NORMAL priority is GROUP-ALL. The helper keywords GROUP-DH-ALL, GROUP-GOST-ALL and GROUP-EC-ALL are also available, restricting the groups to finite fields (DH), GOST curves and generic elliptic curves.
Elliptic curves (legacy)CURVE-SECP192R1, CURVE-SECP224R1, CURVE-SECP256R1, CURVE-SECP384R1, CURVE-SECP521R1, CURVE-X25519, and CURVE-X448. Catch all which enables all curves from NORMAL priority is CURVE-ALL. Note that the CURVE keyword is kept for backwards compatibility only, for new applications see the GROUP keyword above.
Certificate typesCertificate types can be given in a symmetric fashion (i.e. the same for both client and server) or, as of GnuTLS 3.6.4, in an asymmetric fashion (i.e. different for the client than for the server). Alternative certificate types must be explicitly enabled via flags in gnutls_init.

The currently supported types are CTYPE-X509, CTYPE-RAWPK which apply both to client and server; catch all is CTYPE-ALL. The types CTYPE-CLI-X509, CTYPE-SRV-X509, CTYPE-CLI-RAWPK, CTYPE-SRV-RAWPK can be used to specialize on client or server; catch all is CTYPE-CLI-ALL and CTYPE-SRV-ALL. The type ’X509’ is aliased to ’X.509’ for legacy reasons.

GenericThe keyword GOST is a shortcut for secure GOST algorithms (MACs, ciphers, KXes, groups and signatures). For example the following string will enable all TLS 1.2 GOST ciphersuites: ’NONE:+VERS-TLS1.2:+GOST’.

Table 6.4: The supported algorithm keywords in priority strings.

Note that the finite field groups (indicated by the FFDHE prefix) and DHE key exchange methods are generally slower20 than their elliptic curves counterpart (ECDHE).

The available special keywords are shown in Table 6.5 and Table 6.6.

KeywordDescription
%COMPATwill enable compatibility mode. It might mean that violations of the protocols are allowed as long as maximum compatibility with problematic clients and servers is achieved. More specifically this string will tolerate packets over the maximum allowed TLS record, and add a padding to TLS Client Hello packet to prevent it being in the 256-512 range which is known to be causing issues with a commonly used firewall (see the %DUMBFW option).
%DUMBFWwill add a private extension with bogus data that make the client hello exceed 512 bytes. This avoids a black hole behavior in some firewalls. This is the [RFC7685] client hello padding extension, also enabled with %COMPAT.
%NO_EXTENSIONSwill prevent the sending of any TLS extensions in client side. Note that TLS 1.2 requires extensions to be used, as well as safe renegotiation thus this option must be used with care. When this option is set no versions later than TLS1.2 can be negotiated.
%NO_SHUFFLE_EXTENSIONSwill prevent randomizing the order of ClientHello extensions. By default, those extensions are randomized to make fingerprinting harder.
%NO_STATUS_REQUESTwill prevent sending of the TLS status_request extension in client side.
%NO_TICKETSwill prevent the advertizing of the TLS session ticket extension.
%NO_TICKETS_TLS12will prevent the advertizing of the TLS session ticket extension in TLS 1.2. This is implied by the PFS keyword.
%NO_SESSION_HASHwill prevent the advertizing the TLS extended master secret (session hash) extension.
%FORCE_SESSION_HASHnegotiate the TLS extended master secret (session hash) extension. Specifying both %NO_SESSION_HASH and %FORCE_SESSION_HASH is not supported, and the behavior is undefined.
%SERVER_PRECEDENCEThe ciphersuite will be selected according to server priorities and not the client’s.
%SSL3_RECORD_VERSIONwill use SSL3.0 record version in client hello. By default GnuTLS will set the minimum supported version as the client hello record version (do not confuse that version with the proposed handshake version at the client hello).
%LATEST_RECORD_VERSIONwill use the latest TLS version record version in client hello.

Table 6.5: Special priority string keywords.

KeywordDescription
%STATELESS_COMPRESSIONignored; no longer used.
%DISABLE_WILDCARDSwill disable matching wildcards when comparing hostnames in certificates.
%NO_ETMwill disable the encrypt-then-mac TLS extension (RFC7366). This is implied by the %COMPAT keyword.
%FORCE_ETMnegotiate CBC ciphersuites only when both sides of the connection support encrypt-then-mac TLS extension (RFC7366).
%DISABLE_SAFE_RENEGOTIATIONwill completely disable safe renegotiation. Do not use unless you know what you are doing.
%UNSAFE_RENEGOTIATIONwill allow handshakes and re-handshakes without the safe renegotiation extension. Note that for clients this mode is insecure (you may be under attack), and for servers it will allow insecure clients to connect (which could be fooled by an attacker). Do not use unless you know what you are doing and want maximum compatibility.
%PARTIAL_RENEGOTIATIONwill allow initial handshakes to proceed, but not re-handshakes. This leaves the client vulnerable to attack, and servers will be compatible with non-upgraded clients for initial handshakes. This is currently the default for clients and servers, for compatibility reasons.
%SAFE_RENEGOTIATIONwill enforce safe renegotiation. Clients and servers will refuse to talk to an insecure peer. Currently this causes interoperability problems, but is required for full protection.
%FALLBACK_SCSVwill enable the use of the fallback signaling cipher suite value in the client hello. Note that this should be set only by applications that try to reconnect with a downgraded protocol version. See RFC7507 for details.
%DISABLE_TLS13_COMPAT_MODEwill disable TLS 1.3 middlebox compatibility mode (RFC8446, Appendix D.4) for non-compliant middleboxes.
%VERIFY_ALLOW_BROKENwill allow signatures with known to be broken algorithms (such as MD5 or SHA1) in certificate chains.
%VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_RSA_MD5will allow RSA-MD5 signatures in certificate chains.
%VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_WITH_SHA1will allow signatures with SHA1 hash algorithm in certificate chains.
%VERIFY_DISABLE_CRL_CHECKSwill disable CRL or OCSP checks in the verification of the certificate chain.
%VERIFY_ALLOW_X509_V1_CA_CRTwill allow V1 CAs in chains.
%PROFILE_(LOW|LEGACY|MEDIUM|HIGH|ULTRA|FUTURE)require a certificate verification profile the corresponds to the specified security level, see Table 6.7 for the mappings to values.
%PROFILE_(SUITEB128|SUITEB192)require a certificate verification profile the corresponds to SUITEB. Note that an initial keyword that enables SUITEB automatically sets the profile.

Table 6.6: More priority string keywords.

Finally the ciphersuites enabled by any priority string can be listed using the gnutls-cli application (see gnutls-cli Invocation), or by using the priority functions as in Listing the ciphersuites in a priority string.

Example priority strings are:

The system imposed security level:
    "SYSTEM"

The default priority without the HMAC-MD5:
    "NORMAL:-MD5"

Specifying RSA with AES-128-CBC:
    "NONE:+VERS-TLS-ALL:+MAC-ALL:+RSA:+AES-128-CBC:+SIGN-ALL:+COMP-NULL"

Specifying the defaults plus ARCFOUR-128:
    "NORMAL:+ARCFOUR-128"

Enabling the 128-bit secure ciphers, while disabling TLS 1.0:
    "SECURE128:-VERS-TLS1.0"

Enabling the 128-bit and 192-bit secure ciphers, while disabling all TLS versions
except TLS 1.2:
    "SECURE128:+SECURE192:-VERS-ALL:+VERS-TLS1.2"

Next: , Previous: , Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications   [Contents][Index]

6.11 Selecting cryptographic key sizes

Because many algorithms are involved in TLS, it is not easy to set a consistent security level. For this reason in Table 6.7 we present some correspondence between key sizes of symmetric algorithms and public key algorithms based on [ECRYPT]. Those can be used to generate certificates with appropriate key sizes as well as select parameters for Diffie-Hellman and SRP authentication.

Security bitsRSA, DH and SRP parameter sizeECC key sizeSecurity parameter (profile)Description
<64<768<128INSECUREConsidered to be insecure
64768128VERY WEAKShort term protection against individuals
721008160WEAKShort term protection against small organizations
801024160LOWVery short term protection against agencies (corresponds to ENISA legacy level)
961776192LEGACYLegacy standard level
1122048224MEDIUMMedium-term protection
1283072256HIGHLong term protection (corresponds to ENISA future level)
1928192384ULTRAEven longer term protection
25615424512FUTUREForeseeable future

Table 6.7: Key sizes and security parameters.

The first column provides a security parameter in a number of bits. This gives an indication of the number of combinations to be tried by an adversary to brute force a key. For example to test all possible keys in a 112 bit security parameter 2^{112} combinations have to be tried. For today’s technology this is infeasible. The next two columns correlate the security parameter with actual bit sizes of parameters for DH, RSA, SRP and ECC algorithms. A mapping to gnutls_sec_param_t value is given for each security parameter, on the next column, and finally a brief description of the level.

Note, however, that the values suggested here are nothing more than an educated guess that is valid today. There are no guarantees that an algorithm will remain unbreakable or that these values will remain constant in time. There could be scientific breakthroughs that cannot be predicted or total failure of the current public key systems by quantum computers. On the other hand though the cryptosystems used in TLS are selected in a conservative way and such catastrophic breakthroughs or failures are believed to be unlikely. The NIST publication SP 800-57 [NISTSP80057] contains a similar table.

When using GnuTLS and a decision on bit sizes for a public key algorithm is required, use of the following functions is recommended:

Function: unsigned int gnutls_sec_param_to_pk_bits (gnutls_pk_algorithm_t algo, gnutls_sec_param_t param)

algo: is a public key algorithm

param: is a security parameter

When generating private and public key pairs a difficult question is which size of "bits" the modulus will be in RSA and the group size in DSA. The easy answer is 1024, which is also wrong. This function will convert a human understandable security parameter to an appropriate size for the specific algorithm.

Returns: The number of bits, or (0).

Since: 2.12.0

Function: gnutls_sec_param_t gnutls_pk_bits_to_sec_param (gnutls_pk_algorithm_t algo, unsigned int bits)

algo: is a public key algorithm

bits: is the number of bits

This is the inverse of gnutls_sec_param_to_pk_bits() . Given an algorithm and the number of bits, it will return the security parameter. This is a rough indication.

Returns: The security parameter.

Since: 2.12.0

Those functions will convert a human understandable security parameter of gnutls_sec_param_t type, to a number of bits suitable for a public key algorithm.

const char * gnutls_sec_param_get_name (gnutls_sec_param_t param)

The following functions will set the minimum acceptable group size for Diffie-Hellman and SRP authentication.

void gnutls_dh_set_prime_bits (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int bits)
void gnutls_srp_set_prime_bits (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int bits)

Previous: , Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications   [Contents][Index]

6.12 Advanced topics


Next: , Up: Advanced topics   [Contents][Index]

6.12.1 Virtual hosts and credentials

Often when operating with virtual hosts, one may not want to associate a particular certificate set to the credentials function early, before the virtual host is known. That can be achieved by calling gnutls_credentials_set within a handshake pre-hook for client hello. That message contains the peer’s intended hostname, and if read, and the appropriate credentials are set, gnutls will be able to continue in the handshake process. A brief usage example is shown below.

static int ext_hook_func(void *ctx, unsigned tls_id,
                         const unsigned char *data, unsigned size)
{
	if (tls_id == 0) { /* server name */
		/* figure the advertised name - the following hack
                 * relies on the fact that this extension only supports
                 * DNS names, and due to a protocol bug cannot be extended
                 * to support anything else. */
		if (name < 5) return 0;
		name = data+5;
		name_size = size-5;
	}
	return 0;
}

static int
handshake_hook_func(gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int htype,
                    unsigned when, unsigned int incoming, const gnutls_datum_t *msg)
{
    int ret;

    assert(htype == GNUTLS_HANDSHAKE_CLIENT_HELLO);
    assert(when == GNUTLS_HOOK_PRE);

    ret = gnutls_ext_raw_parse(NULL, ext_hook_func, msg,
                               GNUTLS_EXT_RAW_FLAG_TLS_CLIENT_HELLO);
    assert(ret >= 0);

    gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, cred);

    return ret;
}

int main(void)
{
  ...

  gnutls_handshake_set_hook_function(server, GNUTLS_HANDSHAKE_CLIENT_HELLO,
                                     GNUTLS_HOOK_PRE, handshake_hook_func);
  ...
}
Function: void gnutls_handshake_set_hook_function (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int htype, int when, gnutls_handshake_hook_func func)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type

htype: the gnutls_handshake_description_t of the message to hook at

when: GNUTLS_HOOK_ * depending on when the hook function should be called

func: is the function to be called

This function will set a callback to be called after or before the specified handshake message has been received or generated. This is a generalization of gnutls_handshake_set_post_client_hello_function() .

To call the hook function prior to the message being generated or processed use GNUTLS_HOOK_PRE as when parameter, GNUTLS_HOOK_POST to call after, and GNUTLS_HOOK_BOTH for both cases.

This callback must return 0 on success or a gnutls error code to terminate the handshake.

To hook at all handshake messages use an htype of GNUTLS_HANDSHAKE_ANY .

Warning: You should not use this function to terminate the handshake based on client input unless you know what you are doing. Before the handshake is finished there is no way to know if there is a man-in-the-middle attack being performed.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Advanced topics   [Contents][Index]

6.12.2 Session resumption

To reduce time and network traffic spent in a handshake the client can request session resumption from a server that previously shared a session with the client.

Under TLS 1.2, in order to support resumption a server can either store the session security parameters in a local database or use session tickets (see Session tickets) to delegate storage to the client.

Under TLS 1.3, session resumption is only available through session tickets, and multiple tickets could be sent from server to client. That provides the following advantages:

Client side

The client has to retrieve and store the session parameters. Before establishing a new session to the same server the parameters must be re-associated with the GnuTLS session using gnutls_session_set_data.

int gnutls_session_get_data2 (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_session_set_data (gnutls_session_t session, const void * session_data, size_t session_data_size)

Keep in mind that sessions will be expired after some time, depending on the server, and a server may choose not to resume a session even when requested to. The expiration is to prevent temporal session keys from becoming long-term keys. Also note that as a client you must enable, using the priority functions, at least the algorithms used in the last session.

Function: int gnutls_session_is_resumed (gnutls_session_t session)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

Checks whether session is resumed or not. This is functional for both server and client side.

Returns: non zero if this session is resumed, or a zero if this is a new session.

Function: int gnutls_session_get_id2 (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_datum_t * session_id)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

session_id: will point to the session ID.

Returns the TLS session identifier. The session ID is selected by the server, and in older versions of TLS was a unique identifier shared between client and server which was persistent across resumption. In the latest version of TLS (1.3) or TLS 1.2 with session tickets, the notion of session identifiers is undefined and cannot be relied for uniquely identifying sessions across client and server.

In client side this function returns the identifier returned by the server, and cannot be assumed to have any relation to session resumption. In server side this function is guaranteed to return a persistent identifier of the session since GnuTLS 3.6.4, which may not necessarily map into the TLS session ID value. Prior to that version the value could only be considered a persistent identifier, under TLS1.2 or earlier and when no session tickets were in use.

The session identifier value returned is always less than GNUTLS_MAX_SESSION_ID_SIZE and should be treated as constant.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise an error code is returned.

Since: 3.1.4

Server side

A server enabling both session tickets and a storage for session data would use session tickets when clients support it and the storage otherwise.

A storing server needs to specify callback functions to store, retrieve and delete session data. These can be registered with the functions below. The stored sessions in the database can be checked using gnutls_db_check_entry for expiration.

void gnutls_db_set_retrieve_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_db_retr_func retr_func)
void gnutls_db_set_store_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_db_store_func store_func)
void gnutls_db_set_ptr (gnutls_session_t session, void * ptr)
void gnutls_db_set_remove_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_db_remove_func rem_func)
int gnutls_db_check_entry (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_datum_t session_entry)

A server supporting session tickets must generate ticket encryption and authentication keys using gnutls_session_ticket_key_generate. Those keys should be associated with the GnuTLS session using gnutls_session_ticket_enable_server.

Those will be the initial keys, but GnuTLS will rotate them regularly. The key rotation interval can be changed with gnutls_db_set_cache_expiration and will be set to three times the ticket expiration time (ie. three times the value given in that function). Every such interval, new keys will be generated from those initial keys. This is a necessary mechanism to prevent the keys from becoming long-term keys and as such preserve forward-secrecy in the issued session tickets. If no explicit key rotation interval is provided, GnuTLS will rotate them every 18 hours by default.

The master key can be shared between processes or between systems. Processes which share the same master key will generate the same rotated subkeys, assuming they share the same time (irrespective of timezone differences).

Function: int gnutls_session_ticket_enable_server (gnutls_session_t session, const gnutls_datum_t * key)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

key: key to encrypt session parameters.

Request that the server should attempt session resumption using session tickets, i.e., by delegating storage to the client. key must be initialized using gnutls_session_ticket_key_generate() . To avoid leaking that key, use gnutls_memset() prior to releasing it.

The default ticket expiration time can be overridden using gnutls_db_set_cache_expiration() .

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, or an error code.

Since: 2.10.0

Function: int gnutls_session_ticket_key_generate (gnutls_datum_t * key)

key: is a pointer to a gnutls_datum_t which will contain a newly created key.

Generate a random key to encrypt security parameters within SessionTicket.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, or an error code.

Since: 2.10.0

Function: int gnutls_session_resumption_requested (gnutls_session_t session)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

Check whether the client has asked for session resumption. This function is valid only on server side.

Returns: non zero if session resumption was asked, or a zero if not.

The expiration time for session resumption, either in tickets or stored data is set using gnutls_db_set_cache_expiration. This function also controls the ticket key rotation period. Currently, the session key rotation interval is set to 3 times the expiration time set by this function.

Under TLS 1.3, the server sends by default 2 tickets, and can send additional session tickets at any time using gnutls_session_ticket_send.

Function: int gnutls_session_ticket_send (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned nr, unsigned flags)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

nr: the number of tickets to send

flags: must be zero

Sends a fresh session ticket to the peer. This is relevant only in server side under TLS1.3. This function may also return GNUTLS_E_AGAIN or GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED and in that case it must be called again.

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS on success, or a negative error code.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Advanced topics   [Contents][Index]

6.12.3 Certificate verification

In this section the functionality for additional certificate verification methods is listed. These methods are intended to be used in addition to normal PKI verification, in order to reduce the risk of a compromised CA being undetected.

6.12.3.1 Trust on first use

The GnuTLS library includes functionality to use an SSH-like trust on first use authentication. The available functions to store and verify public keys are listed below.

Function: int gnutls_verify_stored_pubkey (const char * db_name, gnutls_tdb_t tdb, const char * host, const char * service, gnutls_certificate_type_t cert_type, const gnutls_datum_t * cert, unsigned int flags)

db_name: A file specifying the stored keys (use NULL for the default)

tdb: A storage structure or NULL to use the default

host: The peer’s name

service: non-NULL if this key is specific to a service (e.g. http)

cert_type: The type of the certificate

cert: The raw (der) data of the certificate

flags: should be 0.

This function will try to verify a raw public-key or a public-key provided via a raw (DER-encoded) certificate using a list of stored public keys. The service field if non-NULL should be a port number.

The db_name variable if non-null specifies a custom backend for the retrieval of entries. If it is NULL then the default file backend will be used. In POSIX-like systems the file backend uses the $HOME/.gnutls/known_hosts file.

Note that if the custom storage backend is provided the retrieval function should return GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_KEY_MISMATCH if the host/service pair is found but key doesn’t match, GNUTLS_E_NO_CERTIFICATE_FOUND if no such host/service with the given key is found, and 0 if it was found. The storage function should return 0 on success.

As of GnuTLS 3.6.6 this function also verifies raw public keys.

Returns: If no associated public key is found then GNUTLS_E_NO_CERTIFICATE_FOUND will be returned. If a key is found but does not match GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_KEY_MISMATCH is returned. On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, or a negative error value on other errors.

Since: 3.0.13

Function: int gnutls_store_pubkey (const char * db_name, gnutls_tdb_t tdb, const char * host, const char * service, gnutls_certificate_type_t cert_type, const gnutls_datum_t * cert, time_t expiration, unsigned int flags)

db_name: A file specifying the stored keys (use NULL for the default)

tdb: A storage structure or NULL to use the default

host: The peer’s name

service: non-NULL if this key is specific to a service (e.g. http)

cert_type: The type of the certificate

cert: The data of the certificate

expiration: The expiration time (use 0 to disable expiration)

flags: should be 0.

This function will store a raw public-key or a public-key provided via a raw (DER-encoded) certificate to the list of stored public keys. The key will be considered valid until the provided expiration time.

The tdb variable if non-null specifies a custom backend for the storage of entries. If it is NULL then the default file backend will be used.

Unless an alternative tdb is provided, the storage format is a textual format consisting of a line for each host with fields separated by ’|’. The contents of the fields are a format-identifier which is set to ’g0’, the hostname that the rest of the data applies to, the numeric port or host name, the expiration time in seconds since the epoch (0 for no expiration), and a base64 encoding of the raw (DER) public key information (SPKI) of the peer.

As of GnuTLS 3.6.6 this function also accepts raw public keys.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.0.13

In addition to the above the gnutls_store_commitment can be used to implement a key-pinning architecture as in [KEYPIN]. This provides a way for web server to commit on a public key that is not yet active.

Function: int gnutls_store_commitment (const char * db_name, gnutls_tdb_t tdb, const char * host, const char * service, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t hash_algo, const gnutls_datum_t * hash, time_t expiration, unsigned int flags)

db_name: A file specifying the stored keys (use NULL for the default)

tdb: A storage structure or NULL to use the default

host: The peer’s name

service: non-NULL if this key is specific to a service (e.g. http)

hash_algo: The hash algorithm type

hash: The raw hash

expiration: The expiration time (use 0 to disable expiration)

flags: should be 0 or GNUTLS_SCOMMIT_FLAG_ALLOW_BROKEN .

This function will store the provided hash commitment to the list of stored public keys. The key with the given hash will be considered valid until the provided expiration time.

The tdb variable if non-null specifies a custom backend for the storage of entries. If it is NULL then the default file backend will be used.

Note that this function is not thread safe with the default backend.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.0

The storage and verification functions may be used with the default text file based back-end, or another back-end may be specified. That should contain storage and retrieval functions and specified as below.

int gnutls_tdb_init (gnutls_tdb_t * tdb)
void gnutls_tdb_deinit (gnutls_tdb_t tdb)
void gnutls_tdb_set_verify_func (gnutls_tdb_t tdb, gnutls_tdb_verify_func verify)
void gnutls_tdb_set_store_func (gnutls_tdb_t tdb, gnutls_tdb_store_func store)
void gnutls_tdb_set_store_commitment_func (gnutls_tdb_t tdb, gnutls_tdb_store_commitment_func cstore)

6.12.3.2 DANE verification

Since the DANE library is not included in GnuTLS it requires programs to be linked against it. This can be achieved with the following commands.

gcc -o foo foo.c `pkg-config gnutls-dane --cflags --libs`

When a program uses the GNU autoconf system, then the following line or similar can be used to detect the presence of the library.

PKG_CHECK_MODULES([LIBDANE], [gnutls-dane >= 3.0.0])

AC_SUBST([LIBDANE_CFLAGS])
AC_SUBST([LIBDANE_LIBS])

The high level functionality provided by the DANE library is shown below.

Function: int dane_verify_crt (dane_state_t s, const gnutls_datum_t * chain, unsigned chain_size, gnutls_certificate_type_t chain_type, const char * hostname, const char * proto, unsigned int port, unsigned int sflags, unsigned int vflags, unsigned int * verify)

s: A DANE state structure (may be NULL)

chain: A certificate chain

chain_size: The size of the chain

chain_type: The type of the certificate chain

hostname: The hostname associated with the chain

proto: The protocol of the service connecting (e.g. tcp)

port: The port of the service connecting (e.g. 443)

sflags: Flags for the initialization of s (if NULL)

vflags: Verification flags; an OR’ed list of dane_verify_flags_t .

verify: An OR’ed list of dane_verify_status_t .

This function will verify the given certificate chain against the CA constrains and/or the certificate available via DANE. If no information via DANE can be obtained the flag DANE_VERIFY_NO_DANE_INFO is set. If a DNSSEC signature is not available for the DANE record then the verify flag DANE_VERIFY_NO_DNSSEC_DATA is set.

Due to the many possible options of DANE, there is no single threat model countered. When notifying the user about DANE verification results it may be better to mention: DANE verification did not reject the certificate, rather than mentioning a successful DANE verification.

Note that this function is designed to be run in addition to PKIX - certificate chain - verification. To be run independently the DANE_VFLAG_ONLY_CHECK_EE_USAGE flag should be specified; then the function will check whether the key of the peer matches the key advertised in the DANE entry.

Returns: a negative error code on error and DANE_E_SUCCESS (0) when the DANE entries were successfully parsed, irrespective of whether they were verified (see verify for that information). If no usable entries were encountered DANE_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE will be returned.

int dane_verify_session_crt (dane_state_t s, gnutls_session_t session, const char * hostname, const char * proto, unsigned int port, unsigned int sflags, unsigned int vflags, unsigned int * verify)
const char * dane_strerror (int error)

Note that the dane_state_t structure that is accepted by both verification functions is optional. It is required when many queries are performed to optimize against multiple re-initializations of the resolving back-end and loading of DNSSEC keys.

The following flags are returned by the verify functions to indicate the status of the verification.

DANE_VERIFY_CA_CONSTRAINTS_VIOLATED

The CA constraints were violated.

DANE_VERIFY_CERT_DIFFERS

The certificate obtained via DNS differs.

DANE_VERIFY_UNKNOWN_DANE_INFO

No known DANE data was found in the DNS record.

Figure 6.3: The DANE verification status flags.

In order to generate a DANE TLSA entry to use in a DNS server you may use danetool (see danetool Invocation).


Next: , Previous: , Up: Advanced topics   [Contents][Index]

6.12.4 TLS 1.2 re-authentication

In TLS 1.2 or earlier there is no distinction between re-key, re-authentication, and re-negotiation. All of these use cases are handled by the TLS’ rehandshake process. For that reason in GnuTLS rehandshake is not transparent to the application, and the application must explicitly take control of that process. In addition GnuTLS since version 3.5.0 will not allow the peer to switch identities during a rehandshake. The threat addressed by that behavior depends on the application protocol, but primarily it protects applications from being misled by a rehandshake which switches the peer’s identity. Applications can disable this protection by using the GNUTLS_ALLOW_ID_CHANGE flag in gnutls_init.

The following paragraphs explain how to safely use the rehandshake process.

6.12.4.1 Client side

According to the TLS specification a client may initiate a rehandshake at any time. That can be achieved by calling gnutls_handshake and rely on its return value for the outcome of the handshake (the server may deny a rehandshake). If a server requests a re-handshake, then a call to gnutls_record_recv will return GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE in the client, instructing it to call gnutls_handshake. To deny a rehandshake request by the server it is recommended to send a warning alert of type GNUTLS_A_NO_RENEGOTIATION.

Due to limitations of early protocol versions, it is required to check whether safe renegotiation is in place, i.e., using gnutls_safe_renegotiation_status, which ensures that the server remains the same as the initial.

To make re-authentication transparent to the application when requested by the server, use the GNUTLS_AUTO_REAUTH flag on the gnutls_init call. In that case the re-authentication will happen in the call of gnutls_record_recv that received the reauthentication request.

Function: unsigned gnutls_safe_renegotiation_status (gnutls_session_t session)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

Can be used to check whether safe renegotiation is being used in the current session.

Returns: 0 when safe renegotiation is not used and non (0) when safe renegotiation is used.

Since: 2.10.0

6.12.4.2 Server side

A server which wants to instruct the client to re-authenticate, should call gnutls_rehandshake and wait for the client to re-authenticate. It is recommended to only request re-handshake when safe renegotiation is enabled for that session (see gnutls_safe_renegotiation_status and the discussion in Safe renegotiation). A server could also encounter the GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE error code while receiving data. That indicates a client-initiated re-handshake request. In that case the server could ignore that request, perform handshake (unsafe when done generally), or even drop the connection.

Function: int gnutls_rehandshake (gnutls_session_t session)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

This function can only be called in server side, and instructs a TLS 1.2 or earlier client to renegotiate parameters (perform a handshake), by sending a hello request message.

If this function succeeds, the calling application should call gnutls_record_recv() until GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE is returned to clear any pending data. If the GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE error code is not seen, then the handshake request was not followed by the peer (the TLS protocol does not require the client to do, and such compliance should be handled by the application protocol).

Once the GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE error code is seen, the calling application should proceed to calling gnutls_handshake() to negotiate the new parameters.

If the client does not wish to renegotiate parameters he may reply with an alert message, and in that case the return code seen by subsequent gnutls_record_recv() will be GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED with the specific alert being GNUTLS_A_NO_RENEGOTIATION . A client may also choose to ignore this request.

Under TLS 1.3 this function is equivalent to gnutls_session_key_update() with the GNUTLS_KU_PEER flag. In that case subsequent calls to gnutls_record_recv() will not return GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE , and calls to gnutls_handshake() in server side are a no-op.

This function always fails with GNUTLS_E_INVALID_REQUEST when called in client side.

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS on success, otherwise a negative error code.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Advanced topics   [Contents][Index]

6.12.5 TLS 1.3 re-authentication and re-key

The TLS 1.3 protocol distinguishes between re-key and re-authentication. The re-key process ensures that fresh keys are supplied to the already negotiated parameters, and on GnuTLS can be initiated using gnutls_session_key_update. The re-key process can be one-way (i.e., the calling party only changes its keys), or two-way where the peer is requested to change keys as well.

The re-authentication process, allows the connected client to switch identity by presenting a new certificate. Unlike TLS 1.2, the server is not allowed to change identities. That client re-authentication, or post-handshake authentication can be initiated only by the server using gnutls_reauth, and only if a client has advertised support for it. Both server and client have to explicitly enable support for post handshake authentication using the GNUTLS_POST_HANDSHAKE_AUTH flag at gnutls_init.

A client receiving a re-authentication request will "see" the error code GNUTLS_E_REAUTH_REQUEST at gnutls_record_recv. At this point, it should also call gnutls_reauth.

To make re-authentication transparent to the application when requested by the server, use the GNUTLS_AUTO_REAUTH and GNUTLS_POST_HANDSHAKE_AUTH flags on the gnutls_init call. In that case the re-authentication will happen in the call of gnutls_record_recv that received the reauthentication request.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Advanced topics   [Contents][Index]

6.12.6 Parameter generation

Prior to GnuTLS 3.6.0 for the ephemeral or anonymous Diffie-Hellman (DH) TLS ciphersuites the application was required to generate or provide DH parameters. That is no longer necessary as GnuTLS utilizes DH parameters and negotiation from [RFC7919].

Applications can tune the used parameters by explicitly specifying them in the priority string. In server side applications can set the minimum acceptable level of DH parameters by calling gnutls_certificate_set_known_dh_params, gnutls_anon_set_server_known_dh_params, or gnutls_psk_set_server_known_dh_params, depending on the type of the credentials, to set the lower acceptable parameter limits. Typical applications should rely on the default settings.

int gnutls_certificate_set_known_dh_params (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, gnutls_sec_param_t sec_param)
int gnutls_anon_set_server_known_dh_params (gnutls_anon_server_credentials_t res, gnutls_sec_param_t sec_param)
int gnutls_psk_set_server_known_dh_params (gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t res, gnutls_sec_param_t sec_param)

6.12.6.1 Legacy parameter generation

Note that older than 3.5.6 versions of GnuTLS provided functions to generate or import arbitrary DH parameters from a file. This practice is still supported but discouraged in current versions. There is no known advantage from using random parameters, while there have been several occasions where applications were utilizing incorrect, weak or insecure parameters. This is the main reason GnuTLS includes the well-known parameters of [RFC7919] and recommends applications utilizing them.

In older applications which require to specify explicit DH parameters, we recommend using certtool (of GnuTLS 3.5.6 or later) with the --get-dh-params option to obtain the FFDHE parameters discussed above. The output parameters of the tool are in PKCS#3 format and can be imported by most existing applications.

The following functions are still supported but considered obsolete.

int gnutls_dh_params_generate2 (gnutls_dh_params_t dparams, unsigned int bits)
int gnutls_dh_params_import_pkcs3 (gnutls_dh_params_t params, const gnutls_datum_t * pkcs3_params, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format)
void gnutls_certificate_set_dh_params (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, gnutls_dh_params_t dh_params)

Next: , Previous: , Up: Advanced topics   [Contents][Index]

6.12.7 Deriving keys for other applications/protocols

In several cases, after a TLS connection is established, it is desirable to derive keys to be used in another application or protocol (e.g., in an other TLS session using pre-shared keys). The following describe GnuTLS’ implementation of RFC5705 to extract keys based on a session’s master secret.

The API to use is gnutls_prf_rfc5705. The function needs to be provided with a label, and additional context data to mix in the context parameter.

Function: int gnutls_prf_rfc5705 (gnutls_session_t session, size_t label_size, const char * label, size_t context_size, const char * context, size_t outsize, char * out)

session: is a gnutls_session_t type.

label_size: length of the label variable.

label: label used in PRF computation, typically a short string.

context_size: length of the extra variable.

context: optional extra data to seed the PRF with.

outsize: size of pre-allocated output buffer to hold the output.

out: pre-allocated buffer to hold the generated data.

Exports keying material from TLS/DTLS session to an application, as specified in RFC5705.

In the TLS versions prior to 1.3, it applies the TLS Pseudo-Random-Function (PRF) on the master secret and the provided data, seeded with the client and server random fields.

In TLS 1.3, it applies HKDF on the exporter master secret derived from the master secret.

The label variable usually contains a string denoting the purpose for the generated data.

The context variable can be used to add more data to the seed, after the random variables. It can be used to make sure the generated output is strongly connected to some additional data (e.g., a string used in user authentication).

The output is placed in out , which must be pre-allocated.

Note that, to provide the RFC5705 context, the context variable must be non-null.

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS on success, or an error code.

Since: 3.4.4

For example, after establishing a TLS session using gnutls_handshake, you can obtain 32-bytes to be used as key, using this call:

#define MYLABEL "EXPORTER-My-protocol-name"
#define MYCONTEXT "my-protocol's-1st-session"

char out[32];
rc = gnutls_prf_rfc5705 (session, sizeof(MYLABEL)-1, MYLABEL,
                         sizeof(MYCONTEXT)-1, MYCONTEXT, 32, out);

The output key depends on TLS’ master secret, and is the same on both client and server.

For legacy applications which need to use a more flexible API, there is gnutls_prf, which in addition, allows to switch the mix of the client and server random nonces, using the server_random_first parameter. For additional flexibility and low-level access to the TLS1.2 PRF, there is a low-level TLS PRF interface called gnutls_prf_raw. That however is not functional under newer protocol versions.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Advanced topics   [Contents][Index]

6.12.8 Channel bindings

In user authentication protocols (e.g., EAP or SASL mechanisms) it is useful to have a unique string that identifies the secure channel that is used, to bind together the user authentication with the secure channel. This can protect against man-in-the-middle attacks in some situations. That unique string is called a “channel binding”. For background and discussion see [RFC5056].

In GnuTLS you can extract a channel binding using the gnutls_session_channel_binding function. Currently only the following types are supported:

The following example describes how to print the channel binding data. Note that it must be run after a successful TLS handshake.

{
  gnutls_datum_t cb;
  int rc;

  rc = gnutls_session_channel_binding (session,
                                       GNUTLS_CB_TLS_UNIQUE,
                                       &cb);
  if (rc)
    fprintf (stderr, "Channel binding error: %s\n",
             gnutls_strerror (rc));
  else
    {
      size_t i;
      printf ("- Channel binding 'tls-unique': ");
      for (i = 0; i < cb.size; i++)
        printf ("%02x", cb.data[i]);
      printf ("\n");
    }
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: Advanced topics   [Contents][Index]

6.12.9 Interoperability

The TLS protocols support many ciphersuites, extensions and version numbers. As a result, few implementations are not able to properly interoperate once faced with extensions or version protocols they do not support and understand. The TLS protocol allows for a graceful downgrade to the commonly supported options, but practice shows it is not always implemented correctly.

Because there is no way to achieve maximum interoperability with broken peers without sacrificing security, GnuTLS ignores such peers by default. This might not be acceptable in cases where maximum compatibility is required. Thus we allow enabling compatibility with broken peers using priority strings (see Priority Strings). A conservative priority string that would disable certain TLS protocol options that are known to cause compatibility problems, is shown below.

NORMAL:%COMPAT

For very old broken peers that do not tolerate TLS version numbers over TLS 1.0 another priority string is:

NORMAL:-VERS-ALL:+VERS-TLS1.0:+VERS-SSL3.0:%COMPAT

This priority string will in addition to above, only enable SSL 3.0 and TLS 1.0 as protocols.


Previous: , Up: Advanced topics   [Contents][Index]

6.12.10 Compatibility with the OpenSSL library

To ease GnuTLS’ integration with existing applications, a compatibility layer with the OpenSSL library is included in the gnutls-openssl library. This compatibility layer is not complete and it is not intended to completely re-implement the OpenSSL API with GnuTLS. It only provides limited source-level compatibility.

The prototypes for the compatibility functions are in the gnutls/openssl.h header file. The limitations imposed by the compatibility layer include:


Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

7 GnuTLS application examples

In this chapter several examples of real-world use cases are listed. The examples are simplified to promote readability and contain little or no error checking.


Next: , Up: GnuTLS application examples   [Contents][Index]

7.1 Client examples

This section contains examples of TLS and SSL clients, using GnuTLS. Note that some of the examples require functions implemented by another example.


Next: , Up: Client examples   [Contents][Index]

7.1.1 Client example with X.509 certificate support

Let’s assume now that we want to create a TCP client which communicates with servers that use X.509 certificate authentication. The following client is a very simple TLS client, which uses the high level verification functions for certificates, but does not support session resumption.

Note that this client utilizes functionality present in the latest GnuTLS version. For a reasonably portable version see Legacy client example with X.509 certificate support.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <assert.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/x509.h>
#include "examples.h"

/* A very basic TLS client, with X.509 authentication and server certificate
 * verification. Note that error recovery is minimal for simplicity.
 */

#define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0)
#define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd)                                             \
	do {                                                              \
		rval = cmd;                                               \
	} while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED); \
	assert(rval >= 0)

#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n"

extern int tcp_connect(void);
extern void tcp_close(int sd);

int main(void)
{
	int ret, sd, ii;
	gnutls_session_t session;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1], *desc;
	gnutls_datum_t out;
	int type;
	unsigned status;
	gnutls_certificate_credentials_t xcred;

	if (gnutls_check_version("3.4.6") == NULL) {
		fprintf(stderr,
			"GnuTLS 3.4.6 or later is required for this example\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	/* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */
	CHECK(gnutls_global_init());

	/* X509 stuff */
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&xcred));

	/* sets the system trusted CAs for Internet PKI */
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust(xcred));

	/* If client holds a certificate it can be set using the following:
	 *
	 gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file (xcred, "cert.pem", "key.pem", 
	 GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); 
	 */

	/* Initialize TLS session */
	CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT));

	CHECK(gnutls_server_name_set(session, GNUTLS_NAME_DNS,
				     "www.example.com",
				     strlen("www.example.com")));

	/* It is recommended to use the default priorities */
	CHECK(gnutls_set_default_priority(session));

	/* put the x509 credentials to the current session
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, xcred));
	gnutls_session_set_verify_cert(session, "www.example.com", 0);

	/* connect to the peer
	 */
	sd = tcp_connect();

	gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);
	gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session, GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT);

	/* Perform the TLS handshake
	 */
	do {
		ret = gnutls_handshake(session);
	} while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0);
	if (ret < 0) {
		if (ret == GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_ERROR) {
			/* check certificate verification status */
			type = gnutls_certificate_type_get(session);
			status = gnutls_session_get_verify_cert_status(session);
			CHECK(gnutls_certificate_verification_status_print(
				status, type, &out, 0));
			printf("cert verify output: %s\n", out.data);
			gnutls_free(out.data);
		}
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed: %s\n",
			gnutls_strerror(ret));
		goto end;
	} else {
		desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session);
		printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc);
		gnutls_free(desc);
	}

	/* send data */
	LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG)));

	LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF));
	if (ret == 0) {
		printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n");
		goto end;
	} else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
	} else if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
		goto end;
	}

	if (ret > 0) {
		printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret);
		for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) {
			fputc(buffer[ii], stdout);
		}
		fputs("\n", stdout);
	}

	CHECK(gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR));

end:

	tcp_close(sd);

	gnutls_deinit(session);

	gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(xcred);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: Client examples   [Contents][Index]

7.1.2 Datagram TLS client example

This is a client that uses UDP to connect to a server. This is the DTLS equivalent to the TLS example with X.509 certificates.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
#include <assert.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/dtls.h>

/* A very basic Datagram TLS client, over UDP with X.509 authentication.
 */

#define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0)
#define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd)                                             \
	do {                                                              \
		rval = cmd;                                               \
	} while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED); \
	assert(rval >= 0)

#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n"

extern int udp_connect(void);
extern void udp_close(int sd);
extern int verify_certificate_callback(gnutls_session_t session);

int main(void)
{
	int ret, sd, ii;
	gnutls_session_t session;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
	gnutls_certificate_credentials_t xcred;

	if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) {
		fprintf(stderr,
			"GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	/* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */
	CHECK(gnutls_global_init());

	/* X509 stuff */
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&xcred));

	/* sets the system trusted CAs for Internet PKI */
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust(xcred));

	/* Initialize TLS session */
	CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT | GNUTLS_DATAGRAM));

	/* Use default priorities */
	CHECK(gnutls_set_default_priority(session));

	/* put the x509 credentials to the current session */
	CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, xcred));
	CHECK(gnutls_server_name_set(session, GNUTLS_NAME_DNS,
				     "www.example.com",
				     strlen("www.example.com")));

	gnutls_session_set_verify_cert(session, "www.example.com", 0);

	/* connect to the peer */
	sd = udp_connect();

	gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);

	/* set the connection MTU */
	gnutls_dtls_set_mtu(session, 1000);
	/* gnutls_dtls_set_timeouts(session, 1000, 60000); */

	/* Perform the TLS handshake */
	do {
		ret = gnutls_handshake(session);
	} while (ret == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED || ret == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN);
	/* Note that DTLS may also receive GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET */

	if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n");
		gnutls_perror(ret);
		goto end;
	} else {
		char *desc;

		desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session);
		printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc);
		gnutls_free(desc);
	}

	LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG)));

	LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF));
	if (ret == 0) {
		printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n");
		goto end;
	} else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
	} else if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
		goto end;
	}

	if (ret > 0) {
		printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret);
		for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) {
			fputc(buffer[ii], stdout);
		}
		fputs("\n", stdout);
	}

	/* It is suggested not to use GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR in DTLS
	 * connections because the peer's closure message might
	 * be lost */
	CHECK(gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR));

end:

	udp_close(sd);

	gnutls_deinit(session);

	gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(xcred);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: Client examples   [Contents][Index]

7.1.3 Using a smart card with TLS

This example will demonstrate how to load keys and certificates from a smart-card or any other PKCS #11 token, and use it in a TLS connection. The difference between this and the Client example with X.509 certificate support is that the client keys are provided as PKCS #11 URIs instead of files.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/x509.h>
#include <gnutls/pkcs11.h>
#include <assert.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/stat.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#include <getpass.h> /* for getpass() */

/* A TLS client that loads the certificate and key.
 */

#define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0)

#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n"
#define MIN(x, y) (((x) < (y)) ? (x) : (y))

#define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt"

/* The URLs of the objects can be obtained
 * using p11tool --list-all --login
 */
#define KEY_URL                                                     \
	"pkcs11:manufacturer=SomeManufacturer;object=Private%20Key" \
	";objecttype=private;id=%db%5b%3e%b5%72%33"
#define CERT_URL                                                   \
	"pkcs11:manufacturer=SomeManufacturer;object=Certificate;" \
	"objecttype=cert;id=db%5b%3e%b5%72%33"

extern int tcp_connect(void);
extern void tcp_close(int sd);

static int pin_callback(void *user, int attempt, const char *token_url,
			const char *token_label, unsigned int flags, char *pin,
			size_t pin_max)
{
	const char *password;
	int len;

	printf("PIN required for token '%s' with URL '%s'\n", token_label,
	       token_url);
	if (flags & GNUTLS_PIN_FINAL_TRY)
		printf("*** This is the final try before locking!\n");
	if (flags & GNUTLS_PIN_COUNT_LOW)
		printf("*** Only few tries left before locking!\n");
	if (flags & GNUTLS_PIN_WRONG)
		printf("*** Wrong PIN\n");

	password = getpass("Enter pin: ");
	/* FIXME: ensure that we are in UTF-8 locale */
	if (password == NULL || password[0] == 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "No password given\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	len = MIN(pin_max - 1, strlen(password));
	memcpy(pin, password, len);
	pin[len] = 0;

	return 0;
}

int main(void)
{
	int ret, sd, ii;
	gnutls_session_t session;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
	gnutls_certificate_credentials_t xcred;
	/* Allow connections to servers that have OpenPGP keys as well.
	 */

	if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) {
		fprintf(stderr,
			"GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	/* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */
	CHECK(gnutls_global_init());

	/* The PKCS11 private key operations may require PIN.
	 * Register a callback. */
	gnutls_pkcs11_set_pin_function(pin_callback, NULL);

	/* X509 stuff */
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&xcred));

	/* sets the trusted cas file
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(xcred, CAFILE,
						     GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM));

	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file(xcred, CERT_URL, KEY_URL,
						   GNUTLS_X509_FMT_DER));

	/* Note that there is no server certificate verification in this example
	 */

	/* Initialize TLS session
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT));

	/* Use default priorities */
	CHECK(gnutls_set_default_priority(session));

	/* put the x509 credentials to the current session
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, xcred));

	/* connect to the peer
	 */
	sd = tcp_connect();

	gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);

	/* Perform the TLS handshake
	 */
	ret = gnutls_handshake(session);

	if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n");
		gnutls_perror(ret);
		goto end;
	} else {
		char *desc;

		desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session);
		printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc);
		gnutls_free(desc);
	}

	CHECK(gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG)));

	ret = gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF);
	if (ret == 0) {
		printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n");
		goto end;
	} else if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
		goto end;
	}

	printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret);
	for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) {
		fputc(buffer[ii], stdout);
	}
	fputs("\n", stdout);

	CHECK(gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR));

end:

	tcp_close(sd);

	gnutls_deinit(session);

	gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(xcred);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: Client examples   [Contents][Index]

7.1.4 Client with resume capability example

This is a modification of the simple client example. Here we demonstrate the use of session resumption. The client tries to connect once using TLS, close the connection and then try to establish a new connection using the previously negotiated data.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <string.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <assert.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>

extern void check_alert(gnutls_session_t session, int ret);
extern int tcp_connect(void);
extern void tcp_close(int sd);

/* A very basic TLS client, with X.509 authentication and server certificate
 * verification as well as session resumption.
 *
 * Note that error recovery is minimal for simplicity.
 */

#define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0)
#define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd)                                             \
	do {                                                              \
		rval = cmd;                                               \
	} while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED); \
	assert(rval >= 0)

#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n"

int main(void)
{
	int ret;
	int sd, ii;
	gnutls_session_t session;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
	gnutls_certificate_credentials_t xcred;

	/* variables used in session resuming 
	 */
	int t;
	gnutls_datum_t sdata;

	/* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */
	CHECK(gnutls_global_init());

	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&xcred));
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust(xcred));

	for (t = 0; t < 2; t++) { /* connect 2 times to the server */

		sd = tcp_connect();

		CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT));

		CHECK(gnutls_server_name_set(session, GNUTLS_NAME_DNS,
					     "www.example.com",
					     strlen("www.example.com")));
		gnutls_session_set_verify_cert(session, "www.example.com", 0);

		CHECK(gnutls_set_default_priority(session));

		gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);
		gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session,
					     GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT);

		gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, xcred);

		if (t > 0) {
			/* if this is not the first time we connect */
			CHECK(gnutls_session_set_data(session, sdata.data,
						      sdata.size));
			gnutls_free(sdata.data);
		}

		/* Perform the TLS handshake
		 */
		do {
			ret = gnutls_handshake(session);
		} while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0);

		if (ret < 0) {
			fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n");
			gnutls_perror(ret);
			goto end;
		} else {
			printf("- Handshake was completed\n");
		}

		if (t == 0) { /* the first time we connect */
			/* get the session data */
			CHECK(gnutls_session_get_data2(session, &sdata));
		} else { /* the second time we connect */

			/* check if we actually resumed the previous session */
			if (gnutls_session_is_resumed(session) != 0) {
				printf("- Previous session was resumed\n");
			} else {
				fprintf(stderr,
					"*** Previous session was NOT resumed\n");
			}
		}

		LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG)));

		LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF));
		if (ret == 0) {
			printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n");
			goto end;
		} else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) {
			fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n",
				gnutls_strerror(ret));
		} else if (ret < 0) {
			fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n",
				gnutls_strerror(ret));
			goto end;
		}

		if (ret > 0) {
			printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret);
			for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) {
				fputc(buffer[ii], stdout);
			}
			fputs("\n", stdout);
		}

		gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR);

	end:

		tcp_close(sd);

		gnutls_deinit(session);

	} /* for() */

	gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(xcred);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

Previous: , Up: Client examples   [Contents][Index]

7.1.5 Client example with SSH-style certificate verification

This is an alternative verification function that will use the X.509 certificate authorities for verification, but also assume an trust on first use (SSH-like) authentication system. That is the user is prompted on unknown public keys and known public keys are considered trusted.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/x509.h>
#include <assert.h>
#include "examples.h"

#define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0)

/* This function will verify the peer's certificate, check
 * if the hostname matches. In addition it will perform an
 * SSH-style authentication, where ultimately trusted keys
 * are only the keys that have been seen before.
 */
int _ssh_verify_certificate_callback(gnutls_session_t session)
{
	unsigned int status;
	const gnutls_datum_t *cert_list;
	unsigned int cert_list_size;
	int ret, type;
	gnutls_datum_t out;
	const char *hostname;

	/* read hostname */
	hostname = gnutls_session_get_ptr(session);

	/* This verification function uses the trusted CAs in the credentials
	 * structure. So you must have installed one or more CA certificates.
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3(session, hostname, &status));

	type = gnutls_certificate_type_get(session);

	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_verification_status_print(status, type, &out,
							   0));
	printf("%s", out.data);

	gnutls_free(out.data);

	if (status != 0) /* Certificate is not trusted */
		return GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_ERROR;

	/* Do SSH verification */
	cert_list = gnutls_certificate_get_peers(session, &cert_list_size);
	if (cert_list == NULL) {
		printf("No certificate was found!\n");
		return GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_ERROR;
	}

	/* service may be obtained alternatively using getservbyport() */
	ret = gnutls_verify_stored_pubkey(NULL, NULL, hostname, "https", type,
					  &cert_list[0], 0);
	if (ret == GNUTLS_E_NO_CERTIFICATE_FOUND) {
		printf("Host %s is not known.", hostname);
		if (status == 0)
			printf("Its certificate is valid for %s.\n", hostname);

		/* the certificate must be printed and user must be asked on
		 * whether it is trustworthy. --see gnutls_x509_crt_print() */

		/* if not trusted */
		return GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_ERROR;
	} else if (ret == GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_KEY_MISMATCH) {
		printf("Warning: host %s is known but has another key associated.",
		       hostname);
		printf("It might be that the server has multiple keys, or you are under attack\n");
		if (status == 0)
			printf("Its certificate is valid for %s.\n", hostname);

		/* the certificate must be printed and user must be asked on
		 * whether it is trustworthy. --see gnutls_x509_crt_print() */

		/* if not trusted */
		return GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_ERROR;
	} else if (ret < 0) {
		printf("gnutls_verify_stored_pubkey: %s\n",
		       gnutls_strerror(ret));
		return ret;
	}

	/* user trusts the key -> store it */
	if (ret != 0) {
		CHECK(gnutls_store_pubkey(NULL, NULL, hostname, "https", type,
					  &cert_list[0], 0, 0));
	}

	/* notify gnutls to continue handshake normally */
	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: GnuTLS application examples   [Contents][Index]

7.2 Server examples

This section contains examples of TLS and SSL servers, using GnuTLS.


Next: , Up: Server examples   [Contents][Index]

7.2.1 Echo server with X.509 authentication

This example is a very simple echo server which supports X.509 authentication.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <errno.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
#include <netinet/in.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <assert.h>

#define KEYFILE "key.pem"
#define CERTFILE "cert.pem"
#define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt"
#define CRLFILE "crl.pem"

#define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0)
#define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \
	do {                  \
		rval = cmd;   \
	} while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED)

/* The OCSP status file contains up to date information about revocation
 * of the server's certificate. That can be periodically be updated
 * using:
 * $ ocsptool --ask --load-cert your_cert.pem --load-issuer your_issuer.pem
 *            --load-signer your_issuer.pem --outfile ocsp-status.der
 */
#define OCSP_STATUS_FILE "ocsp-status.der"

/* This is a sample TLS 1.0 echo server, using X.509 authentication and
 * OCSP stapling support.
 */

#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define PORT 5556 /* listen to 5556 port */

int main(void)
{
	int listen_sd;
	int sd, ret;
	gnutls_certificate_credentials_t x509_cred;
	gnutls_priority_t priority_cache;
	struct sockaddr_in sa_serv;
	struct sockaddr_in sa_cli;
	socklen_t client_len;
	char topbuf[512];
	gnutls_session_t session;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
	int optval = 1;

	/* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */
	CHECK(gnutls_global_init());

	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&x509_cred));

	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(x509_cred, CAFILE,
						     GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM));

	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_crl_file(x509_cred, CRLFILE,
						   GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM));

	/* The following code sets the certificate key pair as well as, 
	 * an OCSP response which corresponds to it. It is possible
	 * to set multiple key-pairs and multiple OCSP status responses
	 * (the latter since 3.5.6). See the manual pages of the individual
	 * functions for more information.
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file(x509_cred, CERTFILE, KEYFILE,
						   GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM));

	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_ocsp_status_request_file(
		x509_cred, OCSP_STATUS_FILE, 0));

	CHECK(gnutls_priority_init(&priority_cache, NULL, NULL));

	/* Instead of the default options as shown above one could specify
	 * additional options such as server precedence in ciphersuite selection
	 * as follows:
	 * gnutls_priority_init2(&priority_cache,
	 *                       "%SERVER_PRECEDENCE",
	 *                       NULL, GNUTLS_PRIORITY_INIT_DEF_APPEND);
	 */

#if GNUTLS_VERSION_NUMBER >= 0x030506
	/* only available since GnuTLS 3.5.6, on previous versions see
	 * gnutls_certificate_set_dh_params(). */
	gnutls_certificate_set_known_dh_params(x509_cred,
					       GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_MEDIUM);
#endif

	/* Socket operations
	 */
	listen_sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);

	memset(&sa_serv, '\0', sizeof(sa_serv));
	sa_serv.sin_family = AF_INET;
	sa_serv.sin_addr.s_addr = INADDR_ANY;
	sa_serv.sin_port = htons(PORT); /* Server Port number */

	setsockopt(listen_sd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_REUSEADDR, (void *)&optval,
		   sizeof(int));

	bind(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_serv, sizeof(sa_serv));

	listen(listen_sd, 1024);

	printf("Server ready. Listening to port '%d'.\n\n", PORT);

	client_len = sizeof(sa_cli);
	for (;;) {
		CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_SERVER));
		CHECK(gnutls_priority_set(session, priority_cache));
		CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE,
					     x509_cred));

		/* We don't request any certificate from the client.
		 * If we did we would need to verify it. One way of
		 * doing that is shown in the "Verifying a certificate"
		 * example.
		 */
		gnutls_certificate_server_set_request(session,
						      GNUTLS_CERT_IGNORE);
		gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session,
					     GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT);

		sd = accept(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_cli, &client_len);

		printf("- connection from %s, port %d\n",
		       inet_ntop(AF_INET, &sa_cli.sin_addr, topbuf,
				 sizeof(topbuf)),
		       ntohs(sa_cli.sin_port));

		gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);

		LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_handshake(session));
		if (ret < 0) {
			close(sd);
			gnutls_deinit(session);
			fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake has failed (%s)\n\n",
				gnutls_strerror(ret));
			continue;
		}
		printf("- Handshake was completed\n");

		/* see the Getting peer's information example */
		/* print_info(session); */

		for (;;) {
			LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer,
							   MAX_BUF));

			if (ret == 0) {
				printf("\n- Peer has closed the GnuTLS connection\n");
				break;
			} else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) {
				fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n",
					gnutls_strerror(ret));
			} else if (ret < 0) {
				fprintf(stderr,
					"\n*** Received corrupted "
					"data(%d). Closing the connection.\n\n",
					ret);
				break;
			} else if (ret > 0) {
				/* echo data back to the client
				 */
				CHECK(gnutls_record_send(session, buffer, ret));
			}
		}
		printf("\n");
		/* do not wait for the peer to close the connection.
		 */
		LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR));

		close(sd);
		gnutls_deinit(session);
	}
	close(listen_sd);

	gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(x509_cred);
	gnutls_priority_deinit(priority_cache);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

Previous: , Up: Server examples   [Contents][Index]

7.2.2 DTLS echo server with X.509 authentication

This example is a very simple echo server using Datagram TLS and X.509 authentication.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <errno.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
#include <netinet/in.h>
#include <sys/select.h>
#include <netdb.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/dtls.h>

#define KEYFILE "key.pem"
#define CERTFILE "cert.pem"
#define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt"
#define CRLFILE "crl.pem"

/* This is a sample DTLS echo server, using X.509 authentication.
 * Note that error checking is minimal to simplify the example.
 */

#define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \
	do {                  \
		rval = cmd;   \
	} while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED)

#define MAX_BUFFER 1024
#define PORT 5557

typedef struct {
	gnutls_session_t session;
	int fd;
	struct sockaddr *cli_addr;
	socklen_t cli_addr_size;
} priv_data_st;

static int pull_timeout_func(gnutls_transport_ptr_t ptr, unsigned int ms);
static ssize_t push_func(gnutls_transport_ptr_t p, const void *data,
			 size_t size);
static ssize_t pull_func(gnutls_transport_ptr_t p, void *data, size_t size);
static const char *human_addr(const struct sockaddr *sa, socklen_t salen,
			      char *buf, size_t buflen);
static int wait_for_connection(int fd);

/* Use global credentials and parameters to simplify
 * the example. */
static gnutls_certificate_credentials_t x509_cred;
static gnutls_priority_t priority_cache;

int main(void)
{
	int listen_sd;
	int sock, ret;
	struct sockaddr_in sa_serv;
	struct sockaddr_in cli_addr;
	socklen_t cli_addr_size;
	gnutls_session_t session;
	char buffer[MAX_BUFFER];
	priv_data_st priv;
	gnutls_datum_t cookie_key;
	gnutls_dtls_prestate_st prestate;
	int mtu = 1400;
	unsigned char sequence[8];

	/* this must be called once in the program
	 */
	gnutls_global_init();

	gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&x509_cred);
	gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(x509_cred, CAFILE,
					       GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM);

	gnutls_certificate_set_x509_crl_file(x509_cred, CRLFILE,
					     GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM);

	ret = gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file(x509_cred, CERTFILE, KEYFILE,
						   GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM);
	if (ret < 0) {
		printf("No certificate or key were found\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	gnutls_certificate_set_known_dh_params(x509_cred,
					       GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_MEDIUM);

	/* pre-3.6.3 equivalent:
	 * gnutls_priority_init(&priority_cache,
	 *                      "NORMAL:-VERS-TLS-ALL:+VERS-DTLS1.0:%SERVER_PRECEDENCE",
	 *                      NULL);
	 */
	gnutls_priority_init2(&priority_cache, "%SERVER_PRECEDENCE", NULL,
			      GNUTLS_PRIORITY_INIT_DEF_APPEND);

	gnutls_key_generate(&cookie_key, GNUTLS_COOKIE_KEY_SIZE);

	/* Socket operations
	 */
	listen_sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0);

	memset(&sa_serv, '\0', sizeof(sa_serv));
	sa_serv.sin_family = AF_INET;
	sa_serv.sin_addr.s_addr = INADDR_ANY;
	sa_serv.sin_port = htons(PORT);

	{ /* DTLS requires the IP don't fragment (DF) bit to be set */
#if defined(IP_DONTFRAG)
		int optval = 1;
		setsockopt(listen_sd, IPPROTO_IP, IP_DONTFRAG,
			   (const void *)&optval, sizeof(optval));
#elif defined(IP_MTU_DISCOVER)
		int optval = IP_PMTUDISC_DO;
		setsockopt(listen_sd, IPPROTO_IP, IP_MTU_DISCOVER,
			   (const void *)&optval, sizeof(optval));
#endif
	}

	bind(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_serv, sizeof(sa_serv));

	printf("UDP server ready. Listening to port '%d'.\n\n", PORT);

	for (;;) {
		printf("Waiting for connection...\n");
		sock = wait_for_connection(listen_sd);
		if (sock < 0)
			continue;

		cli_addr_size = sizeof(cli_addr);
		ret = recvfrom(sock, buffer, sizeof(buffer), MSG_PEEK,
			       (struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr, &cli_addr_size);
		if (ret > 0) {
			memset(&prestate, 0, sizeof(prestate));
			ret = gnutls_dtls_cookie_verify(&cookie_key, &cli_addr,
							sizeof(cli_addr),
							buffer, ret, &prestate);
			if (ret < 0) { /* cookie not valid */
				priv_data_st s;

				memset(&s, 0, sizeof(s));
				s.fd = sock;
				s.cli_addr = (void *)&cli_addr;
				s.cli_addr_size = sizeof(cli_addr);

				printf("Sending hello verify request to %s\n",
				       human_addr((struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr,
						  sizeof(cli_addr), buffer,
						  sizeof(buffer)));

				gnutls_dtls_cookie_send(
					&cookie_key, &cli_addr,
					sizeof(cli_addr), &prestate,
					(gnutls_transport_ptr_t)&s, push_func);

				/* discard peeked data */
				recvfrom(sock, buffer, sizeof(buffer), 0,
					 (struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr,
					 &cli_addr_size);
				usleep(100);
				continue;
			}
			printf("Accepted connection from %s\n",
			       human_addr((struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr,
					  sizeof(cli_addr), buffer,
					  sizeof(buffer)));
		} else
			continue;

		gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_SERVER | GNUTLS_DATAGRAM);
		gnutls_priority_set(session, priority_cache);
		gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE,
				       x509_cred);

		gnutls_dtls_prestate_set(session, &prestate);
		gnutls_dtls_set_mtu(session, mtu);

		priv.session = session;
		priv.fd = sock;
		priv.cli_addr = (struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr;
		priv.cli_addr_size = sizeof(cli_addr);

		gnutls_transport_set_ptr(session, &priv);
		gnutls_transport_set_push_function(session, push_func);
		gnutls_transport_set_pull_function(session, pull_func);
		gnutls_transport_set_pull_timeout_function(session,
							   pull_timeout_func);

		LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_handshake(session));
		/* Note that DTLS may also receive GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET.
		 * In that case the MTU should be adjusted.
		 */

		if (ret < 0) {
			fprintf(stderr, "Error in handshake(): %s\n",
				gnutls_strerror(ret));
			gnutls_deinit(session);
			continue;
		}

		printf("- Handshake was completed\n");

		for (;;) {
			LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv_seq(session, buffer,
							       MAX_BUFFER,
							       sequence));

			if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) {
				fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n",
					gnutls_strerror(ret));
				continue;
			} else if (ret < 0) {
				fprintf(stderr, "Error in recv(): %s\n",
					gnutls_strerror(ret));
				break;
			}

			if (ret == 0) {
				printf("EOF\n\n");
				break;
			}

			buffer[ret] = 0;
			printf("received[%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x]: %s\n",
			       sequence[0], sequence[1], sequence[2],
			       sequence[3], sequence[4], sequence[5],
			       sequence[6], sequence[7], buffer);

			/* reply back */
			LOOP_CHECK(ret,
				   gnutls_record_send(session, buffer, ret));
			if (ret < 0) {
				fprintf(stderr, "Error in send(): %s\n",
					gnutls_strerror(ret));
				break;
			}
		}

		LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR));
		gnutls_deinit(session);
	}
	close(listen_sd);

	gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(x509_cred);
	gnutls_priority_deinit(priority_cache);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

static int wait_for_connection(int fd)
{
	fd_set rd, wr;
	int n;

	FD_ZERO(&rd);
	FD_ZERO(&wr);

	FD_SET(fd, &rd);

	/* waiting part */
	n = select(fd + 1, &rd, &wr, NULL, NULL);
	if (n == -1 && errno == EINTR)
		return -1;
	if (n < 0) {
		perror("select()");
		exit(1);
	}

	return fd;
}

/* Wait for data to be received within a timeout period in milliseconds
 */
static int pull_timeout_func(gnutls_transport_ptr_t ptr, unsigned int ms)
{
	fd_set rfds;
	struct timeval tv;
	priv_data_st *priv = ptr;
	struct sockaddr_in cli_addr;
	socklen_t cli_addr_size;
	int ret;
	char c;

	FD_ZERO(&rfds);
	FD_SET(priv->fd, &rfds);

	tv.tv_sec = ms / 1000;
	tv.tv_usec = (ms % 1000) * 1000;

	ret = select(priv->fd + 1, &rfds, NULL, NULL, &tv);

	if (ret <= 0)
		return ret;

	/* only report ok if the next message is from the peer we expect
	 * from 
	 */
	cli_addr_size = sizeof(cli_addr);
	ret = recvfrom(priv->fd, &c, 1, MSG_PEEK, (struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr,
		       &cli_addr_size);
	if (ret > 0) {
		if (cli_addr_size == priv->cli_addr_size &&
		    memcmp(&cli_addr, priv->cli_addr, sizeof(cli_addr)) == 0)
			return 1;
	}

	return 0;
}

static ssize_t push_func(gnutls_transport_ptr_t p, const void *data,
			 size_t size)
{
	priv_data_st *priv = p;

	return sendto(priv->fd, data, size, 0, priv->cli_addr,
		      priv->cli_addr_size);
}

static ssize_t pull_func(gnutls_transport_ptr_t p, void *data, size_t size)
{
	priv_data_st *priv = p;
	struct sockaddr_in cli_addr;
	socklen_t cli_addr_size;
	char buffer[64];
	int ret;

	cli_addr_size = sizeof(cli_addr);
	ret = recvfrom(priv->fd, data, size, 0, (struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr,
		       &cli_addr_size);
	if (ret == -1)
		return ret;

	if (cli_addr_size == priv->cli_addr_size &&
	    memcmp(&cli_addr, priv->cli_addr, sizeof(cli_addr)) == 0)
		return ret;

	printf("Denied connection from %s\n",
	       human_addr((struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr, sizeof(cli_addr),
			  buffer, sizeof(buffer)));

	gnutls_transport_set_errno(priv->session, EAGAIN);
	return -1;
}

static const char *human_addr(const struct sockaddr *sa, socklen_t salen,
			      char *buf, size_t buflen)
{
	const char *save_buf = buf;
	size_t l;

	if (!buf || !buflen)
		return NULL;

	*buf = '\0';

	switch (sa->sa_family) {
#if HAVE_IPV6
	case AF_INET6:
		snprintf(buf, buflen, "IPv6 ");
		break;
#endif

	case AF_INET:
		snprintf(buf, buflen, "IPv4 ");
		break;
	}

	l = strlen(buf);
	buf += l;
	buflen -= l;

	if (getnameinfo(sa, salen, buf, buflen, NULL, 0, NI_NUMERICHOST) != 0)
		return NULL;

	l = strlen(buf);
	buf += l;
	buflen -= l;

	strncat(buf, " port ", buflen);

	l = strlen(buf);
	buf += l;
	buflen -= l;

	if (getnameinfo(sa, salen, NULL, 0, buf, buflen, NI_NUMERICSERV) != 0)
		return NULL;

	return save_buf;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: GnuTLS application examples   [Contents][Index]

7.3 More advanced client and servers

This section has various, more advanced topics in client and servers.


Next: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.1 Client example with anonymous authentication

The simplest client using TLS is the one that doesn’t do any authentication. This means no external certificates or passwords are needed to set up the connection. As could be expected, the connection is vulnerable to man-in-the-middle (active or redirection) attacks. However, the data are integrity protected and encrypted from passive eavesdroppers.

Note that due to the vulnerable nature of this method very few public servers support it.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <assert.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>

/* A very basic TLS client, with anonymous authentication.
 */

#define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd)                                             \
	do {                                                              \
		rval = cmd;                                               \
	} while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED); \
	assert(rval >= 0)

#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n"

extern int tcp_connect(void);
extern void tcp_close(int sd);

int main(void)
{
	int ret, sd, ii;
	gnutls_session_t session;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
	gnutls_anon_client_credentials_t anoncred;
	/* Need to enable anonymous KX specifically. */

	gnutls_global_init();

	gnutls_anon_allocate_client_credentials(&anoncred);

	/* Initialize TLS session 
	 */
	gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT);

	/* Use default priorities */
	gnutls_priority_set_direct(session, "PERFORMANCE:+ANON-ECDH:+ANON-DH",
				   NULL);

	/* put the anonymous credentials to the current session
	 */
	gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_ANON, anoncred);

	/* connect to the peer
	 */
	sd = tcp_connect();

	gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);
	gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session, GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT);

	/* Perform the TLS handshake
	 */
	do {
		ret = gnutls_handshake(session);
	} while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0);

	if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n");
		gnutls_perror(ret);
		goto end;
	} else {
		char *desc;

		desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session);
		printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc);
		gnutls_free(desc);
	}

	LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG)));

	LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF));
	if (ret == 0) {
		printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n");
		goto end;
	} else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
	} else if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
		goto end;
	}

	if (ret > 0) {
		printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret);
		for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) {
			fputc(buffer[ii], stdout);
		}
		fputs("\n", stdout);
	}

	LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR));

end:

	tcp_close(sd);

	gnutls_deinit(session);

	gnutls_anon_free_client_credentials(anoncred);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.2 Using a callback to select the certificate to use

There are cases where a client holds several certificate and key pairs, and may not want to load all of them in the credentials structure. The following example demonstrates the use of the certificate selection callback.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <assert.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/x509.h>
#include <gnutls/abstract.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/stat.h>
#include <fcntl.h>

/* A TLS client that loads the certificate and key.
 */

#define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0)

#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n"

#define CERT_FILE "cert.pem"
#define KEY_FILE "key.pem"
#define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt"

extern int tcp_connect(void);
extern void tcp_close(int sd);

static int cert_callback(gnutls_session_t session,
			 const gnutls_datum_t *req_ca_rdn, int nreqs,
			 const gnutls_pk_algorithm_t *sign_algos,
			 int sign_algos_length, gnutls_pcert_st **pcert,
			 unsigned int *pcert_length, gnutls_privkey_t *pkey);

gnutls_pcert_st pcrt;
gnutls_privkey_t key;

/* Load the certificate and the private key.
 */
static void load_keys(void)
{
	gnutls_datum_t data;

	CHECK(gnutls_load_file(CERT_FILE, &data));

	CHECK(gnutls_pcert_import_x509_raw(&pcrt, &data, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM,
					   0));

	gnutls_free(data.data);

	CHECK(gnutls_load_file(KEY_FILE, &data));

	CHECK(gnutls_privkey_init(&key));

	CHECK(gnutls_privkey_import_x509_raw(key, &data, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM,
					     NULL, 0));
	gnutls_free(data.data);
}

int main(void)
{
	int ret, sd, ii;
	gnutls_session_t session;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
	gnutls_certificate_credentials_t xcred;

	if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) {
		fprintf(stderr,
			"GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	/* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */
	CHECK(gnutls_global_init());

	load_keys();

	/* X509 stuff */
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&xcred));

	/* sets the trusted cas file
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(xcred, CAFILE,
						     GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM));

	gnutls_certificate_set_retrieve_function2(xcred, cert_callback);

	/* Initialize TLS session 
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT));

	/* Use default priorities */
	CHECK(gnutls_set_default_priority(session));

	/* put the x509 credentials to the current session
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, xcred));

	/* connect to the peer
	 */
	sd = tcp_connect();

	gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);

	/* Perform the TLS handshake
	 */
	ret = gnutls_handshake(session);

	if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n");
		gnutls_perror(ret);
		goto end;
	} else {
		char *desc;

		desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session);
		printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc);
		gnutls_free(desc);
	}

	CHECK(gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG)));

	ret = gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF);
	if (ret == 0) {
		printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n");
		goto end;
	} else if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
		goto end;
	}

	printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret);
	for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) {
		fputc(buffer[ii], stdout);
	}
	fputs("\n", stdout);

	CHECK(gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR));

end:

	tcp_close(sd);

	gnutls_deinit(session);

	gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(xcred);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

/* This callback should be associated with a session by calling
 * gnutls_certificate_client_set_retrieve_function( session, cert_callback),
 * before a handshake.
 */

static int cert_callback(gnutls_session_t session,
			 const gnutls_datum_t *req_ca_rdn, int nreqs,
			 const gnutls_pk_algorithm_t *sign_algos,
			 int sign_algos_length, gnutls_pcert_st **pcert,
			 unsigned int *pcert_length, gnutls_privkey_t *pkey)
{
	char issuer_dn[256];
	int i, ret;
	size_t len;
	gnutls_certificate_type_t type;

	/* Print the server's trusted CAs
	 */
	if (nreqs > 0)
		printf("- Server's trusted authorities:\n");
	else
		printf("- Server did not send us any trusted authorities names.\n");

	/* print the names (if any) */
	for (i = 0; i < nreqs; i++) {
		len = sizeof(issuer_dn);
		ret = gnutls_x509_rdn_get(&req_ca_rdn[i], issuer_dn, &len);
		if (ret >= 0) {
			printf("   [%d]: ", i);
			printf("%s\n", issuer_dn);
		}
	}

	/* Select a certificate and return it.
	 * The certificate must be of any of the "sign algorithms"
	 * supported by the server.
	 */
	type = gnutls_certificate_type_get(session);
	if (type == GNUTLS_CRT_X509) {
		*pcert_length = 1;
		*pcert = &pcrt;
		*pkey = key;
	} else {
		return -1;
	}

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.3 Obtaining session information

Most of the times it is desirable to know the security properties of the current established session. This includes the underlying ciphers and the protocols involved. That is the purpose of the following function. Note that this function will print meaningful values only if called after a successful gnutls_handshake.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/x509.h>

#include "examples.h"

/* This function will print some details of the
 * given session.
 */
int print_info(gnutls_session_t session)
{
	gnutls_credentials_type_t cred;
	gnutls_kx_algorithm_t kx;
	int dhe, ecdh, group;
	char *desc;

	/* get a description of the session connection, protocol,
	 * cipher/key exchange */
	desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session);
	if (desc != NULL) {
		printf("- Session: %s\n", desc);
	}

	dhe = ecdh = 0;

	kx = gnutls_kx_get(session);

	/* Check the authentication type used and switch
	 * to the appropriate.
	 */
	cred = gnutls_auth_get_type(session);
	switch (cred) {
#ifdef ENABLE_SRP
	case GNUTLS_CRD_SRP:
		printf("- SRP session with username %s\n",
		       gnutls_srp_server_get_username(session));
		break;
#endif

	case GNUTLS_CRD_PSK:
		/* This returns NULL in server side.
		 */
		if (gnutls_psk_client_get_hint(session) != NULL)
			printf("- PSK authentication. PSK hint '%s'\n",
			       gnutls_psk_client_get_hint(session));
		/* This returns NULL in client side.
		 */
		if (gnutls_psk_server_get_username(session) != NULL)
			printf("- PSK authentication. Connected as '%s'\n",
			       gnutls_psk_server_get_username(session));

		if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_ECDHE_PSK)
			ecdh = 1;
		else if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_DHE_PSK)
			dhe = 1;
		break;

	case GNUTLS_CRD_ANON: /* anonymous authentication */

		printf("- Anonymous authentication.\n");
		if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_ANON_ECDH)
			ecdh = 1;
		else if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_ANON_DH)
			dhe = 1;
		break;

	case GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE: /* certificate authentication */

		/* Check if we have been using ephemeral Diffie-Hellman.
		 */
		if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_DHE_RSA || kx == GNUTLS_KX_DHE_DSS)
			dhe = 1;
		else if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_ECDHE_RSA ||
			 kx == GNUTLS_KX_ECDHE_ECDSA)
			ecdh = 1;

		/* if the certificate list is available, then
		 * print some information about it.
		 */
		print_x509_certificate_info(session);
		break;
	default:
		break;
	} /* switch */

	/* read the negotiated group - if any */
	group = gnutls_group_get(session);
	if (group != 0) {
		printf("- Negotiated group %s\n", gnutls_group_get_name(group));
	} else {
		if (ecdh != 0)
			printf("- Ephemeral ECDH using curve %s\n",
			       gnutls_ecc_curve_get_name(
				       gnutls_ecc_curve_get(session)));
		else if (dhe != 0)
			printf("- Ephemeral DH using prime of %d bits\n",
			       gnutls_dh_get_prime_bits(session));
	}

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.4 Advanced certificate verification

An example is listed below which uses the high level verification functions to verify a given certificate chain against a set of CAs and CRLs.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <assert.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/x509.h>

#include "examples.h"

#define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0)

/* All the available CRLs
 */
gnutls_x509_crl_t *crl_list;
int crl_list_size;

/* All the available trusted CAs
 */
gnutls_x509_crt_t *ca_list;
int ca_list_size;

static int print_details_func(gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer,
			      gnutls_x509_crl_t crl,
			      unsigned int verification_output);

/* This function will try to verify the peer's certificate chain, and
 * also check if the hostname matches.
 */
void verify_certificate_chain(const char *hostname,
			      const gnutls_datum_t *cert_chain,
			      int cert_chain_length)
{
	int i;
	gnutls_x509_trust_list_t tlist;
	gnutls_x509_crt_t *cert;
	gnutls_datum_t txt;
	unsigned int output;

	/* Initialize the trusted certificate list. This should be done
	 * once on initialization. gnutls_x509_crt_list_import2() and
	 * gnutls_x509_crl_list_import2() can be used to load them.
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_x509_trust_list_init(&tlist, 0));

	CHECK(gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_cas(tlist, ca_list, ca_list_size, 0));
	CHECK(gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_crls(tlist, crl_list, crl_list_size,
					      GNUTLS_TL_VERIFY_CRL, 0));

	cert = gnutls_calloc(cert_chain_length, sizeof(*cert));
	assert(cert != NULL);

	/* Import all the certificates in the chain to
	 * native certificate format.
	 */
	for (i = 0; i < cert_chain_length; i++) {
		CHECK(gnutls_x509_crt_init(&cert[i]));
		CHECK(gnutls_x509_crt_import(cert[i], &cert_chain[i],
					     GNUTLS_X509_FMT_DER));
	}

	CHECK(gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_named_crt(
		tlist, cert[0], hostname, strlen(hostname),
		GNUTLS_VERIFY_DISABLE_CRL_CHECKS, &output, print_details_func));

	/* if this certificate is not explicitly trusted verify against CAs 
	 */
	if (output != 0) {
		CHECK(gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt(
			tlist, cert, cert_chain_length, 0, &output,
			print_details_func));
	}

	if (output & GNUTLS_CERT_INVALID) {
		fprintf(stderr, "Not trusted\n");
		CHECK(gnutls_certificate_verification_status_print(
			output, GNUTLS_CRT_X509, &txt, 0));

		fprintf(stderr, "Error: %s\n", txt.data);
		gnutls_free(txt.data);
	} else
		fprintf(stderr, "Trusted\n");

	/* Check if the name in the first certificate matches our destination!
	 */
	if (!gnutls_x509_crt_check_hostname(cert[0], hostname)) {
		printf("The certificate's owner does not match hostname '%s'\n",
		       hostname);
	}

	for (i = 0; i < cert_chain_length; i++) {
		gnutls_x509_crt_deinit(cert[i]);
	}
	gnutls_free(cert);

	gnutls_x509_trust_list_deinit(tlist, 1);

	return;
}

static int print_details_func(gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer,
			      gnutls_x509_crl_t crl,
			      unsigned int verification_output)
{
	char name[512];
	char issuer_name[512];
	size_t name_size;
	size_t issuer_name_size;

	issuer_name_size = sizeof(issuer_name);
	gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer_dn(cert, issuer_name, &issuer_name_size);

	name_size = sizeof(name);
	gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn(cert, name, &name_size);

	fprintf(stdout, "\tSubject: %s\n", name);
	fprintf(stdout, "\tIssuer: %s\n", issuer_name);

	if (issuer != NULL) {
		issuer_name_size = sizeof(issuer_name);
		gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn(issuer, issuer_name, &issuer_name_size);

		fprintf(stdout, "\tVerified against: %s\n", issuer_name);
	}

	if (crl != NULL) {
		issuer_name_size = sizeof(issuer_name);
		gnutls_x509_crl_get_issuer_dn(crl, issuer_name,
					      &issuer_name_size);

		fprintf(stdout, "\tVerified against CRL of: %s\n", issuer_name);
	}

	fprintf(stdout, "\tVerification output: %x\n\n", verification_output);

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.5 Client example with PSK authentication

The following client is a very simple PSK TLS client which connects to a server and authenticates using a username and a key.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <assert.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>

/* A very basic TLS client, with PSK authentication.
 */

#define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0)
#define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd)                                             \
	do {                                                              \
		rval = cmd;                                               \
	} while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED); \
	assert(rval >= 0)

#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n"

extern int tcp_connect(void);
extern void tcp_close(int sd);

int main(void)
{
	int ret, sd, ii;
	gnutls_session_t session;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
	const char *err;
	gnutls_psk_client_credentials_t pskcred;
	const gnutls_datum_t key = { (void *)"DEADBEEF", 8 };

	if (gnutls_check_version("3.6.3") == NULL) {
		fprintf(stderr,
			"GnuTLS 3.6.3 or later is required for this example\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	CHECK(gnutls_global_init());

	CHECK(gnutls_psk_allocate_client_credentials(&pskcred));
	CHECK(gnutls_psk_set_client_credentials(pskcred, "test", &key,
						GNUTLS_PSK_KEY_HEX));

	/* Initialize TLS session
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT));

	ret = gnutls_set_default_priority_append(
		session, "-KX-ALL:+ECDHE-PSK:+DHE-PSK:+PSK", &err, 0);

	/* Alternative for pre-3.6.3 versions:
	 * gnutls_priority_set_direct(session, "NORMAL:+ECDHE-PSK:+DHE-PSK:+PSK", &err)
	 */
	if (ret < 0) {
		if (ret == GNUTLS_E_INVALID_REQUEST) {
			fprintf(stderr, "Syntax error at: %s\n", err);
		}
		exit(1);
	}

	/* put the x509 credentials to the current session
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_PSK, pskcred));

	/* connect to the peer
	 */
	sd = tcp_connect();

	gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);
	gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session, GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT);

	/* Perform the TLS handshake
	 */
	do {
		ret = gnutls_handshake(session);
	} while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0);

	if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n");
		gnutls_perror(ret);
		goto end;
	} else {
		char *desc;

		desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session);
		printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc);
		gnutls_free(desc);
	}

	LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG)));

	LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF));
	if (ret == 0) {
		printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n");
		goto end;
	} else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
	} else if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
		goto end;
	}

	if (ret > 0) {
		printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret);
		for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) {
			fputc(buffer[ii], stdout);
		}
		fputs("\n", stdout);
	}

	CHECK(gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR));

end:

	tcp_close(sd);

	gnutls_deinit(session);

	gnutls_psk_free_client_credentials(pskcred);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.6 Client example with SRP authentication

The following client is a very simple SRP TLS client which connects to a server and authenticates using a username and a password. The server may authenticate itself using a certificate, and in that case it has to be verified.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>

/* Those functions are defined in other examples.
 */
extern void check_alert(gnutls_session_t session, int ret);
extern int tcp_connect(void);
extern void tcp_close(int sd);

#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define USERNAME "user"
#define PASSWORD "pass"
#define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt"
#define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n"

int main(void)
{
	int ret;
	int sd, ii;
	gnutls_session_t session;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
	gnutls_srp_client_credentials_t srp_cred;
	gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cert_cred;

	if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) {
		fprintf(stderr,
			"GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	/* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */
	gnutls_global_init();

	gnutls_srp_allocate_client_credentials(&srp_cred);
	gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&cert_cred);

	gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(cert_cred, CAFILE,
					       GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM);
	gnutls_srp_set_client_credentials(srp_cred, USERNAME, PASSWORD);

	/* connects to server
	 */
	sd = tcp_connect();

	/* Initialize TLS session
	 */
	gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT);

	/* Set the priorities.
	 */
	gnutls_priority_set_direct(session, "NORMAL:+SRP:+SRP-RSA:+SRP-DSS",
				   NULL);

	/* put the SRP credentials to the current session
	 */
	gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_SRP, srp_cred);
	gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, cert_cred);

	gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);
	gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session, GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT);

	/* Perform the TLS handshake
	 */
	do {
		ret = gnutls_handshake(session);
	} while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0);

	if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n");
		gnutls_perror(ret);
		goto end;
	} else {
		char *desc;

		desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session);
		printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc);
		gnutls_free(desc);
	}

	gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG));

	ret = gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF);
	if (gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) != 0 || ret == 0) {
		if (ret == 0) {
			printf("- Peer has closed the GnuTLS connection\n");
			goto end;
		} else {
			fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n",
				gnutls_strerror(ret));
			goto end;
		}
	} else
		check_alert(session, ret);

	if (ret > 0) {
		printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret);
		for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) {
			fputc(buffer[ii], stdout);
		}
		fputs("\n", stdout);
	}
	gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR);

end:

	tcp_close(sd);

	gnutls_deinit(session);

	gnutls_srp_free_client_credentials(srp_cred);
	gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(cert_cred);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.7 Legacy client example with X.509 certificate support

For applications that need to maintain compatibility with the GnuTLS 3.1.x library, this client example is identical to Client example with X.509 certificate support but utilizes APIs that were available in GnuTLS 3.1.4.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <assert.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/x509.h>
#include "examples.h"

/* A very basic TLS client, with X.509 authentication and server certificate
 * verification utilizing the GnuTLS 3.1.x API. 
 * Note that error recovery is minimal for simplicity.
 */

#define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0)
#define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd)                                             \
	do {                                                              \
		rval = cmd;                                               \
	} while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED); \
	assert(rval >= 0)

#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt"
#define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n"

extern int tcp_connect(void);
extern void tcp_close(int sd);
static int _verify_certificate_callback(gnutls_session_t session);

int main(void)
{
	int ret, sd, ii;
	gnutls_session_t session;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
	gnutls_certificate_credentials_t xcred;

	if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) {
		fprintf(stderr,
			"GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	CHECK(gnutls_global_init());

	/* X509 stuff */
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&xcred));

	/* sets the trusted cas file
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(xcred, CAFILE,
						     GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM));
	gnutls_certificate_set_verify_function(xcred,
					       _verify_certificate_callback);

	/* If client holds a certificate it can be set using the following:
	 *
	 gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file (xcred, 
	 "cert.pem", "key.pem", 
	 GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); 
	 */

	/* Initialize TLS session 
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT));

	gnutls_session_set_ptr(session, (void *)"www.example.com");

	gnutls_server_name_set(session, GNUTLS_NAME_DNS, "www.example.com",
			       strlen("www.example.com"));

	/* use default priorities */
	CHECK(gnutls_set_default_priority(session));
#if 0
	/* if more fine-graned control is required */
	ret = gnutls_priority_set_direct(session, "NORMAL", &err);
	if (ret < 0) {
		if (ret == GNUTLS_E_INVALID_REQUEST) {
			fprintf(stderr, "Syntax error at: %s\n", err);
		}
		exit(1);
	}
#endif

	/* put the x509 credentials to the current session
	 */
	CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, xcred));

	/* connect to the peer
	 */
	sd = tcp_connect();

	gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);
	gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session, GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT);

	/* Perform the TLS handshake
	 */
	do {
		ret = gnutls_handshake(session);
	} while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0);

	if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n");
		gnutls_perror(ret);
		goto end;
	} else {
		char *desc;

		desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session);
		printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc);
		gnutls_free(desc);
	}

	LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG)));

	LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF));
	if (ret == 0) {
		printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n");
		goto end;
	} else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
	} else if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
		goto end;
	}

	if (ret > 0) {
		printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret);
		for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) {
			fputc(buffer[ii], stdout);
		}
		fputs("\n", stdout);
	}

	CHECK(gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR));

end:

	tcp_close(sd);

	gnutls_deinit(session);

	gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(xcred);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

/* This function will verify the peer's certificate, and check
 * if the hostname matches, as well as the activation, expiration dates.
 */
static int _verify_certificate_callback(gnutls_session_t session)
{
	unsigned int status;
	int type;
	const char *hostname;
	gnutls_datum_t out;

	/* read hostname */
	hostname = gnutls_session_get_ptr(session);

	/* This verification function uses the trusted CAs in the credentials
	 * structure. So you must have installed one or more CA certificates.
	 */

	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3(session, hostname, &status));

	type = gnutls_certificate_type_get(session);

	CHECK(gnutls_certificate_verification_status_print(status, type, &out,
							   0));

	printf("%s", out.data);

	gnutls_free(out.data);

	if (status != 0) /* Certificate is not trusted */
		return GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_ERROR;

	/* notify gnutls to continue handshake normally */
	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.8 Client example using the C++ API

The following client is a simple example of a client client utilizing the GnuTLS C++ API.

#include <config.h>
#include <iostream>
#include <stdexcept>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutlsxx.h>
#include <cstring> /* for strlen */

/* A very basic TLS client, with anonymous authentication.
 * written by Eduardo Villanueva Che.
 */

#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define SA struct sockaddr

#define CAFILE "ca.pem"
#define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n"

extern "C"
{
    int tcp_connect(void);
    void tcp_close(int sd);
}


int main(void)
{
    int sd = -1;
    gnutls_global_init();

    try
    {

        /* Allow connections to servers that have OpenPGP keys as well.
         */
        gnutls::client_session session;

        /* X509 stuff */
        gnutls::certificate_credentials credentials;


        /* sets the trusted cas file
         */
        credentials.set_x509_trust_file(CAFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM);
        /* put the x509 credentials to the current session
         */
        session.set_credentials(credentials);

        /* Use default priorities */
        session.set_priority ("NORMAL", NULL);

        /* connect to the peer
         */
        sd = tcp_connect();
        session.set_transport_ptr((gnutls_transport_ptr_t) (ptrdiff_t)sd);

        /* Perform the TLS handshake
         */
        int ret = session.handshake();
        if (ret < 0)
        {
            throw std::runtime_error("Handshake failed");
        }
        else
        {
            std::cout << "- Handshake was completed" << std::endl;
        }

        session.send(MSG, strlen(MSG));
        char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
        ret = session.recv(buffer, MAX_BUF);
        if (ret == 0)
        {
            throw std::runtime_error("Peer has closed the TLS connection");
        }
        else if (ret < 0)
        {
            throw std::runtime_error(gnutls_strerror(ret));
        }

        std::cout << "- Received " << ret << " bytes:" << std::endl;
        std::cout.write(buffer, ret);
        std::cout << std::endl;

        session.bye(GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR);
    }
    catch (std::exception &ex)
    {
        std::cerr << "Exception caught: " << ex.what() << std::endl;
    }

    if (sd != -1)
        tcp_close(sd);

    gnutls_global_deinit();

    return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.9 Echo server with PSK authentication

This is a server which supports PSK authentication.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <errno.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
#include <netinet/in.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>

#define KEYFILE "key.pem"
#define CERTFILE "cert.pem"
#define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt"
#define CRLFILE "crl.pem"

#define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \
	do {                  \
		rval = cmd;   \
	} while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED)

/* This is a sample TLS echo server, supporting X.509 and PSK
   authentication.
 */

#define SOCKET_ERR(err, s)  \
	if (err == -1) {    \
		perror(s);  \
		return (1); \
	}
#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define PORT 5556 /* listen to 5556 port */

static int pskfunc(gnutls_session_t session, const char *username,
		   gnutls_datum_t *key)
{
	printf("psk: username %s\n", username);
	key->data = gnutls_malloc(4);
	key->data[0] = 0xDE;
	key->data[1] = 0xAD;
	key->data[2] = 0xBE;
	key->data[3] = 0xEF;
	key->size = 4;
	return 0;
}

int main(void)
{
	int err, listen_sd;
	int sd, ret;
	struct sockaddr_in sa_serv;
	struct sockaddr_in sa_cli;
	socklen_t client_len;
	char topbuf[512];
	gnutls_session_t session;
	gnutls_certificate_credentials_t x509_cred;
	gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t psk_cred;
	gnutls_priority_t priority_cache;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
	int optval = 1;
	int kx;

	if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) {
		fprintf(stderr,
			"GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	/* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */
	gnutls_global_init();

	gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&x509_cred);
	gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(x509_cred, CAFILE,
					       GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM);

	gnutls_certificate_set_x509_crl_file(x509_cred, CRLFILE,
					     GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM);

	gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file(x509_cred, CERTFILE, KEYFILE,
					     GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM);

	gnutls_psk_allocate_server_credentials(&psk_cred);
	gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_function(psk_cred, pskfunc);

	/* pre-3.6.3 equivalent:
	 * gnutls_priority_init(&priority_cache,
	 *                      "NORMAL:+PSK:+ECDHE-PSK:+DHE-PSK",
	 *                      NULL);
	 */
	gnutls_priority_init2(&priority_cache, "+ECDHE-PSK:+DHE-PSK:+PSK", NULL,
			      GNUTLS_PRIORITY_INIT_DEF_APPEND);

	gnutls_certificate_set_known_dh_params(x509_cred,
					       GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_MEDIUM);

	/* Socket operations
	 */
	listen_sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);
	SOCKET_ERR(listen_sd, "socket");

	memset(&sa_serv, '\0', sizeof(sa_serv));
	sa_serv.sin_family = AF_INET;
	sa_serv.sin_addr.s_addr = INADDR_ANY;
	sa_serv.sin_port = htons(PORT); /* Server Port number */

	setsockopt(listen_sd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_REUSEADDR, (void *)&optval,
		   sizeof(int));

	err = bind(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_serv, sizeof(sa_serv));
	SOCKET_ERR(err, "bind");
	err = listen(listen_sd, 1024);
	SOCKET_ERR(err, "listen");

	printf("Server ready. Listening to port '%d'.\n\n", PORT);

	client_len = sizeof(sa_cli);
	for (;;) {
		gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_SERVER);
		gnutls_priority_set(session, priority_cache);
		gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE,
				       x509_cred);
		gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_PSK, psk_cred);

		/* request client certificate if any.
		 */
		gnutls_certificate_server_set_request(session,
						      GNUTLS_CERT_REQUEST);

		sd = accept(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_cli, &client_len);

		printf("- connection from %s, port %d\n",
		       inet_ntop(AF_INET, &sa_cli.sin_addr, topbuf,
				 sizeof(topbuf)),
		       ntohs(sa_cli.sin_port));

		gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);
		LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_handshake(session));
		if (ret < 0) {
			close(sd);
			gnutls_deinit(session);
			fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake has failed (%s)\n\n",
				gnutls_strerror(ret));
			continue;
		}
		printf("- Handshake was completed\n");

		kx = gnutls_kx_get(session);
		if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_PSK || kx == GNUTLS_KX_DHE_PSK ||
		    kx == GNUTLS_KX_ECDHE_PSK) {
			printf("- User %s was connected\n",
			       gnutls_psk_server_get_username(session));
		}

		/* see the Getting peer's information example */
		/* print_info(session); */

		for (;;) {
			LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer,
							   MAX_BUF));

			if (ret == 0) {
				printf("\n- Peer has closed the GnuTLS connection\n");
				break;
			} else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) {
				fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n",
					gnutls_strerror(ret));
			} else if (ret < 0) {
				fprintf(stderr,
					"\n*** Received corrupted "
					"data(%d). Closing the connection.\n\n",
					ret);
				break;
			} else if (ret > 0) {
				/* echo data back to the client
				 */
				gnutls_record_send(session, buffer, ret);
			}
		}
		printf("\n");
		/* do not wait for the peer to close the connection.
		 */
		LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR));

		close(sd);
		gnutls_deinit(session);
	}
	close(listen_sd);

	gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(x509_cred);
	gnutls_psk_free_server_credentials(psk_cred);

	gnutls_priority_deinit(priority_cache);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.10 Echo server with SRP authentication

This is a server which supports SRP authentication. It is also possible to combine this functionality with a certificate server. Here it is separate for simplicity.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <errno.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
#include <netinet/in.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>

#define SRP_PASSWD "tpasswd"
#define SRP_PASSWD_CONF "tpasswd.conf"

#define KEYFILE "key.pem"
#define CERTFILE "cert.pem"
#define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt"

#define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \
	do {                  \
		rval = cmd;   \
	} while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED)

/* This is a sample TLS-SRP echo server.
 */

#define SOCKET_ERR(err, s)  \
	if (err == -1) {    \
		perror(s);  \
		return (1); \
	}
#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define PORT 5556 /* listen to 5556 port */

int main(void)
{
	int err, listen_sd;
	int sd, ret;
	struct sockaddr_in sa_serv;
	struct sockaddr_in sa_cli;
	socklen_t client_len;
	char topbuf[512];
	gnutls_session_t session;
	gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t srp_cred;
	gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cert_cred;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
	int optval = 1;
	char name[256];

	strcpy(name, "Echo Server");

	if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) {
		fprintf(stderr,
			"GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	/* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */
	gnutls_global_init();

	/* SRP_PASSWD a password file (created with the included srptool utility) 
	 */
	gnutls_srp_allocate_server_credentials(&srp_cred);
	gnutls_srp_set_server_credentials_file(srp_cred, SRP_PASSWD,
					       SRP_PASSWD_CONF);

	gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&cert_cred);
	gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(cert_cred, CAFILE,
					       GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM);
	gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file(cert_cred, CERTFILE, KEYFILE,
					     GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM);

	/* TCP socket operations
	 */
	listen_sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);
	SOCKET_ERR(listen_sd, "socket");

	memset(&sa_serv, '\0', sizeof(sa_serv));
	sa_serv.sin_family = AF_INET;
	sa_serv.sin_addr.s_addr = INADDR_ANY;
	sa_serv.sin_port = htons(PORT); /* Server Port number */

	setsockopt(listen_sd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_REUSEADDR, (void *)&optval,
		   sizeof(int));

	err = bind(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_serv, sizeof(sa_serv));
	SOCKET_ERR(err, "bind");
	err = listen(listen_sd, 1024);
	SOCKET_ERR(err, "listen");

	printf("%s ready. Listening to port '%d'.\n\n", name, PORT);

	client_len = sizeof(sa_cli);
	for (;;) {
		gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_SERVER);
		gnutls_priority_set_direct(session,
					   "NORMAL"
					   ":-KX-ALL:+SRP:+SRP-DSS:+SRP-RSA",
					   NULL);
		gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_SRP, srp_cred);
		/* for the certificate authenticated ciphersuites.
		 */
		gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE,
				       cert_cred);

		/* We don't request any certificate from the client.
		 * If we did we would need to verify it. One way of
		 * doing that is shown in the "Verifying a certificate"
		 * example.
		 */
		gnutls_certificate_server_set_request(session,
						      GNUTLS_CERT_IGNORE);

		sd = accept(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_cli, &client_len);

		printf("- connection from %s, port %d\n",
		       inet_ntop(AF_INET, &sa_cli.sin_addr, topbuf,
				 sizeof(topbuf)),
		       ntohs(sa_cli.sin_port));

		gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);

		LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_handshake(session));
		if (ret < 0) {
			close(sd);
			gnutls_deinit(session);
			fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake has failed (%s)\n\n",
				gnutls_strerror(ret));
			continue;
		}
		printf("- Handshake was completed\n");
		printf("- User %s was connected\n",
		       gnutls_srp_server_get_username(session));

		/* print_info(session); */

		for (;;) {
			LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer,
							   MAX_BUF));

			if (ret == 0) {
				printf("\n- Peer has closed the GnuTLS connection\n");
				break;
			} else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) {
				fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n",
					gnutls_strerror(ret));
			} else if (ret < 0) {
				fprintf(stderr,
					"\n*** Received corrupted "
					"data(%d). Closing the connection.\n\n",
					ret);
				break;
			} else if (ret > 0) {
				/* echo data back to the client
				 */
				gnutls_record_send(session, buffer, ret);
			}
		}
		printf("\n");
		/* do not wait for the peer to close the connection. */
		LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR));

		close(sd);
		gnutls_deinit(session);
	}
	close(listen_sd);

	gnutls_srp_free_server_credentials(srp_cred);
	gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(cert_cred);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.11 Echo server with anonymous authentication

This example server supports anonymous authentication, and could be used to serve the example client for anonymous authentication.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <errno.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
#include <netinet/in.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>

/* This is a sample TLS 1.0 echo server, for anonymous authentication only.
 */

#define SOCKET_ERR(err, s)  \
	if (err == -1) {    \
		perror(s);  \
		return (1); \
	}
#define MAX_BUF 1024
#define PORT 5556 /* listen to 5556 port */

int main(void)
{
	int err, listen_sd;
	int sd, ret;
	struct sockaddr_in sa_serv;
	struct sockaddr_in sa_cli;
	socklen_t client_len;
	char topbuf[512];
	gnutls_session_t session;
	gnutls_anon_server_credentials_t anoncred;
	char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1];
	int optval = 1;

	if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) {
		fprintf(stderr,
			"GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	/* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */
	gnutls_global_init();

	gnutls_anon_allocate_server_credentials(&anoncred);

	gnutls_anon_set_server_known_dh_params(anoncred,
					       GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_MEDIUM);

	/* Socket operations
	 */
	listen_sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);
	SOCKET_ERR(listen_sd, "socket");

	memset(&sa_serv, '\0', sizeof(sa_serv));
	sa_serv.sin_family = AF_INET;
	sa_serv.sin_addr.s_addr = INADDR_ANY;
	sa_serv.sin_port = htons(PORT); /* Server Port number */

	setsockopt(listen_sd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_REUSEADDR, (void *)&optval,
		   sizeof(int));

	err = bind(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_serv, sizeof(sa_serv));
	SOCKET_ERR(err, "bind");
	err = listen(listen_sd, 1024);
	SOCKET_ERR(err, "listen");

	printf("Server ready. Listening to port '%d'.\n\n", PORT);

	client_len = sizeof(sa_cli);
	for (;;) {
		gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_SERVER);
		gnutls_priority_set_direct(session,
					   "NORMAL:+ANON-ECDH:+ANON-DH", NULL);
		gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_ANON, anoncred);

		sd = accept(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_cli, &client_len);

		printf("- connection from %s, port %d\n",
		       inet_ntop(AF_INET, &sa_cli.sin_addr, topbuf,
				 sizeof(topbuf)),
		       ntohs(sa_cli.sin_port));

		gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd);

		do {
			ret = gnutls_handshake(session);
		} while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0);

		if (ret < 0) {
			close(sd);
			gnutls_deinit(session);
			fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake has failed (%s)\n\n",
				gnutls_strerror(ret));
			continue;
		}
		printf("- Handshake was completed\n");

		/* see the Getting peer's information example */
		/* print_info(session); */

		for (;;) {
			ret = gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF);

			if (ret == 0) {
				printf("\n- Peer has closed the GnuTLS connection\n");
				break;
			} else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) {
				fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n",
					gnutls_strerror(ret));
			} else if (ret < 0) {
				fprintf(stderr,
					"\n*** Received corrupted "
					"data(%d). Closing the connection.\n\n",
					ret);
				break;
			} else if (ret > 0) {
				/* echo data back to the client
				 */
				gnutls_record_send(session, buffer, ret);
			}
		}
		printf("\n");
		/* do not wait for the peer to close the connection.
		 */
		gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR);

		close(sd);
		gnutls_deinit(session);
	}
	close(listen_sd);

	gnutls_anon_free_server_credentials(anoncred);

	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.12 Helper functions for TCP connections

Those helper function abstract away TCP connection handling from the other examples. It is required to build some examples.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
#include <netinet/in.h>
#include <unistd.h>

/* tcp.c */
int tcp_connect(void);
void tcp_close(int sd);

/* Connects to the peer and returns a socket
 * descriptor.
 */
extern int tcp_connect(void)
{
	const char *PORT = "5556";
	const char *SERVER = "127.0.0.1";
	int err, sd;
	struct sockaddr_in sa;

	/* connects to server
	 */
	sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);

	memset(&sa, '\0', sizeof(sa));
	sa.sin_family = AF_INET;
	sa.sin_port = htons(atoi(PORT));
	inet_pton(AF_INET, SERVER, &sa.sin_addr);

	err = connect(sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa, sizeof(sa));
	if (err < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "Connect error\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	return sd;
}

/* closes the given socket descriptor.
 */
extern void tcp_close(int sd)
{
	shutdown(sd, SHUT_RDWR); /* no more receptions */
	close(sd);
}

Previous: , Up: More advanced client and servers   [Contents][Index]

7.3.13 Helper functions for UDP connections

The UDP helper functions abstract away UDP connection handling from the other examples. It is required to build the examples using UDP.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/socket.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
#include <netinet/in.h>
#include <unistd.h>

/* udp.c */
int udp_connect(void);
void udp_close(int sd);

/* Connects to the peer and returns a socket
 * descriptor.
 */
extern int udp_connect(void)
{
	const char *PORT = "5557";
	const char *SERVER = "127.0.0.1";
	int err, sd;
#if defined(IP_DONTFRAG) || defined(IP_MTU_DISCOVER)
	int optval;
#endif
	struct sockaddr_in sa;

	/* connects to server
	 */
	sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0);

	memset(&sa, '\0', sizeof(sa));
	sa.sin_family = AF_INET;
	sa.sin_port = htons(atoi(PORT));
	inet_pton(AF_INET, SERVER, &sa.sin_addr);

#if defined(IP_DONTFRAG)
	optval = 1;
	setsockopt(sd, IPPROTO_IP, IP_DONTFRAG, (const void *)&optval,
		   sizeof(optval));
#elif defined(IP_MTU_DISCOVER)
	optval = IP_PMTUDISC_DO;
	setsockopt(sd, IPPROTO_IP, IP_MTU_DISCOVER, (const void *)&optval,
		   sizeof(optval));
#endif

	err = connect(sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa, sizeof(sa));
	if (err < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "Connect error\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	return sd;
}

/* closes the given socket descriptor.
 */
extern void udp_close(int sd)
{
	close(sd);
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: GnuTLS application examples   [Contents][Index]

7.4 OCSP example

Generate OCSP request

A small tool to generate OCSP requests.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/crypto.h>
#include <gnutls/ocsp.h>
#ifndef NO_LIBCURL
#include <curl/curl.h>
#endif
#include "read-file.h"

size_t get_data(void *buffer, size_t size, size_t nmemb, void *userp);
static gnutls_x509_crt_t load_cert(const char *cert_file);
static void _response_info(const gnutls_datum_t *data);
static void _generate_request(gnutls_datum_t *rdata, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert,
			      gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_datum_t *nonce);
static int _verify_response(gnutls_datum_t *data, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert,
			    gnutls_x509_crt_t signer, gnutls_datum_t *nonce);

/* This program queries an OCSP server.
   It expects three files. argv[1] containing the certificate to
   be checked, argv[2] holding the issuer for this certificate,
   and argv[3] holding a trusted certificate to verify OCSP's response.
   argv[4] is optional and should hold the server host name.
   
   For simplicity the libcurl library is used.
 */

int main(int argc, char *argv[])
{
	gnutls_datum_t ud, tmp;
	int ret;
	gnutls_datum_t req;
	gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, issuer, signer;
#ifndef NO_LIBCURL
	CURL *handle;
	struct curl_slist *headers = NULL;
#endif
	int v, seq;
	const char *cert_file = argv[1];
	const char *issuer_file = argv[2];
	const char *signer_file = argv[3];
	char *hostname = NULL;
	unsigned char noncebuf[23];
	gnutls_datum_t nonce = { noncebuf, sizeof(noncebuf) };

	gnutls_global_init();

	if (argc > 4)
		hostname = argv[4];

	ret = gnutls_rnd(GNUTLS_RND_NONCE, nonce.data, nonce.size);
	if (ret < 0)
		exit(1);

	cert = load_cert(cert_file);
	issuer = load_cert(issuer_file);
	signer = load_cert(signer_file);

	if (hostname == NULL) {
		for (seq = 0;; seq++) {
			ret = gnutls_x509_crt_get_authority_info_access(
				cert, seq, GNUTLS_IA_OCSP_URI, &tmp, NULL);
			if (ret == GNUTLS_E_UNKNOWN_ALGORITHM)
				continue;
			if (ret == GNUTLS_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE) {
				fprintf(stderr,
					"No URI was found in the certificate.\n");
				exit(1);
			}
			if (ret < 0) {
				fprintf(stderr, "error: %s\n",
					gnutls_strerror(ret));
				exit(1);
			}

			printf("CA issuers URI: %.*s\n", tmp.size, tmp.data);

			hostname = malloc(tmp.size + 1);
			if (!hostname) {
				fprintf(stderr,
					"error: cannot allocate memory\n");
				exit(1);
			}
			memcpy(hostname, tmp.data, tmp.size);
			hostname[tmp.size] = 0;

			gnutls_free(tmp.data);
			break;
		}
	}

	/* Note that the OCSP servers hostname might be available
	 * using gnutls_x509_crt_get_authority_info_access() in the issuer's
	 * certificate */

	memset(&ud, 0, sizeof(ud));
	fprintf(stderr, "Connecting to %s\n", hostname);

	_generate_request(&req, cert, issuer, &nonce);

#ifndef NO_LIBCURL
	curl_global_init(CURL_GLOBAL_ALL);

	handle = curl_easy_init();
	if (handle == NULL)
		exit(1);

	headers = curl_slist_append(headers,
				    "Content-Type: application/ocsp-request");

	curl_easy_setopt(handle, CURLOPT_HTTPHEADER, headers);
	curl_easy_setopt(handle, CURLOPT_POSTFIELDS, (void *)req.data);
	curl_easy_setopt(handle, CURLOPT_POSTFIELDSIZE, req.size);
	curl_easy_setopt(handle, CURLOPT_URL, hostname);
	curl_easy_setopt(handle, CURLOPT_WRITEFUNCTION, get_data);
	curl_easy_setopt(handle, CURLOPT_WRITEDATA, &ud);

	ret = curl_easy_perform(handle);
	if (ret != 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "curl[%d] error %d\n", __LINE__, ret);
		exit(1);
	}

	curl_easy_cleanup(handle);
#endif

	_response_info(&ud);

	v = _verify_response(&ud, cert, signer, &nonce);

	gnutls_x509_crt_deinit(cert);
	gnutls_x509_crt_deinit(issuer);
	gnutls_x509_crt_deinit(signer);
	gnutls_global_deinit();

	return v;
}

static void _response_info(const gnutls_datum_t *data)
{
	gnutls_ocsp_resp_t resp;
	int ret;
	gnutls_datum buf;

	ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_init(&resp);
	if (ret < 0)
		exit(1);

	ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_import(resp, data);
	if (ret < 0)
		exit(1);

	ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_print(resp, GNUTLS_OCSP_PRINT_FULL, &buf);
	if (ret != 0)
		exit(1);

	printf("%.*s", buf.size, buf.data);
	gnutls_free(buf.data);

	gnutls_ocsp_resp_deinit(resp);
}

static gnutls_x509_crt_t load_cert(const char *cert_file)
{
	gnutls_x509_crt_t crt;
	int ret;
	gnutls_datum_t data;
	size_t size;

	ret = gnutls_x509_crt_init(&crt);
	if (ret < 0)
		exit(1);

	data.data = (void *)read_file(cert_file, RF_BINARY, &size);
	data.size = size;

	if (!data.data) {
		fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open file: %s\n", cert_file);
		exit(1);
	}

	ret = gnutls_x509_crt_import(crt, &data, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM);
	free(data.data);
	if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "Cannot import certificate in %s: %s\n",
			cert_file, gnutls_strerror(ret));
		exit(1);
	}

	return crt;
}

static void _generate_request(gnutls_datum_t *rdata, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert,
			      gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_datum_t *nonce)
{
	gnutls_ocsp_req_t req;
	int ret;

	ret = gnutls_ocsp_req_init(&req);
	if (ret < 0)
		exit(1);

	ret = gnutls_ocsp_req_add_cert(req, GNUTLS_DIG_SHA1, issuer, cert);
	if (ret < 0)
		exit(1);

	ret = gnutls_ocsp_req_set_nonce(req, 0, nonce);
	if (ret < 0)
		exit(1);

	ret = gnutls_ocsp_req_export(req, rdata);
	if (ret != 0)
		exit(1);

	gnutls_ocsp_req_deinit(req);

	return;
}

static int _verify_response(gnutls_datum_t *data, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert,
			    gnutls_x509_crt_t signer, gnutls_datum_t *nonce)
{
	gnutls_ocsp_resp_t resp;
	int ret;
	unsigned verify;
	gnutls_datum_t rnonce;

	ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_init(&resp);
	if (ret < 0)
		exit(1);

	ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_import(resp, data);
	if (ret < 0)
		exit(1);

	ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_check_crt(resp, 0, cert);
	if (ret < 0)
		exit(1);

	ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_get_nonce(resp, NULL, &rnonce);
	if (ret < 0)
		exit(1);

	if (rnonce.size != nonce->size ||
	    memcmp(nonce->data, rnonce.data, nonce->size) != 0) {
		exit(1);
	}

	ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_verify_direct(resp, signer, &verify, 0);
	if (ret < 0)
		exit(1);

	printf("Verifying OCSP Response: ");
	if (verify == 0)
		printf("Verification success!\n");
	else
		printf("Verification error!\n");

	if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_SIGNER_NOT_FOUND)
		printf("Signer cert not found\n");

	if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_SIGNER_KEYUSAGE_ERROR)
		printf("Signer cert keyusage error\n");

	if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_UNTRUSTED_SIGNER)
		printf("Signer cert is not trusted\n");

	if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_INSECURE_ALGORITHM)
		printf("Insecure algorithm\n");

	if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_SIGNATURE_FAILURE)
		printf("Signature failure\n");

	if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_CERT_NOT_ACTIVATED)
		printf("Signer cert not yet activated\n");

	if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_CERT_EXPIRED)
		printf("Signer cert expired\n");

	gnutls_free(rnonce.data);
	gnutls_ocsp_resp_deinit(resp);

	return verify;
}

size_t get_data(void *buffer, size_t size, size_t nmemb, void *userp)
{
	gnutls_datum_t *ud = userp;

	size *= nmemb;

	ud->data = realloc(ud->data, size + ud->size);
	if (ud->data == NULL) {
		fprintf(stderr, "Not enough memory for the request\n");
		exit(1);
	}

	memcpy(&ud->data[ud->size], buffer, size);
	ud->size += size;

	return size;
}

Previous: , Up: GnuTLS application examples   [Contents][Index]

7.5 Miscellaneous examples


Next: , Up: Miscellaneous examples   [Contents][Index]

7.5.1 Checking for an alert

This is a function that checks if an alert has been received in the current session.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>

#include "examples.h"

/* This function will check whether the given return code from
 * a gnutls function (recv/send), is an alert, and will print
 * that alert.
 */
void check_alert(gnutls_session_t session, int ret)
{
	int last_alert;

	if (ret == GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED ||
	    ret == GNUTLS_E_FATAL_ALERT_RECEIVED) {
		last_alert = gnutls_alert_get(session);

		/* The check for renegotiation is only useful if we are 
		 * a server, and we had requested a rehandshake.
		 */
		if (last_alert == GNUTLS_A_NO_RENEGOTIATION &&
		    ret == GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED)
			printf("* Received NO_RENEGOTIATION alert. "
			       "Client Does not support renegotiation.\n");
		else
			printf("* Received alert '%d': %s.\n", last_alert,
			       gnutls_alert_get_name(last_alert));
	}
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: Miscellaneous examples   [Contents][Index]

7.5.2 X.509 certificate parsing example

To demonstrate the X.509 parsing capabilities an example program is listed below. That program reads the peer’s certificate, and prints information about it.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/x509.h>

#include "examples.h"

static const char *bin2hex(const void *bin, size_t bin_size)
{
	static char printable[110];
	const unsigned char *_bin = bin;
	char *print;
	size_t i;

	if (bin_size > 50)
		bin_size = 50;

	print = printable;
	for (i = 0; i < bin_size; i++) {
		sprintf(print, "%.2x ", _bin[i]);
		print += 2;
	}

	return printable;
}

/* This function will print information about this session's peer
 * certificate.
 */
void print_x509_certificate_info(gnutls_session_t session)
{
	char serial[40];
	char dn[256];
	size_t size;
	unsigned int algo, bits;
	time_t expiration_time, activation_time;
	const gnutls_datum_t *cert_list;
	unsigned int cert_list_size = 0;
	gnutls_x509_crt_t cert;
	gnutls_datum_t cinfo;

	/* This function only works for X.509 certificates.
	 */
	if (gnutls_certificate_type_get(session) != GNUTLS_CRT_X509)
		return;

	cert_list = gnutls_certificate_get_peers(session, &cert_list_size);

	printf("Peer provided %d certificates.\n", cert_list_size);

	if (cert_list_size > 0) {
		int ret;

		/* we only print information about the first certificate.
		 */
		gnutls_x509_crt_init(&cert);

		gnutls_x509_crt_import(cert, &cert_list[0],
				       GNUTLS_X509_FMT_DER);

		printf("Certificate info:\n");

		/* This is the preferred way of printing short information about
		   a certificate. */

		ret = gnutls_x509_crt_print(cert, GNUTLS_CRT_PRINT_ONELINE,
					    &cinfo);
		if (ret == 0) {
			printf("\t%s\n", cinfo.data);
			gnutls_free(cinfo.data);
		}

		/* If you want to extract fields manually for some other reason,
		   below are popular example calls. */

		expiration_time = gnutls_x509_crt_get_expiration_time(cert);
		activation_time = gnutls_x509_crt_get_activation_time(cert);

		printf("\tCertificate is valid since: %s",
		       ctime(&activation_time));
		printf("\tCertificate expires: %s", ctime(&expiration_time));

		/* Print the serial number of the certificate.
		 */
		size = sizeof(serial);
		gnutls_x509_crt_get_serial(cert, serial, &size);

		printf("\tCertificate serial number: %s\n",
		       bin2hex(serial, size));

		/* Extract some of the public key algorithm's parameters
		 */
		algo = gnutls_x509_crt_get_pk_algorithm(cert, &bits);

		printf("Certificate public key: %s",
		       gnutls_pk_algorithm_get_name(algo));

		/* Print the version of the X.509
		 * certificate.
		 */
		printf("\tCertificate version: #%d\n",
		       gnutls_x509_crt_get_version(cert));

		size = sizeof(dn);
		gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn(cert, dn, &size);
		printf("\tDN: %s\n", dn);

		size = sizeof(dn);
		gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer_dn(cert, dn, &size);
		printf("\tIssuer's DN: %s\n", dn);

		gnutls_x509_crt_deinit(cert);
	}
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: Miscellaneous examples   [Contents][Index]

7.5.3 Listing the ciphersuites in a priority string

This is a small program to list the enabled ciphersuites by a priority string.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#include <config.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>

static void print_cipher_suite_list(const char *priorities)
{
	size_t i;
	int ret;
	unsigned int idx;
	const char *name;
	const char *err;
	unsigned char id[2];
	gnutls_protocol_t version;
	gnutls_priority_t pcache;

	if (priorities != NULL) {
		printf("Cipher suites for %s\n", priorities);

		ret = gnutls_priority_init(&pcache, priorities, &err);
		if (ret < 0) {
			fprintf(stderr, "Syntax error at: %s\n", err);
			exit(1);
		}

		for (i = 0;; i++) {
			ret = gnutls_priority_get_cipher_suite_index(pcache, i,
								     &idx);
			if (ret == GNUTLS_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE)
				break;
			if (ret == GNUTLS_E_UNKNOWN_CIPHER_SUITE)
				continue;

			name = gnutls_cipher_suite_info(idx, id, NULL, NULL,
							NULL, &version);

			if (name != NULL)
				printf("%-50s\t0x%02x, 0x%02x\t%s\n", name,
				       (unsigned char)id[0],
				       (unsigned char)id[1],
				       gnutls_protocol_get_name(version));
		}

		return;
	}
}

int main(int argc, char **argv)
{
	if (argc > 1)
		print_cipher_suite_list(argv[1]);
	return 0;
}

Previous: , Up: Miscellaneous examples   [Contents][Index]

7.5.4 PKCS #12 structure generation example

This small program demonstrates the usage of the PKCS #12 API, by generating such a structure.

/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */

#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
#include <config.h>
#endif

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <gnutls/gnutls.h>
#include <gnutls/pkcs12.h>

#include "examples.h"

#define OUTFILE "out.p12"

/* This function will write a pkcs12 structure into a file.
 * cert: is a DER encoded certificate
 * pkcs8_key: is a PKCS #8 encrypted key (note that this must be
 *  encrypted using a PKCS #12 cipher, or some browsers will crash)
 * password: is the password used to encrypt the PKCS #12 packet.
 */
int write_pkcs12(const gnutls_datum_t *cert, const gnutls_datum_t *pkcs8_key,
		 const char *password)
{
	gnutls_pkcs12_t pkcs12;
	int ret, bag_index;
	gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, key_bag;
	char pkcs12_struct[10 * 1024];
	size_t pkcs12_struct_size;
	FILE *fp;

	/* A good idea might be to use gnutls_x509_privkey_get_key_id()
	 * to obtain a unique ID.
	 */
	gnutls_datum_t key_id = { (void *)"\x00\x00\x07", 3 };

	gnutls_global_init();

	/* Firstly we create two helper bags, which hold the certificate,
	 * and the (encrypted) key.
	 */

	gnutls_pkcs12_bag_init(&bag);
	gnutls_pkcs12_bag_init(&key_bag);

	ret = gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_data(bag, GNUTLS_BAG_CERTIFICATE, cert);
	if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "ret: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
		return 1;
	}

	/* ret now holds the bag's index.
	 */
	bag_index = ret;

	/* Associate a friendly name with the given certificate. Used
	 * by browsers.
	 */
	gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_friendly_name(bag, bag_index, "My name");

	/* Associate the certificate with the key using a unique key
	 * ID.
	 */
	gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_key_id(bag, bag_index, &key_id);

	/* use weak encryption for the certificate. 
	 */
	gnutls_pkcs12_bag_encrypt(bag, password, GNUTLS_PKCS_USE_PKCS12_RC2_40);

	/* Now the key.
	 */

	ret = gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_data(
		key_bag, GNUTLS_BAG_PKCS8_ENCRYPTED_KEY, pkcs8_key);
	if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "ret: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
		return 1;
	}

	/* Note that since the PKCS #8 key is already encrypted we don't
	 * bother encrypting that bag.
	 */
	bag_index = ret;

	gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_friendly_name(key_bag, bag_index, "My name");

	gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_key_id(key_bag, bag_index, &key_id);

	/* The bags were filled. Now create the PKCS #12 structure.
	 */
	gnutls_pkcs12_init(&pkcs12);

	/* Insert the two bags in the PKCS #12 structure.
	 */

	gnutls_pkcs12_set_bag(pkcs12, bag);
	gnutls_pkcs12_set_bag(pkcs12, key_bag);

	/* Generate a message authentication code for the PKCS #12
	 * structure.
	 */
	gnutls_pkcs12_generate_mac(pkcs12, password);

	pkcs12_struct_size = sizeof(pkcs12_struct);
	ret = gnutls_pkcs12_export(pkcs12, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_DER, pkcs12_struct,
				   &pkcs12_struct_size);
	if (ret < 0) {
		fprintf(stderr, "ret: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret));
		return 1;
	}

	fp = fopen(OUTFILE, "w");
	if (fp == NULL) {
		fprintf(stderr, "cannot open file\n");
		return 1;
	}
	fwrite(pkcs12_struct, 1, pkcs12_struct_size, fp);
	fclose(fp);

	gnutls_pkcs12_bag_deinit(bag);
	gnutls_pkcs12_bag_deinit(key_bag);
	gnutls_pkcs12_deinit(pkcs12);

	return 0;
}

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

8 System-wide configuration of the library

GnuTLS 3.6.9 introduced a system-wide configuration of the library which can be used to disable or mark algorithms and protocols as insecure system-wide, overriding the library defaults. The format of this configuration file is of an INI file, with the hash (’#’) allowed for commenting. It intentionally does not allow switching algorithms or protocols which were disabled or marked as insecure during compile time to the secure set. This is to prevent the feature from being used to attack the system. Unknown options or sections in the configuration file are skipped unless the environment variable GNUTLS_SYSTEM_PRIORITY_FAIL_ON_INVALID is set to 1, where it would cause the library to exit on unknown options.

The location of the default configuration file is /etc/gnutls/config, but its actual location may be overridden during compile time or at run-time using the GNUTLS_SYSTEM_PRIORITY_FILE environment variable. The file used can be queried using gnutls_get_system_config_file.

Function: const char * gnutls_get_system_config_file ( void)

Returns the filename of the system wide configuration file to be loaded by the library.

Returns: a constant pointer to the config file path

Since: 3.6.9


Next: , Up: System-wide configuration of the library   [Contents][Index]

8.1 Application-specific priority strings

It is possible to specify custom cipher priority strings, in addition to the default priority strings (NORMAL, PERFORMANCE, etc.). These can be used either by individual applications, or even as the default option if the library is compiled with the configuration option --with-default-priority-string. In the latter case the defined priority string will be used for applications using gnutls_set_default_priority or gnutls_set_default_priority_append.

The priority strings can be specified in the global section of the configuration file, or in the section named [priorities]. The format is ’KEYWORD = VALUE’, e.g.,

When used they may be followed by additional options that will be appended to the system string (e.g., ’@EXAMPLE-PRIORITY:+SRP’). ’EXAMPLE-PRIORITY=NORMAL:+ARCFOUR-128’. Since version 3.5.1 applications are allowed to specify fallback keywords such as @KEYWORD1,@KEYWORD2, and the first valid keyword will be used.

The following example configuration defines a priority string called @SYSTEM. When set, its full settings can be queried using gnutls-cli --priority @SYSTEM --list.

[priorities]
SYSTEM = NORMAL:-AES-128-CBC:-AES-256-CBC

Next: , Previous: , Up: System-wide configuration of the library   [Contents][Index]

8.2 Disabling algorithms and protocols

The approach above works well to create consistent system-wide settings for cooperative GnuTLS applications. When an application however does not use the gnutls_set_default_priority or gnutls_set_default_priority_append functions, the method is not sufficient to prevent applications from using protocols or algorithms forbidden by a local policy. The override method described below enables the deprecation of algorithms and protocols system-wide for all applications.

The available options must be set in the [overrides] section of the configuration file and can be

Each of the options can be repeated multiple times when multiple values need to be disabled or enabled.

The valid values for the options above can be found in the ’Protocols’, ’Digests’ ’PK-signatures’, ’Protocols’, ’Ciphers’, and ’MACs’ fields of the output of gnutls-cli --list.

Sometimes the system administrator wants to enable only specific algorithms, despite the library defaults. GnuTLS provides an alternative mode of overriding: allowlisting.

As shown below in the examples, it is hard to use this mode correctly, as it requires understanding of how algorithms are used underneath by the protocols. Allowlisting configuration mode is intended to be used by the operating system vendors that prefer laying out the library defaults exhaustively from scratch instead on depending on gnutls presets, such as NORMAL. Applications are then expected to optionally disable or enable only a subset algorithms on top of the vendor-provided configuration.

In the allowlisting mode, all the algorithms are initially marked as insecure or disabled, and shall be explicitly turned on by the options listed below in the [overrides] section. As the allowlisting mode is mutually exclusive to the blocklisting mode, the options listed above for the blocklisting mode are forbidden in the allowlisting mode, and vice versa.

The allowlisting mode can be enabled by adding override-mode = allowlist in the [global] section.

The following functions allow the applications to modify the setting.

int gnutls_ecc_curve_set_enabled (gnutls_ecc_curve_t curve, unsigned int enabled)
int gnutls_sign_set_secure (gnutls_sign_algorithm_t sign, unsigned int secure)
int gnutls_sign_set_secure_for_certs (gnutls_sign_algorithm_t sign, unsigned int secure)
int gnutls_digest_set_secure (gnutls_digest_algorithm_t dig, unsigned int secure)
int gnutls_protocol_set_enabled (gnutls_protocol_t version, unsigned int enabled)

When the allowlisting mode is in effect, a @SYSTEM priority string is automatically constructed from the options in the [overrides] section. For this reason, the above functions should be called before the @SYSTEM priority is used.

8.2.1 Examples

The following example marks as insecure all digital signature algorithms which depend on SHA384, as well as the RSA-SHA1 signature algorithm.

[overrides]
insecure-hash = sha384
insecure-sig = rsa-sha1

The following example marks RSA-SHA256 as insecure for use in certificates and disables the TLS1.0 and TLS1.1 protocols.

[overrides]
insecure-sig-for-cert = rsa-sha256
disabled-version = tls1.0
disabled-version = tls1.1

The following example disables the AES-128-CBC and AES-256-CBC ciphers, the HMAC-SHA1 MAC algorithm and the GROUP-FFDHE8192 group for TLS and DTLS protocols.

[overrides]
tls-disabled-cipher = aes-128-cbc
tls-disabled-cipher = aes-256-cbc
tls-disabled-mac = sha1
tls-disabled-group = group-ffdhe8192

The following example demonstrates the use of the allowlisting mode. All the signature algorithms are disabled by default but RSA-SHA256. Note that the hash algorithm SHA256 also needs to be explicitly enabled.

[global]
override-mode = allowlist

[overrides]
secure-hash = sha256
secure-sig = rsa-sha256

To enable a TLS ciphersuite in the allowlist mode requires a more verbose configuration, explicitly listing algorithm dependencies. The following example enables TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256, using the SECP256R1 curve for signing and key exchange.

[global]
override-mode = allowlist

[overrides]
secure-hash = sha256
enabled-curve = secp256r1
secure-sig = ecdsa-secp256r1-sha256
enabled-version = tls1.3
tls-enabled-cipher = aes-128-gcm
tls-enabled-mac = aead
tls-enabled-group = secp256r1

Next: , Previous: , Up: System-wide configuration of the library   [Contents][Index]

8.3 Querying for disabled algorithms and protocols

When necessary applications can query whether a particular algorithm or protocol has been marked as insecure or disabled system-wide. Digital signatures can be queried using the following algorithms.

unsigned gnutls_sign_is_secure (gnutls_sign_algorithm_t algorithm)
unsigned gnutls_sign_is_secure2 (gnutls_sign_algorithm_t algorithm, unsigned int flags)

Any disabled protocol versions or elliptic curves will not show up in the lists provided by the following functions.

const gnutls_protocol_t * gnutls_protocol_list ( void)
const gnutls_group_t * gnutls_group_list ( void)
const gnutls_ecc_curve_t * gnutls_ecc_curve_list ( void)

It is not possible to query for insecure hash algorithms directly (only indirectly through the signature API).


Next: , Previous: , Up: System-wide configuration of the library   [Contents][Index]

8.4 Overriding the parameter verification profile

When verifying a certificate or TLS session parameters, GnuTLS uses a set of profiles associated with the session to determine whether the parameters seen in the session are acceptable. For example, whether the RSA public key size as seen on the wire, or the Diffie-Hellman parameters for the session. These profiles are normally set using the %PROFILE priority string (see Priority Strings and Selecting cryptographic key sizes).

It is possible to set the low bar profile that applications cannot override using the following.

[overrides]

# do not allow applications use the LOW or VERY-WEAK profiles.
min-verification-profile = legacy


Next: , Previous: , Up: System-wide configuration of the library   [Contents][Index]

8.5 Overriding the default priority string

GnuTLS uses default priority string which is defined at compiled time. Usually it is set to NORMAL. This override allows to set the default priority string to something more appropriate for a given deployment.

Below example sets a more specific default priority string.

[overrides]
default-priority-string = SECURE128:-VERS-TLS-ALL:+VERS-TLS1.3


Previous: , Up: System-wide configuration of the library   [Contents][Index]

8.6 Enabling/Disabling system/acceleration protocols

The following options can overwrite default behavior of protocols system-wide.

[global]
ktls = true

8.6.1 Enabling KTLS

When GnuTLS is build with -–enable-ktls configuration, KTLS is disabled by default. This can be enabled by setting ktls = true in [global] section.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

9 Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library

GnuTLS is not a low-level cryptographic library, i.e., it does not provide access to basic cryptographic primitives. However it abstracts the internal cryptographic back-end (see Cryptographic Backend), providing symmetric crypto, hash and HMAC algorithms, as well access to the random number generation. For a low-level crypto API the usage of nettle 21 library is recommended.


Next: , Up: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library   [Contents][Index]

9.1 Symmetric algorithms

The available functions to access symmetric crypto algorithms operations are listed in the sections below. The supported algorithms are the algorithms required by the TLS protocol. They are listed in Figure 9.1. Note that there two types of ciphers, the ones providing an authenticated-encryption with associated data (AEAD), and the legacy ciphers which provide raw access to the ciphers. We recommend the use of the AEAD ciphers under the AEAD APIs for new applications as they are designed to minimize the misuse of cryptographic primitives.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_UNKNOWN

Value to identify an unknown/unsupported algorithm.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_NULL

The NULL (identity) encryption algorithm.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_ARCFOUR_128

ARCFOUR stream cipher with 128-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_3DES_CBC

3DES in CBC mode.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_CBC

AES in CBC mode with 128-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_CBC

AES in CBC mode with 256-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_ARCFOUR_40

ARCFOUR stream cipher with 40-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_CAMELLIA_128_CBC

Camellia in CBC mode with 128-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_CAMELLIA_256_CBC

Camellia in CBC mode with 256-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_192_CBC

AES in CBC mode with 192-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_GCM

AES in GCM mode with 128-bit keys (AEAD).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_GCM

AES in GCM mode with 256-bit keys (AEAD).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_CAMELLIA_192_CBC

Camellia in CBC mode with 192-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_SALSA20_256

Salsa20 with 256-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_ESTREAM_SALSA20_256

Estream’s Salsa20 variant with 256-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_CAMELLIA_128_GCM

CAMELLIA in GCM mode with 128-bit keys (AEAD).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_CAMELLIA_256_GCM

CAMELLIA in GCM mode with 256-bit keys (AEAD).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_RC2_40_CBC

RC2 in CBC mode with 40-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_DES_CBC

DES in CBC mode (56-bit keys).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_CCM

AES in CCM mode with 128-bit keys (AEAD).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_CCM

AES in CCM mode with 256-bit keys (AEAD).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_CCM_8

AES in CCM mode with 64-bit tag and 128-bit keys (AEAD).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_CCM_8

AES in CCM mode with 64-bit tag and 256-bit keys (AEAD).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_CHACHA20_POLY1305

The Chacha20 cipher with the Poly1305 authenticator (AEAD).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_GOST28147_TC26Z_CFB

GOST 28147-89 (Magma) cipher in CFB mode with TC26 Z S-box.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_GOST28147_CPA_CFB

GOST 28147-89 (Magma) cipher in CFB mode with CryptoPro A S-box.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_GOST28147_CPB_CFB

GOST 28147-89 (Magma) cipher in CFB mode with CryptoPro B S-box.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_GOST28147_CPC_CFB

GOST 28147-89 (Magma) cipher in CFB mode with CryptoPro C S-box.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_GOST28147_CPD_CFB

GOST 28147-89 (Magma) cipher in CFB mode with CryptoPro D S-box.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_CFB8

AES in CFB8 mode with 128-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_192_CFB8

AES in CFB8 mode with 192-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_CFB8

AES in CFB8 mode with 256-bit keys.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_XTS

AES in XTS mode with 128-bit key + 128bit tweak key.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_XTS

AES in XTS mode with 256-bit key + 256bit tweak key. Note that the XTS ciphers are message oriented. The whole message needs to be provided with a single call, because cipher-stealing requires to know where the message actually terminates in order to be able to compute where the stealing occurs.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_GOST28147_TC26Z_CNT

GOST 28147-89 (Magma) cipher in CNT mode with TC26 Z S-box.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_CHACHA20_64

Chacha20 cipher with 64-bit nonces and 64-bit block counters.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_CHACHA20_32

Chacha20 cipher with 96-bit nonces and 32-bit block counters.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_SIV

AES in SIV mode with 128-bit key.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_SIV

AES in SIV mode with 256-bit key. Note that the SIV ciphers can only be used with the AEAD interface, and the IV plays a role as the authentication tag while it is prepended to the cipher text.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_192_GCM

AES in GCM mode with 192-bit keys (AEAD).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_MAGMA_CTR_ACPKM

GOST R 34.12-2015 (Magma) cipher in CTR-ACPKM mode.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_KUZNYECHIK_CTR_ACPKM

GOST R 34.12-2015 (Kuznyechik) cipher in CTR-ACPKM mode.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_SIV_GCM

AES in SIV-GCM mode with 128-bit key.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_SIV_GCM

AES in SIV-GCM mode with 256-bit key.

GNUTLS_CIPHER_IDEA_PGP_CFB

IDEA in CFB mode (placeholder - unsupported).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_3DES_PGP_CFB

3DES in CFB mode (placeholder - unsupported).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_CAST5_PGP_CFB

CAST5 in CFB mode (placeholder - unsupported).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_BLOWFISH_PGP_CFB

Blowfish in CFB mode (placeholder - unsupported).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_SAFER_SK128_PGP_CFB

Safer-SK in CFB mode with 128-bit keys (placeholder - unsupported).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES128_PGP_CFB

AES in CFB mode with 128-bit keys (placeholder - unsupported).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES192_PGP_CFB

AES in CFB mode with 192-bit keys (placeholder - unsupported).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES256_PGP_CFB

AES in CFB mode with 256-bit keys (placeholder - unsupported).

GNUTLS_CIPHER_TWOFISH_PGP_CFB

Twofish in CFB mode (placeholder - unsupported).

Figure 9.1: The supported ciphers.

Authenticated-encryption API

The AEAD API provides access to all ciphers supported by GnuTLS which support authenticated encryption with associated data; these ciphers are marked with the AEAD keyword on the table above. The AEAD cipher API is particularly suitable for message or packet-encryption as it provides authentication and encryption on the same API. See RFC5116 for more information on authenticated encryption.

int gnutls_aead_cipher_init (gnutls_aead_cipher_hd_t * handle, gnutls_cipher_algorithm_t cipher, const gnutls_datum_t * key)
int gnutls_aead_cipher_encrypt (gnutls_aead_cipher_hd_t handle, const void * nonce, size_t nonce_len, const void * auth, size_t auth_len, size_t tag_size, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_len, void * ctext, size_t * ctext_len)
int gnutls_aead_cipher_decrypt (gnutls_aead_cipher_hd_t handle, const void * nonce, size_t nonce_len, const void * auth, size_t auth_len, size_t tag_size, const void * ctext, size_t ctext_len, void * ptext, size_t * ptext_len)
void gnutls_aead_cipher_deinit (gnutls_aead_cipher_hd_t handle)

Because the encryption function above may be difficult to use with scattered data, we provide the following API.

Function: int gnutls_aead_cipher_encryptv (gnutls_aead_cipher_hd_t handle, const void * nonce, size_t nonce_len, const giovec_t * auth_iov, int auth_iovcnt, size_t tag_size, const giovec_t * iov, int iovcnt, void * ctext, size_t * ctext_len)

handle: is a gnutls_aead_cipher_hd_t type.

nonce: the nonce to set

nonce_len: The length of the nonce

auth_iov: additional data to be authenticated

auth_iovcnt: The number of buffers in auth_iov

tag_size: The size of the tag to use (use zero for the default)

iov: the data to be encrypted

iovcnt: The number of buffers in iov

ctext: the encrypted data including authentication tag

ctext_len: the length of encrypted data (initially must hold the maximum available size, including space for tag)

This function will encrypt the provided data buffers using the algorithm specified by the context. The output data will contain the authentication tag.

Returns: Zero or a negative error code on error.

Since: 3.6.3

Legacy API

The legacy API provides low-level access to all legacy ciphers supported by GnuTLS, and some of the AEAD ciphers (e.g., AES-GCM and CHACHA20). The restrictions of the nettle library implementation of the ciphers apply verbatim to this API22.

int gnutls_cipher_init (gnutls_cipher_hd_t * handle, gnutls_cipher_algorithm_t cipher, const gnutls_datum_t * key, const gnutls_datum_t * iv)
int gnutls_cipher_encrypt2 (gnutls_cipher_hd_t handle, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_len, void * ctext, size_t ctext_len)
int gnutls_cipher_decrypt2 (gnutls_cipher_hd_t handle, const void * ctext, size_t ctext_len, void * ptext, size_t ptext_len)
void gnutls_cipher_set_iv (gnutls_cipher_hd_t handle, void * iv, size_t ivlen)
void gnutls_cipher_deinit (gnutls_cipher_hd_t handle)
int gnutls_cipher_add_auth (gnutls_cipher_hd_t handle, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_size)
int gnutls_cipher_tag (gnutls_cipher_hd_t handle, void * tag, size_t tag_size)

While the latter two functions allow the same API can be used with authenticated encryption ciphers, it is recommended to use the following functions which are solely for AEAD ciphers. The latter API is designed to be simple to use and also hard to misuse, by handling the tag verification and addition in transparent way.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library   [Contents][Index]

9.2 Public key algorithms

Public key cryptography algorithms such as RSA, DSA and ECDSA, are accessed using the abstract key API in Abstract key types. This is a high level API with the advantage of transparently handling keys stored in memory and keys present in smart cards.

int gnutls_privkey_init (gnutls_privkey_t * key)
int gnutls_privkey_import_url (gnutls_privkey_t key, const char * url, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_privkey_import_x509_raw (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * password, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_privkey_sign_data (gnutls_privkey_t signer, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t hash, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_datum_t * signature)
int gnutls_privkey_sign_hash (gnutls_privkey_t signer, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t hash_algo, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * hash_data, gnutls_datum_t * signature)
void gnutls_privkey_deinit (gnutls_privkey_t key)
int gnutls_pubkey_init (gnutls_pubkey_t * key)
int gnutls_pubkey_import_url (gnutls_pubkey_t key, const char * url, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_import_x509 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_verify_data2 (gnutls_pubkey_t pubkey, gnutls_sign_algorithm_t algo, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * data, const gnutls_datum_t * signature)
int gnutls_pubkey_verify_hash2 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_sign_algorithm_t algo, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * hash, const gnutls_datum_t * signature)
void gnutls_pubkey_deinit (gnutls_pubkey_t key)

Keys stored in memory can be imported using functions like gnutls_privkey_import_x509_raw, while keys on smart cards or HSMs should be imported using their PKCS#11 URL with gnutls_privkey_import_url.

If any of the smart card operations require PIN, that should be provided either by setting the global PIN function (gnutls_pkcs11_set_pin_function), or better with the targeted to structures functions such as gnutls_privkey_set_pin_function.

9.2.1 Key generation

All supported key types (including RSA, DSA, ECDSA, Ed25519, Ed448) can be generated with GnuTLS. They can be generated with the simpler gnutls_privkey_generate or with the more advanced gnutls_privkey_generate2.

Function: int gnutls_privkey_generate2 (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, gnutls_pk_algorithm_t algo, unsigned int bits, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_keygen_data_st * data, unsigned data_size)

pkey: The private key

algo: is one of the algorithms in gnutls_pk_algorithm_t .

bits: the size of the modulus

flags: Must be zero or flags from gnutls_privkey_flags_t .

data: Allow specifying gnutls_keygen_data_st types such as the seed to be used.

data_size: The number of data available.

This function will generate a random private key. Note that this function must be called on an initialized private key.

The flag GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_FLAG_PROVABLE instructs the key generation process to use algorithms like Shawe-Taylor (from FIPS PUB186-4) which generate provable parameters out of a seed for RSA and DSA keys. On DSA keys the PQG parameters are generated using the seed, while on RSA the two primes. To specify an explicit seed (by default a random seed is used), use the data with a GNUTLS_KEYGEN_SEED type.

Note that when generating an elliptic curve key, the curve can be substituted in the place of the bits parameter using the GNUTLS_CURVE_TO_BITS() macro.

To export the generated keys in memory or in files it is recommended to use the PKCS8 form as it can handle all key types, and can store additional parameters such as the seed, in case of provable RSA or DSA keys. Generated keys can be exported in memory using gnutls_privkey_export_x509() , and then with gnutls_x509_privkey_export2_pkcs8() .

If key generation is part of your application, avoid setting the number of bits directly, and instead use gnutls_sec_param_to_pk_bits() . That way the generated keys will adapt to the security levels of the underlying GnuTLS library.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.5.0


Next: , Previous: , Up: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library   [Contents][Index]

9.3 Cryptographic Message Syntax / PKCS7

The CMS or PKCS #7 format is a commonly used format for digital signatures. PKCS #7 is the name of the original standard when published by RSA, though today the standard is adopted by IETF under the name CMS.

The standards include multiple ways of signing a digital document, e.g., by embedding the data into the signature, or creating detached signatures of the data, including a timestamp, additional certificates etc. In certain cases the same format is also used to transport lists of certificates and CRLs.

It is a relatively popular standard to sign structures, and is being used to sign in PDF files, as well as for signing kernel modules and other structures.

In GnuTLS, the basic functions to initialize, deinitialize, import, export or print information about a PKCS #7 structure are listed below.

int gnutls_pkcs7_init (gnutls_pkcs7_t * pkcs7)
void gnutls_pkcs7_deinit (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7)
int gnutls_pkcs7_export2 (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, gnutls_datum_t * out)
int gnutls_pkcs7_import (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format)
int gnutls_pkcs7_print (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_certificate_print_formats_t format, gnutls_datum_t * out)

The following functions allow the verification of a structure using either a trust list, or individual certificates. The gnutls_pkcs7_sign function is the data signing function.

int gnutls_pkcs7_verify_direct (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_x509_crt_t signer, unsigned idx, const gnutls_datum_t * data, unsigned flags)
int gnutls_pkcs7_verify (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_x509_trust_list_t tl, gnutls_typed_vdata_st * vdata, unsigned int vdata_size, unsigned idx, const gnutls_datum_t * data, unsigned flags)
Function: int gnutls_pkcs7_sign (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_x509_crt_t signer, gnutls_privkey_t signer_key, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_pkcs7_attrs_t signed_attrs, gnutls_pkcs7_attrs_t unsigned_attrs, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t dig, unsigned flags)

pkcs7: should contain a gnutls_pkcs7_t type

signer: the certificate to sign the structure

signer_key: the key to sign the structure

data: The data to be signed or NULL if the data are already embedded

signed_attrs: Any additional attributes to be included in the signed ones (or NULL )

unsigned_attrs: Any additional attributes to be included in the unsigned ones (or NULL )

dig: The digest algorithm to use for signing

flags: Should be zero or one of GNUTLS_PKCS7 flags

This function will add a signature in the provided PKCS 7 structure for the provided data. Multiple signatures can be made with different signers.

The available flags are: GNUTLS_PKCS7_EMBED_DATA , GNUTLS_PKCS7_INCLUDE_TIME , GNUTLS_PKCS7_INCLUDE_CERT , and GNUTLS_PKCS7_WRITE_SPKI . They are explained in the gnutls_pkcs7_sign_flags definition.

Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS (0) is returned, otherwise a negative error value.

Since: 3.4.2

GNUTLS_PKCS7_EMBED_DATA

The signed data will be embedded in the structure.

GNUTLS_PKCS7_INCLUDE_TIME

The signing time will be included in the structure.

GNUTLS_PKCS7_INCLUDE_CERT

The signer’s certificate will be included in the cert list.

GNUTLS_PKCS7_WRITE_SPKI

Use the signer’s key identifier instead of name.

Figure 9.2: Flags applicable to gnutls_pkcs7_sign()

Other helper functions which allow to access the signatures, or certificates attached in the structure are listed below.

int gnutls_pkcs7_get_signature_count (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7)
int gnutls_pkcs7_get_signature_info (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, unsigned idx, gnutls_pkcs7_signature_info_st * info)
int gnutls_pkcs7_get_crt_count (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7)
int gnutls_pkcs7_get_crt_raw2 (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * cert)
int gnutls_pkcs7_get_crl_count (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7)
int gnutls_pkcs7_get_crl_raw2 (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * crl)

To append certificates, or CRLs in the structure the following functions are provided.

int gnutls_pkcs7_set_crt_raw (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, const gnutls_datum_t * crt)
int gnutls_pkcs7_set_crt (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt)
int gnutls_pkcs7_set_crl_raw (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, const gnutls_datum_t * crl)
int gnutls_pkcs7_set_crl (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_x509_crl_t crl)

Next: , Previous: , Up: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library   [Contents][Index]

9.4 Hash and MAC functions

The available operations to access hash functions and hash-MAC (HMAC) algorithms are shown below. HMAC algorithms provided keyed hash functionality. The supported MAC and HMAC algorithms are listed in Figure 9.3. Note that, despite the hmac part in the name of the MAC functions listed below, they can be used either for HMAC or MAC operations.

GNUTLS_MAC_UNKNOWN

Unknown MAC algorithm.

GNUTLS_MAC_NULL

NULL MAC algorithm (empty output).

GNUTLS_MAC_MD5

HMAC-MD5 algorithm.

GNUTLS_MAC_SHA1

HMAC-SHA-1 algorithm.

GNUTLS_MAC_RMD160

HMAC-RMD160 algorithm.

GNUTLS_MAC_MD2

HMAC-MD2 algorithm.

GNUTLS_MAC_SHA256

HMAC-SHA-256 algorithm.

GNUTLS_MAC_SHA384

HMAC-SHA-384 algorithm.

GNUTLS_MAC_SHA512

HMAC-SHA-512 algorithm.

GNUTLS_MAC_SHA224

HMAC-SHA-224 algorithm.

GNUTLS_MAC_SHA3_224

Reserved; unimplemented.

GNUTLS_MAC_SHA3_256

Reserved; unimplemented.

GNUTLS_MAC_SHA3_384

Reserved; unimplemented.

GNUTLS_MAC_SHA3_512

Reserved; unimplemented.

GNUTLS_MAC_MD5_SHA1

Combined MD5+SHA1 MAC placeholder.

GNUTLS_MAC_GOSTR_94

HMAC GOST R 34.11-94 algorithm.

GNUTLS_MAC_STREEBOG_256

HMAC GOST R 34.11-2001 (Streebog) algorithm, 256 bit.

GNUTLS_MAC_STREEBOG_512

HMAC GOST R 34.11-2001 (Streebog) algorithm, 512 bit.

GNUTLS_MAC_AEAD

MAC implicit through AEAD cipher.

GNUTLS_MAC_UMAC_96

The UMAC-96 MAC algorithm (requires nonce).

GNUTLS_MAC_UMAC_128

The UMAC-128 MAC algorithm (requires nonce).

GNUTLS_MAC_AES_CMAC_128

The AES-CMAC-128 MAC algorithm.

GNUTLS_MAC_AES_CMAC_256

The AES-CMAC-256 MAC algorithm.

GNUTLS_MAC_AES_GMAC_128

The AES-GMAC-128 MAC algorithm (requires nonce).

GNUTLS_MAC_AES_GMAC_192

The AES-GMAC-192 MAC algorithm (requires nonce).

GNUTLS_MAC_AES_GMAC_256

The AES-GMAC-256 MAC algorithm (requires nonce).

GNUTLS_MAC_GOST28147_TC26Z_IMIT

The GOST 28147-89 working in IMIT mode with TC26 Z S-box.

GNUTLS_MAC_SHAKE_128

Reserved; unimplemented.

GNUTLS_MAC_SHAKE_256

Reserved; unimplemented.

GNUTLS_MAC_MAGMA_OMAC

GOST R 34.12-2015 (Magma) in OMAC (CMAC) mode.

GNUTLS_MAC_KUZNYECHIK_OMAC

GOST R 34.12-2015 (Kuznyechik) in OMAC (CMAC) mode.

Figure 9.3: The supported MAC and HMAC algorithms.

int gnutls_hmac_init (gnutls_hmac_hd_t * dig, gnutls_mac_algorithm_t algorithm, const void * key, size_t keylen)
int gnutls_hmac (gnutls_hmac_hd_t handle, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_len)
void gnutls_hmac_output (gnutls_hmac_hd_t handle, void * digest)
void gnutls_hmac_deinit (gnutls_hmac_hd_t handle, void * digest)
unsigned gnutls_hmac_get_len (gnutls_mac_algorithm_t algorithm)
int gnutls_hmac_fast (gnutls_mac_algorithm_t algorithm, const void * key, size_t keylen, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_len, void * digest)

The available functions to access hash functions are shown below. The supported hash functions are shown in Figure 9.4.

int gnutls_hash_init (gnutls_hash_hd_t * dig, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t algorithm)
int gnutls_hash (gnutls_hash_hd_t handle, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_len)
void gnutls_hash_output (gnutls_hash_hd_t handle, void * digest)
void gnutls_hash_deinit (gnutls_hash_hd_t handle, void * digest)
unsigned gnutls_hash_get_len (gnutls_digest_algorithm_t algorithm)
int gnutls_hash_fast (gnutls_digest_algorithm_t algorithm, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_len, void * digest)
int gnutls_fingerprint (gnutls_digest_algorithm_t algo, const gnutls_datum_t * data, void * result, size_t * result_size)
GNUTLS_DIG_UNKNOWN

Unknown hash algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_NULL

NULL hash algorithm (empty output).

GNUTLS_DIG_MD5

MD5 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_SHA1

SHA-1 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_RMD160

RMD160 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_MD2

MD2 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_SHA256

SHA-256 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_SHA384

SHA-384 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_SHA512

SHA-512 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_SHA224

SHA-224 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_SHA3_224

SHA3-224 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_SHA3_256

SHA3-256 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_SHA3_384

SHA3-384 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_SHA3_512

SHA3-512 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_MD5_SHA1

Combined MD5+SHA1 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_GOSTR_94

GOST R 34.11-94 algorithm.

GNUTLS_DIG_STREEBOG_256

GOST R 34.11-2001 (Streebog) algorithm, 256 bit.

GNUTLS_DIG_STREEBOG_512

GOST R 34.11-2001 (Streebog) algorithm, 512 bit.

GNUTLS_DIG_SHAKE_128

Reserved; unimplemented.

GNUTLS_DIG_SHAKE_256

Reserved; unimplemented.

Figure 9.4: The supported hash algorithms.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library   [Contents][Index]

9.5 Random number generation

Access to the random number generator is provided using the gnutls_rnd function. It allows obtaining random data of various levels.

GNUTLS_RND_NONCE

Non-predictable random number. Fatal in parts of session if broken, i.e., vulnerable to statistical analysis.

GNUTLS_RND_RANDOM

Pseudo-random cryptographic random number. Fatal in session if broken. Example use: temporal keys.

GNUTLS_RND_KEY

Fatal in many sessions if broken. Example use: Long-term keys.

Figure 9.5: The random number levels.

Function: int gnutls_rnd (gnutls_rnd_level_t level, void * data, size_t len)

level: a security level

data: place to store random bytes

len: The requested size

This function will generate random data and store it to output buffer. The value of level should be one of GNUTLS_RND_NONCE , GNUTLS_RND_RANDOM and GNUTLS_RND_KEY . See the manual and gnutls_rnd_level_t for detailed information.

This function is thread-safe and also fork-safe.

Returns: Zero on success, or a negative error code on error.

Since: 2.12.0

See Random Number Generators-internals for more information on the random number generator operation.


Previous: , Up: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library   [Contents][Index]

9.6 Overriding algorithms

In systems which provide a hardware accelerated cipher implementation that is not directly supported by GnuTLS, it is possible to utilize it. There are functions which allow overriding the default cipher, digest and MAC implementations. Those are described below.

To override public key operations see Abstract private keys.

Function: int gnutls_crypto_register_cipher (gnutls_cipher_algorithm_t algorithm, int priority, gnutls_cipher_init_func init, gnutls_cipher_setkey_func setkey, gnutls_cipher_setiv_func setiv, gnutls_cipher_encrypt_func encrypt, gnutls_cipher_decrypt_func decrypt, gnutls_cipher_deinit_func deinit)

algorithm: is the gnutls algorithm identifier

priority: is the priority of the algorithm

init: A function which initializes the cipher

setkey: A function which sets the key of the cipher

setiv: A function which sets the nonce/IV of the cipher (non-AEAD)

encrypt: A function which performs encryption (non-AEAD)

decrypt: A function which performs decryption (non-AEAD)

deinit: A function which deinitializes the cipher

This function will register a cipher algorithm to be used by gnutls. Any algorithm registered will override the included algorithms and by convention kernel implemented algorithms have priority of 90 and CPU-assisted of 80. The algorithm with the lowest priority will be used by gnutls.

In the case the registered init or setkey functions return GNUTLS_E_NEED_FALLBACK , GnuTLS will attempt to use the next in priority registered cipher.

The functions which are marked as non-AEAD they are not required when registering a cipher to be used with the new AEAD API introduced in GnuTLS 3.4.0. Internally GnuTLS uses the new AEAD API.

Deprecated: since 3.7.0 it is no longer possible to override cipher implementation

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS on success, otherwise a negative error code.

Since: 3.4.0

Function: int gnutls_crypto_register_aead_cipher (gnutls_cipher_algorithm_t algorithm, int priority, gnutls_cipher_init_func init, gnutls_cipher_setkey_func setkey, gnutls_cipher_aead_encrypt_func aead_encrypt, gnutls_cipher_aead_decrypt_func aead_decrypt, gnutls_cipher_deinit_func deinit)

algorithm: is the gnutls AEAD cipher identifier

priority: is the priority of the algorithm

init: A function which initializes the cipher

setkey: A function which sets the key of the cipher

aead_encrypt: Perform the AEAD encryption

aead_decrypt: Perform the AEAD decryption

deinit: A function which deinitializes the cipher

This function will register a cipher algorithm to be used by gnutls. Any algorithm registered will override the included algorithms and by convention kernel implemented algorithms have priority of 90 and CPU-assisted of 80. The algorithm with the lowest priority will be used by gnutls.

In the case the registered init or setkey functions return GNUTLS_E_NEED_FALLBACK , GnuTLS will attempt to use the next in priority registered cipher.

The functions registered will be used with the new AEAD API introduced in GnuTLS 3.4.0. Internally GnuTLS uses the new AEAD API.

Deprecated: since 3.7.0 it is no longer possible to override cipher implementation

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS on success, otherwise a negative error code.

Since: 3.4.0

Function: int gnutls_crypto_register_mac (gnutls_mac_algorithm_t algorithm, int priority, gnutls_mac_init_func init, gnutls_mac_setkey_func setkey, gnutls_mac_setnonce_func setnonce, gnutls_mac_hash_func hash, gnutls_mac_output_func output, gnutls_mac_deinit_func deinit, gnutls_mac_fast_func hash_fast)

algorithm: is the gnutls MAC identifier

priority: is the priority of the algorithm

init: A function which initializes the MAC

setkey: A function which sets the key of the MAC

setnonce: A function which sets the nonce for the mac (may be NULL for common MAC algorithms)

hash: Perform the hash operation

output: Provide the output of the MAC

deinit: A function which deinitializes the MAC

hash_fast: Perform the MAC operation in one go

This function will register a MAC algorithm to be used by gnutls. Any algorithm registered will override the included algorithms and by convention kernel implemented algorithms have priority of 90 and CPU-assisted of 80. The algorithm with the lowest priority will be used by gnutls.

Deprecated: since 3.7.0 it is no longer possible to override cipher implementation

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS on success, otherwise a negative error code.

Since: 3.4.0

Function: int gnutls_crypto_register_digest (gnutls_digest_algorithm_t algorithm, int priority, gnutls_digest_init_func init, gnutls_digest_hash_func hash, gnutls_digest_output_func output, gnutls_digest_deinit_func deinit, gnutls_digest_fast_func hash_fast)

algorithm: is the gnutls digest identifier

priority: is the priority of the algorithm

init: A function which initializes the digest

hash: Perform the hash operation

output: Provide the output of the digest

deinit: A function which deinitializes the digest

hash_fast: Perform the digest operation in one go

This function will register a digest algorithm to be used by gnutls. Any algorithm registered will override the included algorithms and by convention kernel implemented algorithms have priority of 90 and CPU-assisted of 80. The algorithm with the lowest priority will be used by gnutls.

Deprecated: since 3.7.0 it is no longer possible to override cipher implementation

Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS on success, otherwise a negative error code.

Since: 3.4.0


Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

10 Other included programs

Included with GnuTLS are also a few command line tools that let you use the library for common tasks without writing an application. The applications are discussed in this chapter.


Next: , Up: Other included programs   [Contents][Index]

gnutls-cli Invocation

Invoking gnutls-cli

Simple client program to set up a TLS connection to some other computer. It sets up a TLS connection and forwards data from the standard input to the secured socket and vice versa.

gnutls-cli help/usage (-?)

The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option (--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. more-help is disabled on platforms without a working fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

gnutls-cli - GnuTLS client
Usage:  gnutls-cli [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [hostname]

None:

   -d, --debug=num            Enable debugging
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 9999
   -V, --verbose              More verbose output
       --tofu                 Enable trust on first use authentication
       --strict-tofu          Fail to connect if a certificate is unknown or a known certificate has changed
       --dane                 Enable DANE certificate verification (DNSSEC)
       --local-dns            Use the local DNS server for DNSSEC resolving
       --ca-verification      Enable CA certificate verification
				- enabled by default
				- disabled as '--no-ca-verification'
       --ocsp                 Enable OCSP certificate verification
   -r, --resume               Establish a session and resume
       --earlydata=str        Send early data on resumption from the specified file
   -e, --rehandshake          Establish a session and rehandshake
       --sni-hostname=str     Server's hostname for server name indication extension
       --verify-hostname=str  Server's hostname to use for validation
   -s, --starttls             Connect, establish a plain session and start TLS
       --app-proto            an alias for the 'starttls-proto' option
       --starttls-proto=str   The application protocol to be used to obtain the server's certificate (https, ftp, smtp, imap, ldap, xmpp, lmtp, pop3, nntp, sieve, postgres)
				- prohibits the option 'starttls'
       --starttls-name=str    The hostname presented to the application protocol for STARTTLS (for smtp, xmpp, lmtp)
				- prohibits the option 'starttls'
				- requires the option 'starttls-proto'
   -u, --udp                  Use DTLS (datagram TLS) over UDP
       --mtu=num              Set MTU for datagram TLS
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 17000
       --crlf                 Send CR LF instead of LF
       --fastopen             Enable TCP Fast Open
       --x509fmtder           Use DER format for certificates to read from
       --print-cert           Print peer's certificate in PEM format
       --save-cert=str        Save the peer's certificate chain in the specified file in PEM format
       --save-ocsp=str        Save the peer's OCSP status response in the provided file
				- prohibits the option 'save-ocsp-multi'
       --save-ocsp-multi=str  Save all OCSP responses provided by the peer in this file
				- prohibits the option 'save-ocsp'
       --save-server-trace=str Save the server-side TLS message trace in the provided file
       --save-client-trace=str Save the client-side TLS message trace in the provided file
       --dh-bits=num          The minimum number of bits allowed for DH
       --priority=str         Priorities string
       --x509cafile=str       Certificate file or PKCS #11 URL to use
       --x509crlfile=file     CRL file to use
				- file must pre-exist
       --x509keyfile=str      X.509 key file or PKCS #11 URL to use
       --x509certfile=str     X.509 Certificate file or PKCS #11 URL to use
				- requires the option 'x509keyfile'
       --rawpkkeyfile=str     Private key file (PKCS #8 or PKCS #12) or PKCS #11 URL to use
       --rawpkfile=str        Raw public-key file to use
				- requires the option 'rawpkkeyfile'
       --srpusername=str      SRP username to use
       --srppasswd=str        SRP password to use
       --pskusername=str      PSK username to use
       --pskkey=str           PSK key (in hex) to use
   -p, --port=str             The port or service to connect to
       --insecure             Don't abort program if server certificate can't be validated
       --verify-allow-broken  Allow broken algorithms, such as MD5 for certificate verification
       --benchmark-ciphers    Benchmark individual ciphers
       --benchmark-tls-kx     Benchmark TLS key exchange methods
       --benchmark-tls-ciphers  Benchmark TLS ciphers
   -l, --list                 Print a list of the supported algorithms and modes
				- prohibits the option 'port'
       --priority-list        Print a list of the supported priority strings
       --noticket             Don't allow session tickets
       --srtp-profiles=str    Offer SRTP profiles
       --alpn=str             Application layer protocol
       --compress-cert=str    Compress certificate
   -b, --heartbeat            Activate heartbeat support
       --recordsize=num       The maximum record size to advertise
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 4096
       --disable-sni          Do not send a Server Name Indication (SNI)
       --single-key-share     Send a single key share under TLS1.3
       --post-handshake-auth  Enable post-handshake authentication under TLS1.3
       --inline-commands      Inline commands of the form ^<cmd>^
       --inline-commands-prefix=str Change the default delimiter for inline commands
       --provider=file        Specify the PKCS #11 provider library
				- file must pre-exist
       --fips140-mode         Reports the status of the FIPS140-2 mode in gnutls library
       --list-config          Reports the configuration of the library
       --logfile=str          Redirect informational messages to a specific file
       --keymatexport=str     Label used for exporting keying material
       --keymatexportsize=num Size of the exported keying material
       --waitresumption       Block waiting for the resumption data under TLS1.3
       --ca-auto-retrieve     Enable automatic retrieval of missing CA certificates
       --attime=str           Perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time

Version, usage and configuration options:

   -v, --version[=arg]        output version information and exit
   -h, --help                 display extended usage information and exit
   -!, --more-help            extended usage information passed thru pager

Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
hyphen and the flag character.
Operands and options may be intermixed.  They will be reordered.

Simple client program to set up a TLS connection to some other computer. 
It sets up a TLS connection and forwards data from the standard input to the secured socket and vice versa.

Please send bug reports to:  <bugs@gnutls.org>

debug option (-d).

This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.

tofu option.

This is the “enable trust on first use authentication” option. This option will, in addition to certificate authentication, perform authentication based on previously seen public keys, a model similar to SSH authentication. Note that when tofu is specified (PKI) and DANE authentication will become advisory to assist the public key acceptance process.

strict-tofu option.

This is the “fail to connect if a certificate is unknown or a known certificate has changed” option. This option will perform authentication as with option –tofu; however, no questions shall be asked whatsoever, neither to accept an unknown certificate nor a changed one.

dane option.

This is the “enable dane certificate verification (dnssec)” option. This option will, in addition to certificate authentication using the trusted CAs, verify the server certificates using on the DANE information available via DNSSEC.

local-dns option.

This is the “use the local dns server for dnssec resolving” option. This option will use the local DNS server for DNSSEC. This is disabled by default due to many servers not allowing DNSSEC.

ca-verification option.

This is the “enable ca certificate verification” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

This option can be used to enable or disable CA certificate verification. It is to be used with the –dane or –tofu options.

ocsp option.

This is the “enable ocsp certificate verification” option. This option will enable verification of the peer’s certificate using ocsp

resume option (-r).

This is the “establish a session and resume” option. Connect, establish a session, reconnect and resume.

rehandshake option (-e).

This is the “establish a session and rehandshake” option. Connect, establish a session and rehandshake immediately.

sni-hostname option.

This is the “server’s hostname for server name indication extension” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Set explicitly the server name used in the TLS server name indication extension. That is useful when testing with servers setup on different DNS name than the intended. If not specified, the provided hostname is used. Even with this option server certificate verification still uses the hostname passed on the main commandline. Use –verify-hostname to change this.

verify-hostname option.

This is the “server’s hostname to use for validation” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Set explicitly the server name to be used when validating the server’s certificate.

starttls option (-s).

This is the “connect, establish a plain session and start tls” option. The TLS session will be initiated when EOF or a SIGALRM is received.

app-proto option.

This is an alias for the starttls-proto option, see the starttls-proto option documentation.

starttls-proto option.

This is the “the application protocol to be used to obtain the server’s certificate (https, ftp, smtp, imap, ldap, xmpp, lmtp, pop3, nntp, sieve, postgres)” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Specify the application layer protocol for STARTTLS. If the protocol is supported, gnutls-cli will proceed to the TLS negotiation.

starttls-name option.

This is the “the hostname presented to the application protocol for starttls (for smtp, xmpp, lmtp)” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Specify the hostname presented to the application protocol for STARTTLS.

save-ocsp-multi option.

This is the “save all ocsp responses provided by the peer in this file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

The file will contain a list of PEM encoded OCSP status responses if any were provided by the peer, starting with the one for the peer’s server certificate.

dh-bits option.

This is the “the minimum number of bits allowed for dh” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. This option sets the minimum number of bits allowed for a Diffie-Hellman key exchange. You may want to lower the default value if the peer sends a weak prime and you get an connection error with unacceptable prime.

priority option.

This is the “priorities string” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. TLS algorithms and protocols to enable. You can use predefined sets of ciphersuites such as PERFORMANCE, NORMAL, PFS, SECURE128, SECURE256. The default is NORMAL.

Check the GnuTLS manual on section “Priority strings” for more information on the allowed keywords

rawpkkeyfile option.

This is the “private key file (pkcs #8 or pkcs #12) or pkcs #11 url to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. In order to instruct the application to negotiate raw public keys one must enable the respective certificate types via the priority strings (i.e. CTYPE-CLI-* and CTYPE-SRV-* flags).

Check the GnuTLS manual on section “Priority strings” for more information on how to set certificate types.

rawpkfile option.

This is the “raw public-key file to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

In order to instruct the application to negotiate raw public keys one must enable the respective certificate types via the priority strings (i.e. CTYPE-CLI-* and CTYPE-SRV-* flags).

Check the GnuTLS manual on section “Priority strings” for more information on how to set certificate types.

ranges option.

This is the “use length-hiding padding to prevent traffic analysis” option. When possible (e.g., when using CBC ciphersuites), use length-hiding padding to prevent traffic analysis.

NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED

benchmark-ciphers option.

This is the “benchmark individual ciphers” option. By default the benchmarked ciphers will utilize any capabilities of the local CPU to improve performance. To test against the raw software implementation set the environment variable GNUTLS_CPUID_OVERRIDE to 0x1.

benchmark-tls-ciphers option.

This is the “benchmark tls ciphers” option. By default the benchmarked ciphers will utilize any capabilities of the local CPU to improve performance. To test against the raw software implementation set the environment variable GNUTLS_CPUID_OVERRIDE to 0x1.

list option (-l).

This is the “print a list of the supported algorithms and modes” option.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Print a list of the supported algorithms and modes. If a priority string is given then only the enabled ciphersuites are shown.

priority-list option.

This is the “print a list of the supported priority strings” option. Print a list of the supported priority strings. The ciphersuites corresponding to each priority string can be examined using -l -p.

noticket option.

This is the “don’t allow session tickets” option. Disable the request of receiving of session tickets under TLS1.2 or earlier

alpn option.

This is the “application layer protocol” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option will set and enable the Application Layer Protocol Negotiation (ALPN) in the TLS protocol.

compress-cert option.

This is the “compress certificate” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option sets a supported compression method for certificate compression.

disable-extensions option.

This is the “disable all the tls extensions” option. This option disables all TLS extensions. Deprecated option. Use the priority string.

NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED

single-key-share option.

This is the “send a single key share under tls1.3” option. This option switches the default mode of sending multiple key shares, to send a single one (the top one).

post-handshake-auth option.

This is the “enable post-handshake authentication under tls1.3” option. This option enables post-handshake authentication when under TLS1.3.

inline-commands option.

This is the “inline commands of the form ^<cmd>^” option. Enable inline commands of the form ^<cmd>^. The inline commands are expected to be in a line by themselves. The available commands are: resume, rekey1 (local rekey), rekey (rekey on both peers) and renegotiate.

inline-commands-prefix option.

This is the “change the default delimiter for inline commands” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Change the default delimiter (^) used for inline commands. The delimiter is expected to be a single US-ASCII character (octets 0 - 127). This option is only relevant if inline commands are enabled via the inline-commands option

provider option.

This is the “specify the pkcs #11 provider library” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.FILE argument. This will override the default options in /etc/gnutls/pkcs11.conf

logfile option.

This is the “redirect informational messages to a specific file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Redirect informational messages to a specific file. The file may be /dev/null also to make the gnutls client quiet to use it in piped server connections where only the server communication may appear on stdout.

waitresumption option.

This is the “block waiting for the resumption data under tls1.3” option. This option makes the client to block waiting for the resumption data under TLS1.3. The option has effect only when –resume is provided.

ca-auto-retrieve option.

This is the “enable automatic retrieval of missing ca certificates” option. This option enables the client to automatically retrieve the missing intermediate CA certificates in the certificate chain, based on the Authority Information Access (AIA) extension.

attime option.

This is the “perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument timestamp. timestamp is an instance in time encoded as Unix time or in a human readable timestring such as "29 Feb 2004", "2004-02-29". Full documentation available at <https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/Date-input-formats.html> or locally via info ’(coreutils) date invocation’.

version option (-v).

This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.

help option (-h).

This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.

more-help option (-!).

This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.

gnutls-cli exit status

One of the following exit values will be returned:

0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

Successful program execution.

1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

gnutls-cli See Also

gnutls-cli-debug(1), gnutls-serv(1)

gnutls-cli Examples

Connecting using PSK authentication

To connect to a server using PSK authentication, you need to enable the choice of PSK by using a cipher priority parameter such as in the example below.

$ ./gnutls-cli -p 5556 localhost --pskusername psk_identity \
    --pskkey 88f3824b3e5659f52d00e959bacab954b6540344 \
    --priority NORMAL:-KX-ALL:+ECDHE-PSK:+DHE-PSK:+PSK
Resolving 'localhost'...
Connecting to '127.0.0.1:5556'...
- PSK authentication.
- Version: TLS1.1
- Key Exchange: PSK
- Cipher: AES-128-CBC
- MAC: SHA1
- Compression: NULL
- Handshake was completed
    
- Simple Client Mode:

By keeping the –pskusername parameter and removing the –pskkey parameter, it will query only for the password during the handshake.

Connecting using raw public-key authentication

To connect to a server using raw public-key authentication, you need to enable the option to negotiate raw public-keys via the priority strings such as in the example below.

$ ./gnutls-cli -p 5556 localhost --priority NORMAL:-CTYPE-CLI-ALL:+CTYPE-CLI-RAWPK \
    --rawpkkeyfile cli.key.pem \
    --rawpkfile cli.rawpk.pem
Processed 1 client raw public key pair...
Resolving 'localhost'...
Connecting to '127.0.0.1:5556'...
- Successfully sent 1 certificate(s) to server.
- Server has requested a certificate.
- Certificate type: X.509
- Got a certificate list of 1 certificates.
- Certificate[0] info:
 - skipped
- Description: (TLS1.3-Raw Public Key-X.509)-(ECDHE-SECP256R1)-(RSA-PSS-RSAE-SHA256)-(AES-256-GCM)
- Options:
- Handshake was completed
    
- Simple Client Mode:

Connecting to STARTTLS services

You could also use the client to connect to services with starttls capability.

$ gnutls-cli --starttls-proto smtp --port 25 localhost

Listing ciphersuites in a priority string

To list the ciphersuites in a priority string:

$ ./gnutls-cli --priority SECURE192 -l
Cipher suites for SECURE192
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_AES_256_CBC_SHA384         0xc0, 0x24	TLS1.2
TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_AES_256_GCM_SHA384         0xc0, 0x2e	TLS1.2
TLS_ECDHE_RSA_AES_256_GCM_SHA384           0xc0, 0x30	TLS1.2
TLS_DHE_RSA_AES_256_CBC_SHA256             0x00, 0x6b	TLS1.2
TLS_DHE_DSS_AES_256_CBC_SHA256             0x00, 0x6a	TLS1.2
TLS_RSA_AES_256_CBC_SHA256                 0x00, 0x3d	TLS1.2

Certificate types: CTYPE-X.509
Protocols: VERS-TLS1.2, VERS-TLS1.1, VERS-TLS1.0, VERS-SSL3.0, VERS-DTLS1.0
Compression: COMP-NULL
Elliptic curves: CURVE-SECP384R1, CURVE-SECP521R1
PK-signatures: SIGN-RSA-SHA384, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA384, SIGN-RSA-SHA512, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA512

Connecting using a PKCS #11 token

To connect to a server using a certificate and a private key present in a PKCS #11 token you need to substitute the PKCS 11 URLs in the x509certfile and x509keyfile parameters.

Those can be found using "p11tool –list-tokens" and then listing all the objects in the needed token, and using the appropriate.

$ p11tool --list-tokens

Token 0:
	URL: pkcs11:model=PKCS15;manufacturer=MyMan;serial=1234;token=Test
	Label: Test
	Manufacturer: EnterSafe
	Model: PKCS15
	Serial: 1234

$ p11tool --login --list-certs "pkcs11:model=PKCS15;manufacturer=MyMan;serial=1234;token=Test"

Object 0:
	URL: pkcs11:model=PKCS15;manufacturer=MyMan;serial=1234;token=Test;object=client;type=cert
	Type: X.509 Certificate
	Label: client
	ID: 2a:97:0d:58:d1:51:3c:23:07:ae:4e:0d:72:26:03:7d:99:06:02:6a

$ MYCERT="pkcs11:model=PKCS15;manufacturer=MyMan;serial=1234;token=Test;object=client;type=cert"
$ MYKEY="pkcs11:model=PKCS15;manufacturer=MyMan;serial=1234;token=Test;object=client;type=private"
$ export MYCERT MYKEY

$ gnutls-cli www.example.com --x509keyfile $MYKEY --x509certfile $MYCERT

Notice that the private key only differs from the certificate in the type.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Other included programs   [Contents][Index]

gnutls-serv Invocation

Invoking gnutls-serv

Server program that listens to incoming TLS connections.

gnutls-serv help/usage (-?)

The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option (--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. more-help is disabled on platforms without a working fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

gnutls-serv - GnuTLS server
Usage:  gnutls-serv [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... 

None:

   -d, --debug=num            Enable debugging
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 9999
       --sni-hostname=str     Server's hostname for server name extension
       --sni-hostname-fatal   Send fatal alert on sni-hostname mismatch
       --alpn=str             Specify ALPN protocol to be enabled by the server
       --alpn-fatal           Send fatal alert on non-matching ALPN name
       --noticket             Don't accept session tickets
       --earlydata            Accept early data
       --maxearlydata=num     The maximum early data size to accept
				- it must be in the range:
				  1 to 2147483648
       --nocookie             Don't require cookie on DTLS sessions
   -g, --generate             Generate Diffie-Hellman parameters
   -q, --quiet                Suppress some messages
       --nodb                 Do not use a resumption database
       --http                 Act as an HTTP server
       --echo                 Act as an Echo server
       --crlf                 Do not replace CRLF by LF in Echo server mode
   -u, --udp                  Use DTLS (datagram TLS) over UDP
       --mtu=num              Set MTU for datagram TLS
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 17000
       --srtp-profiles=str    Offer SRTP profiles
   -a, --disable-client-cert  Do not request a client certificate
				- prohibits the option 'require-client-cert'
   -r, --require-client-cert  Require a client certificate
       --verify-client-cert   If a client certificate is sent then verify it
       --compress-cert=str    Compress certificate
   -b, --heartbeat            Activate heartbeat support
       --x509fmtder           Use DER format for certificates to read from
       --priority=str         Priorities string
       --dhparams=file        DH params file to use
				- file must pre-exist
       --x509cafile=str       Certificate file or PKCS #11 URL to use
       --x509crlfile=file     CRL file to use
				- file must pre-exist
       --x509keyfile=str      X.509 key file or PKCS #11 URL to use
       --x509certfile=str     X.509 Certificate file or PKCS #11 URL to use
       --rawpkkeyfile=str     Private key file (PKCS #8 or PKCS #12) or PKCS #11 URL to use
       --rawpkfile=str        Raw public-key file to use
				- requires the option 'rawpkkeyfile'
       --srppasswd=file       SRP password file to use
				- file must pre-exist
       --srppasswdconf=file   SRP password configuration file to use
				- file must pre-exist
       --pskpasswd=file       PSK password file to use
				- file must pre-exist
       --pskhint=str          PSK identity hint to use
       --ocsp-response=str    The OCSP response to send to client
       --ignore-ocsp-response-errors  Ignore any errors when setting the OCSP response
   -p, --port=num             The port to connect to
   -l, --list                 Print a list of the supported algorithms and modes
       --provider=file        Specify the PKCS #11 provider library
				- file must pre-exist
       --keymatexport=str     Label used for exporting keying material
       --keymatexportsize=num Size of the exported keying material
       --recordsize=num       The maximum record size to advertise
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 16384
       --httpdata=file        The data used as HTTP response
				- file must pre-exist
       --timeout=num          The timeout period for server
       --attime=str           Perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time

Version, usage and configuration options:

   -v, --version[=arg]        output version information and exit
   -h, --help                 display extended usage information and exit
   -!, --more-help            extended usage information passed thru pager

Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
hyphen and the flag character.

Server program that listens to incoming TLS connections.

Please send bug reports to:  <bugs@gnutls.org>

debug option (-d).

This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.

sni-hostname option.

This is the “server’s hostname for server name extension” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Server name of type host_name that the server will recognise as its own. If the server receives client hello with different name, it will send a warning-level unrecognized_name alert.

alpn option.

This is the “specify alpn protocol to be enabled by the server” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Specify the (textual) ALPN protocol for the server to use.

require-client-cert option (-r).

This is the “require a client certificate” option. This option before 3.6.0 used to imply –verify-client-cert. Since 3.6.0 it will no longer verify the certificate by default.

verify-client-cert option.

This is the “if a client certificate is sent then verify it” option. Do not require, but if a client certificate is sent then verify it and close the connection if invalid.

compress-cert option.

This is the “compress certificate” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option sets a supported compression method for certificate compression.

heartbeat option (-b).

This is the “activate heartbeat support” option. Regularly ping client via heartbeat extension messages

priority option.

This is the “priorities string” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. TLS algorithms and protocols to enable. You can use predefined sets of ciphersuites such as PERFORMANCE, NORMAL, SECURE128, SECURE256. The default is NORMAL.

Check the GnuTLS manual on section “Priority strings” for more information on allowed keywords

x509keyfile option.

This is the “x.509 key file or pkcs #11 url to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Specify the private key file or URI to use; it must correspond to the certificate specified in –x509certfile. Multiple keys and certificates can be specified with this option and in that case each occurrence of keyfile must be followed by the corresponding x509certfile or vice-versa.

x509certfile option.

This is the “x.509 certificate file or pkcs #11 url to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Specify the certificate file or URI to use; it must correspond to the key specified in –x509keyfile. Multiple keys and certificates can be specified with this option and in that case each occurrence of keyfile must be followed by the corresponding x509certfile or vice-versa.

x509dsakeyfile option.

This is an alias for the x509keyfile option, see the x509keyfile option documentation.

x509dsacertfile option.

This is an alias for the x509certfile option, see the x509certfile option documentation.

x509ecckeyfile option.

This is an alias for the x509keyfile option, see the x509keyfile option documentation.

x509ecccertfile option.

This is an alias for the x509certfile option, see the x509certfile option documentation.

rawpkkeyfile option.

This is the “private key file (pkcs #8 or pkcs #12) or pkcs #11 url to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Specify the private key file or URI to use; it must correspond to the raw public-key specified in –rawpkfile. Multiple key pairs can be specified with this option and in that case each occurrence of keyfile must be followed by the corresponding rawpkfile or vice-versa.

In order to instruct the application to negotiate raw public keys one must enable the respective certificate types via the priority strings (i.e. CTYPE-CLI-* and CTYPE-SRV-* flags).

Check the GnuTLS manual on section “Priority strings” for more information on how to set certificate types.

rawpkfile option.

This is the “raw public-key file to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.

This option has some usage constraints. It:

Specify the raw public-key file to use; it must correspond to the private key specified in –rawpkkeyfile. Multiple key pairs can be specified with this option and in that case each occurrence of keyfile must be followed by the corresponding rawpkfile or vice-versa.

In order to instruct the application to negotiate raw public keys one must enable the respective certificate types via the priority strings (i.e. CTYPE-CLI-* and CTYPE-SRV-* flags).

Check the GnuTLS manual on section “Priority strings” for more information on how to set certificate types.

ocsp-response option.

This is the “the ocsp response to send to client” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. If the client requested an OCSP response, return data from this file to the client.

ignore-ocsp-response-errors option.

This is the “ignore any errors when setting the ocsp response” option. That option instructs gnutls to not attempt to match the provided OCSP responses with the certificates.

list option (-l).

This is the “print a list of the supported algorithms and modes” option. Print a list of the supported algorithms and modes. If a priority string is given then only the enabled ciphersuites are shown.

provider option.

This is the “specify the pkcs #11 provider library” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.FILE argument. This will override the default options in /etc/gnutls/pkcs11.conf

attime option.

This is the “perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument timestamp. timestamp is an instance in time encoded as Unix time or in a human readable timestring such as "29 Feb 2004", "2004-02-29". Full documentation available at <https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/Date-input-formats.html> or locally via info ’(coreutils) date invocation’.

version option (-v).

This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.

help option (-h).

This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.

more-help option (-!).

This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.

gnutls-serv exit status

One of the following exit values will be returned:

0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

Successful program execution.

1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

gnutls-serv See Also

gnutls-cli-debug(1), gnutls-cli(1)

gnutls-serv Examples

Running your own TLS server based on GnuTLS can be useful when debugging clients and/or GnuTLS itself. This section describes how to use gnutls-serv as a simple HTTPS server.

The most basic server can be started as:

gnutls-serv --http --priority "NORMAL:+ANON-ECDH:+ANON-DH"

It will only support anonymous ciphersuites, which many TLS clients refuse to use.

The next step is to add support for X.509. First we generate a CA:

$ certtool --generate-privkey > x509-ca-key.pem
$ echo 'cn = GnuTLS test CA' > ca.tmpl
$ echo 'ca' >> ca.tmpl
$ echo 'cert_signing_key' >> ca.tmpl
$ certtool --generate-self-signed --load-privkey x509-ca-key.pem \
  --template ca.tmpl --outfile x509-ca.pem

Then generate a server certificate. Remember to change the dns_name value to the name of your server host, or skip that command to avoid the field.

$ certtool --generate-privkey > x509-server-key.pem
$ echo 'organization = GnuTLS test server' > server.tmpl
$ echo 'cn = test.gnutls.org' >> server.tmpl
$ echo 'tls_www_server' >> server.tmpl
$ echo 'encryption_key' >> server.tmpl
$ echo 'signing_key' >> server.tmpl
$ echo 'dns_name = test.gnutls.org' >> server.tmpl
$ certtool --generate-certificate --load-privkey x509-server-key.pem \
  --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem --load-ca-privkey x509-ca-key.pem \
  --template server.tmpl --outfile x509-server.pem

For use in the client, you may want to generate a client certificate as well.

$ certtool --generate-privkey > x509-client-key.pem
$ echo 'cn = GnuTLS test client' > client.tmpl
$ echo 'tls_www_client' >> client.tmpl
$ echo 'encryption_key' >> client.tmpl
$ echo 'signing_key' >> client.tmpl
$ certtool --generate-certificate --load-privkey x509-client-key.pem \
  --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem --load-ca-privkey x509-ca-key.pem \
  --template client.tmpl --outfile x509-client.pem

To be able to import the client key/certificate into some applications, you will need to convert them into a PKCS#12 structure. This also encrypts the security sensitive key with a password.

$ certtool --to-p12 --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem \
  --load-privkey x509-client-key.pem --load-certificate x509-client.pem \
  --outder --outfile x509-client.p12

For icing, we’ll create a proxy certificate for the client too.

$ certtool --generate-privkey > x509-proxy-key.pem
$ echo 'cn = GnuTLS test client proxy' > proxy.tmpl
$ certtool --generate-proxy --load-privkey x509-proxy-key.pem \
  --load-ca-certificate x509-client.pem --load-ca-privkey x509-client-key.pem \
  --load-certificate x509-client.pem --template proxy.tmpl \
  --outfile x509-proxy.pem

Then start the server again:

$ gnutls-serv --http \
            --x509cafile x509-ca.pem \
            --x509keyfile x509-server-key.pem \
            --x509certfile x509-server.pem

Try connecting to the server using your web browser. Note that the server listens to port 5556 by default.

While you are at it, to allow connections using ECDSA, you can also create a ECDSA key and certificate for the server. These credentials will be used in the final example below.

$ certtool --generate-privkey --ecdsa > x509-server-key-ecc.pem
$ certtool --generate-certificate --load-privkey x509-server-key-ecc.pem \
  --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem --load-ca-privkey x509-ca-key.pem \
  --template server.tmpl --outfile x509-server-ecc.pem

The next step is to add support for SRP authentication. This requires an SRP password file created with srptool. To start the server with SRP support:

gnutls-serv --http --priority NORMAL:+SRP-RSA:+SRP \
            --srppasswdconf srp-tpasswd.conf \
            --srppasswd srp-passwd.txt

Let’s also start a server with support for PSK. This would require a password file created with psktool.

gnutls-serv --http --priority NORMAL:+ECDHE-PSK:+PSK \
            --pskpasswd psk-passwd.txt

If you want a server with support for raw public-keys we can also add these credentials. Note however that there is no identity information linked to these keys as is the case with regular x509 certificates. Authentication must be done via different means. Also we need to explicitly enable raw public-key certificates via the priority strings.

gnutls-serv --http --priority NORMAL:+CTYPE-CLI-RAWPK:+CTYPE-SRV-RAWPK \
            --rawpkfile srv.rawpk.pem \
            --rawpkkeyfile srv.key.pem

Finally, we start the server with all the earlier parameters and you get this command:

gnutls-serv --http --priority NORMAL:+PSK:+SRP:+CTYPE-CLI-RAWPK:+CTYPE-SRV-RAWPK \
            --x509cafile x509-ca.pem \
            --x509keyfile x509-server-key.pem \
            --x509certfile x509-server.pem \
            --x509keyfile x509-server-key-ecc.pem \
            --x509certfile x509-server-ecc.pem \
            --srppasswdconf srp-tpasswd.conf \
            --srppasswd srp-passwd.txt \
            --pskpasswd psk-passwd.txt \
            --rawpkfile srv.rawpk.pem \
            --rawpkkeyfile srv.key.pem

Previous: , Up: Other included programs   [Contents][Index]

gnutls-cli-debug Invocation

Invoking gnutls-cli-debug

TLS debug client. It sets up multiple TLS connections to a server and queries its capabilities. It was created to assist in debugging GnuTLS, but it might be useful to extract a TLS server’s capabilities. It connects to a TLS server, performs tests and print the server’s capabilities. If called with the ‘-V’ parameter more checks will be performed. Can be used to check for servers with special needs or bugs.

gnutls-cli-debug help/usage (-?)

The text printed is the same whether selected with the help option (--help) or the more-help option (--more-help). more-help will print the usage text by passing it through a pager program. more-help is disabled on platforms without a working fork(2) function. The PAGER environment variable is used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit with a status code of 0.

gnutls-cli-debug - GnuTLS debug client
Usage:  gnutls-cli-debug [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [hostname]

None:

   -d, --debug=num            Enable debugging
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 9999
   -V, --verbose              More verbose output
   -p, --port=num             The port to connect to
				- it must be in the range:
				  0 to 65536
       --app-proto            an alias for the 'starttls-proto' option
       --starttls-proto=str   The application protocol to be used to obtain the server's certificate (https, ftp, smtp, imap, ldap, xmpp, lmtp, pop3, nntp, sieve, postgres)
       --attime=str           Perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time

Version, usage and configuration options:

   -v, --version[=arg]        output version information and exit
   -h, --help                 display extended usage information and exit
   -!, --more-help            extended usage information passed thru pager

Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single
hyphen and the flag character.
Operands and options may be intermixed.  They will be reordered.

TLS debug client. It sets up multiple TLS connections to 
a server and queries its capabilities. It was created to assist in debugging 
GnuTLS, but it might be useful to extract a TLS server's capabilities.
It connects to a TLS server, performs tests and print the server's 
capabilities. If called with the `-V' parameter more checks will be performed.
Can be used to check for servers with special needs or bugs.

Please send bug reports to:  <bugs@gnutls.org>

debug option (-d).

This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.

app-proto option.

This is an alias for the starttls-proto option, see the starttls-proto option documentation.

starttls-proto option.

This is the “the application protocol to be used to obtain the server’s certificate (https, ftp, smtp, imap, ldap, xmpp, lmtp, pop3, nntp, sieve, postgres)” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Specify the application layer protocol for STARTTLS. If the protocol is supported, gnutls-cli will proceed to the TLS negotiation.

attime option.

This is the “perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument timestamp. timestamp is an instance in time encoded as Unix time or in a human readable timestring such as "29 Feb 2004", "2004-02-29". Full documentation available at <https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/Date-input-formats.html> or locally via info ’(coreutils) date invocation’.

version option (-v).

This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.

help option (-h).

This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.

more-help option (-!).

This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.

gnutls-cli-debug exit status

One of the following exit values will be returned:

0 (EXIT_SUCCESS)

Successful program execution.

1 (EXIT_FAILURE)

The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.

gnutls-cli-debug See Also

gnutls-cli(1), gnutls-serv(1)

gnutls-cli-debug Examples

$ gnutls-cli-debug localhost
GnuTLS debug client 3.5.0
Checking localhost:443
                             for SSL 3.0 (RFC6101) support... yes
                        whether we need to disable TLS 1.2... no
                        whether we need to disable TLS 1.1... no
                        whether we need to disable TLS 1.0... no
                        whether %NO_EXTENSIONS is required... no
                               whether %COMPAT is required... no
                             for TLS 1.0 (RFC2246) support... yes
                             for TLS 1.1 (RFC4346) support... yes
                             for TLS 1.2 (RFC5246) support... yes
                                  fallback from TLS 1.6 to... TLS1.2
                        for RFC7507 inappropriate fallback... yes
                                     for HTTPS server name... Local
                               for certificate chain order... sorted
                  for safe renegotiation (RFC5746) support... yes
                     for Safe renegotiation support (SCSV)... no
                    for encrypt-then-MAC (RFC7366) support... no
                   for ext master secret (RFC7627) support... no
                           for heartbeat (RFC6520) support... no
                       for version rollback bug in RSA PMS... dunno
                  for version rollback bug in Client Hello... no
            whether the server ignores the RSA PMS version... yes
whether small records (512 bytes) are tolerated on handshake... yes
    whether cipher suites not in SSL 3.0 spec are accepted... yes
whether a bogus TLS record version in the client hello is accepted... yes
         whether the server understands TLS closure alerts... partially
            whether the server supports session resumption... yes
                      for anonymous authentication support... no
                      for ephemeral Diffie-Hellman support... no
                   for ephemeral EC Diffie-Hellman support... yes
                    ephemeral EC Diffie-Hellman group info... SECP256R1
                  for AES-128-GCM cipher (RFC5288) support... yes
                  for AES-128-CCM cipher (RFC6655) support... no
                for AES-128-CCM-8 cipher (RFC6655) support... no
                  for AES-128-CBC cipher (RFC3268) support... yes
             for CAMELLIA-128-GCM cipher (RFC6367) support... no
             for CAMELLIA-128-CBC cipher (RFC5932) support... no
                     for 3DES-CBC cipher (RFC2246) support... yes
                  for ARCFOUR 128 cipher (RFC2246) support... yes
                                       for MD5 MAC support... yes
                                      for SHA1 MAC support... yes
                                    for SHA256 MAC support... yes
                              for ZLIB compression support... no
                     for max record size (RFC6066) support... no
                for OCSP status response (RFC6066) support... no
              for OpenPGP authentication (RFC6091) support... no

You could also use the client to debug services with starttls capability.

$ gnutls-cli-debug --starttls-proto smtp --port 25 localhost

Next: , Previous: , Up: Top   [Contents][Index]

11 Internal Architecture of GnuTLS

This chapter is to give a brief description of the way GnuTLS works. The focus is to give an idea to potential developers and those who want to know what happens inside the black box.


Next: , Up: Internal architecture of GnuTLS   [Contents][Index]

11.1 The TLS Protocol

The main use case for the TLS protocol is shown in Figure 11.1. A user of a library implementing the protocol expects no less than this functionality, i.e., to be able to set parameters such as the accepted security level, perform a negotiation with the peer and be able to exchange data.

gnutls-client-server-use-case

Figure 11.1: TLS protocol use case.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Internal architecture of GnuTLS   [Contents][Index]

11.2 TLS Handshake Protocol

The GnuTLS handshake protocol is implemented as a state machine that waits for input or returns immediately when the non-blocking transport layer functions are used. The main idea is shown in Figure 11.2.

gnutls-handshake-state

Figure 11.2: GnuTLS handshake state machine.

Also the way the input is processed varies per ciphersuite. Several implementations of the internal handlers are available and gnutls_handshake only multiplexes the input to the appropriate handler. For example a PSK ciphersuite has a different implementation of the process_client_key_exchange than a certificate ciphersuite. We illustrate the idea in Figure 11.3.

gnutls-handshake-sequence

Figure 11.3: GnuTLS handshake process sequence.


Next: , Previous: , Up: Internal architecture of GnuTLS   [Contents][Index]

11.3 TLS Authentication Methods

In GnuTLS authentication methods can be implemented quite easily. Since the required changes to add a new authentication method affect only the handshake protocol, a simple interface is used. An authentication method needs to implement the functions shown below.

typedef struct
{
  const char *name;
  int (*gnutls_generate_server_certificate) (gnutls_session_t, gnutls_buffer_st*);
  int (*gnutls_generate_client_certificate) (gnutls_session_t, gnutls_buffer_st*);
  int (*gnutls_generate_server_kx) (gnutls_session_t, gnutls_buffer_st*);
  int (*gnutls_generate_client_kx) (gnutls_session_t, gnutls_buffer_st*);
  int (*gnutls_generate_client_cert_vrfy) (gnutls_session_t, gnutls_buffer_st *);
  int (*gnutls_generate_server_certificate_request) (gnutls_session_t,
                                                     gnutls_buffer_st *);

  int (*gnutls_process_server_certificate) (gnutls_session_t, opaque *,
                                            size_t);
  int (*gnutls_process_client_certificate) (gnutls_session_t, opaque *,
                                            size_t);
  int (*gnutls_process_server_kx) (gnutls_session_t, opaque *, size_t);
  int (*gnutls_process_client_kx) (gnutls_session_t, opaque *, size_t);
  int (*gnutls_process_client_cert_